7/10/2024

Defense & Security

Generated on: 2024-07-10 10:51:09 GMT+0000

SAP S/4HANA | 2023 Latest

PUBLIC

Original content: https://help.sap.com/docs/SAP_S4HANA_ON-PREMISE/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d?locale=en-

US&state=PRODUCTION&version=2023.001

Warning

This document has been generated from the SAP Help Portal and is an incomplete version of the official SAP product
documentation. The information included in custom documentation may not re ect the arrangement of topics in the SAP Help
Portal, and may be missing important aspects and/or correlations to other topics. For this reason, it is not for productive use.

For more information, please visit the https://help.sap.com/docs/disclaimer.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 1
 7/10/2024

Defense & Security

Purpose
Due to the speci c nature of their missions and tasks, armed forces, police organizations, and aid organizations need to be able
to perform the following activities from the domestic base for operations and exercises:

Flexibly plan and execute operations and exercises (planning, relocation of contingents, execution, redeployment of
contingents).

Trigger and control accompanying or subsequent business processes (such as purchase orders, maintenance tasks,
budgeting).

Automate or automatically trigger and execute subsequent processes as a result of organizational changes.

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution enhances the standard SAP functions by providing functions for the following
business tasks and processes :

Organizational Flexibility (mapping organizational structures and material and personnel resource planning)

Materials Management

Maintenance

Support for Flight Operations

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution solution allows you to operate Disconnected Operations even in
communication-challenged environments.

Implementation Considerations
To be able to use the full range of functions available in the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you must:

Activate the required business function :

SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security (IS_S4DFS_1)

You use this business function to activate the functions in the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution.

Make the Customizing settings under Defense & Security

Use the SAP components mentioned below - according to your requirements.

Integration
The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution is integrated with many other components in the SAP system. The following
gives you an overview of the most important components that you can use in addition to the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security
solution. The individual sections of this documentation discuss the relevant component integrations in more detail.

SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management

The following SAP S/4HANA Enterprise Management components are speci cally required:

Human Resources Management

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 2
 7/10/2024
The organizational structures and personnel assignment of armed forces, police organizations, and aid organizations are
mapped exibly using the components

Organizational Management (PA-OS)

Personnel Administration (PA-PA)

Logistics

The execution of logistics processes is for example based on the standard functions in the following components:

Materials Management (MM)

Asset Management

Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management

The following components are also used:

Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)

Integrated Product and Process Engineering (LO-MD-PPE)

Accounting

The business processes can be integrated using Accounting functions, speci cally the functions in the following
components:

Controlling (CO)

Funds Management (PSM-FM)

Cross-application components

The following components are also used

Document Management (CA-DMS)

Documents are included in component-speci c objects using the functions in the Document Management
component.

Data Retention Tool (CA-GTF-DRT)

Use the DART functions for data archiving.

Time Zones (CA-GTF-TIM)

SAP NetWeaver

The following SAP NetWeaver components are required speci cally:

Basis

User and Authorization Management (BC-SC-USR)

The systems involved in the distributed system landscape are provided with the required users and
authorizations on the basis of the standard User and Authorization Management tools.

For more information about these components, see the relevant documentation on the SAP Help Portal.

Organizational Flexibility
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 3
 7/10/2024

Purpose
The different business processes used by armed forces, police, and aid organizations (Human Resources Management,
Materials Management, Maintenance, and so on) operate using organizational structures.

Each organizational element (department or unit for example):

Has certain properties, responsibilities, tasks, and missions

Requires personnel, material, and nancial resources to perform its tasks

Is included in different organizational structures (organizational structure, command and support relationships, and so
on) and works in conjunction with other organizational elements according to the relationships de ned here.

You can use the functions in the Organizational Flexibility area of the Defense & Security component to map these
organizational bases and to perform your resource planning.

Prerequisites
You have used the SAP Help Portal to learn about the functions in the Organizational Management component (in particular the
object type organizational unit and the relationships).

Features
You can use the functions in the Organizational Flexibility area to map the following for your organization:

The organizational elements using force elements

The authorized materials (in the form of non-consumable goods) for the individual organizational elements required to
perform tasks or missions

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 4
 7/10/2024

Organizational Structures

The gure shows the organizational structure in a simpli ed form. The various links between the organizational elements show
that not all elements are included in just one structure, but that different structures can be mapped at the same time. Each
organizational element can be described using the properties mentioned earlier.

 Note
You can also map external elements that do not belong to your organization (such as elements from cooperating
organizations). These elements can be created as a black box and do not need to be described with all their properties.

On the basis of these organizational structures, you can make organizational changes in your daily business.

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution provides component-speci c user interfaces for this purpose.

Force Elements

De nition

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 5
 7/10/2024
An enhancement to the organizational unit object type in the Organizational Management component. It enables organizational
elements for armed forces, police, and aid organizations to be represented together with their speci c properties and
relationships.

The force element is used speci cally to add properties to the organizational unit object type in the Logistics area. This enables
organizational structures to be integrated to plan and control administrative, HR, and logistics processes.

Use
You use force elements to:

Represent organizational elements (divisions, battalions, companies, and so on), together with their properties, such as:

Mission (assignment of tasks and/or documents)

Names, classi cations, and descriptions

Functional responsibilities, such as for supplying or providing speci c services to other organizational elements

Addresses, geolocations, and geocoordinates

Inclusion in logistics structures (assignment to plant, MRP areas, and so on)

Inclusion in Accounting and Funds Management (assignment to cost centers, WBS elements and so on)

Assignments to technical objects and logistics

Represent and plan the equipment used by your organization in terms of personnel and materials at organizational
element level.

Represent the structure of your organization, which consists of the hierarchical or functional relationships between your
organizational elements.

Force elements used in this way enable you to control processes in the SAP system in different business areas (organization,
personnel, material, maintenance, and so on) on the basis of the properties, tasks, and equipment of organizational elements,
or across organizational structures.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 6
 7/10/2024

Structure

Organizational Unit

The technical basis of a force element is an object of the organizational unit type. The force element enhancement to an
organizational unit is stored in the table /ISDFPS/FORCE.

Field Meaning Use

FORCE_ID Internal key for the force element Identi cation of the force element

FORCE_CNT Internal version counter

PLVAR Plan version (organizational unit) Assignment of the force element to an

organizational unit
OTYPE Object type (organizational unit)

OBJID Object ID (organizational unit)

When a force element is created and edited, the system automatically creates an organizational unit or edits the associated
organizational unit. Relationships between a force element and other objects are created based on the organizational unit that
is associated with the force element in question.

Force elements are always created in the active plan version.

Status and Validity

Force elements have their own status and a validity period. A force element can have the following statuses from status
management in Organizational Management: Planned, Submitted, Approved, Active, Obsolete, or Rejected. See also Status
Network for Force Elements.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 7
 7/10/2024
For more information about the mass status change, see Mass Status Change.

Properties and Relationships

The properties and relationships for force elements are displayed and edited in the structural displays and in the Manage Force
Elements app.

The following properties and assignments for the force element are stored in the table /ISDFPS/FORCE:

Field Meaning Tab Page

WERKS_S Plant (Stock) Stock/Provisions

BERID_S MRP Area (Stock)

ACNTABLE_S Accountable (Stock)

LGORTACNT Storage Location (Stock)

WERKS_P Plant (Provisions)

BERID_P MRP Area (Provisions)

ACNTABLE_P Stockpiling (Provisions)

WERKS_RE Plant (Infrastructure)

BERID_RE MRP Area (Infrastructure)

ACNTABLE_RE Accountable (Infrastructure)

LGORT_RE Storage Location (Infrastructure)

PSPNR WBS Element WBS Element

READINESS_MAT Level of Readiness (Material) Readiness

READINESS_PERS Level of Readiness (Personnel)

READINESS_TRAI Level of Readiness (Training)

EKORG Purchasing Organization Logistics Data

EKGRP Purchasing Group

LOGLEV Logistical Level

PRIO Organizational Priority

MATSTAT Initial Supply Status of Material Initial Supplies

Furthermore, the table contains administrative data about the force element (date of creation, last changed by, and so on).

You can de ne your own elds for this table without any need for extra modi cations. To do so, use the include CI_FORCE.

The following properties and assignments are stored using infotypes:

The properties and relationships for a force element that can be covered by the object type organizational unit are
stored in the force element’s standard infotypes in Organizational Management. These include:

Infotype 1000 (Object)

Infotype 1001 (Relationships)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 8
 7/10/2024
Infotype 1002 (Description)

Infotype 1008 (Acct. Assignment Features)

Infotype 1018 (Cost Distribution)

Infotype 1019 (Quota Planning)

Force element-speci c object properties and relationships are mainly stored in component-speci c infotypes for the
force element:

Infotype 1950 (Properties)

Infotype 1951 (Classi cation)

Infotype 1955 (Cmd and Control Relatshps)

Infotype 1956 (Operation/Exercise)

Infotype 1985 (Op./Ex. Relationships)

Infotype 1952 (Stationing)

Infotype 1984 (Logical System)

Infotype 1986 (Structure Information)

Infotype 1988 (Operational Weighting)

 Note
Be aware that the infotypes 1984, 1986 and 1988 can only be accessed from the backend.

Some properties (assigned information) are stored in special management systems, such as the Document Management
system.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the force elements in the following SAP Fiori apps:

Manage Force Elements

Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner

Manage Force Elements - Material Planner

Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner

Display Force Structure

Model Structure

Copy to Force Element in the Background

Selection and Processing of PPF Actions

Manage Personnel Staffing for Operations and Exercises

All four force element apps listed above can be used independently of one another. Manage Force Elements is the main app.
Different user roles require different parts of the force element data. Therefore, each of the other apps listed above contain the
assignments between force elements and capabilities, authorized material, or maintenance objects according to the user role
involved.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 9
 7/10/2024
All force element apps are essentially identical. However, they are distinguished by the facets they contain for speci c roles. As
a capability planner, you use the Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner app, which contains the Capabilities facet, but not
the Material and Maintenance facets because they are not relevant to this role. Similarly, the material planner uses the
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner app and the maintenance planner uses the Manage Force Elements - Maintenance
Planner app.

Integration
In addition to integration with objects of the organizational unit type, force elements can also be:

Linked to one another as Organizational Structure

Linked to the exible material planning objects to map the authorized materials

Positions for mapping the authorized personnel

Included in logistics structures (plant, MRP areas, storage locations, and so on); see also Stock/Provisions and Logistics
Data

Linked to maintenance objects (master equipment); see also Technical Objects

Linked with jobs, tasks, account assignment objects and documents

Described by reference force elements

Assigned to WBS elements for assignment to relocation projects

Manage Force Elements

App ID: F4112

You can use this app to create, update, delete and delimit organizational units (force elements). You can see detailed
information about the organizational units and their hierarchical command and control relationships with other units on the
various facets that the app provides.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

See a list of all organizational units (force elements).

Search or lter this list using lters, such as the force element name, force element abbreviation and force element ID.

Add (create/copy), update, delete and delimit force elements.

Change the status of force elements.

Create organizational/wartime/peacetime relationships between organizational units.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 10
 7/10/2024

View
Force elements are displayed in a hierarchy or list view. You can de ne a custom view using the available settings and save this.

Structure
A force element has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it that show different information.
These facets are as follows:

Name

Description

Characteristics

Readiness

FE Relationships

Maintenance

Material

Capability

Position

Accounting Overview

Account Assignment

Inherited Master Cost Center

Controlling

Funds Management

Additional WBS Element

Logistics

Technical Objects

Operation

Exercise

Address

Attachments

Classi cation

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a force element using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 11
 7/10/2024
You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

 Note
You can select a search template for the Force Element ID search eld to further re ne your search. By clicking on Show
Filters, you see the search elds that are available for the template you have selected.

In the Hierarchy View, you must provide details in the search section and choose Go to see the force element results.

You can select any force element and click Display Higher-Level Force Element to view the next higher-level force element for
the selected force element.

You can update the order in which the child force elements are displayed by selecting the parent force element and clicking on
Update Force Element Order.

 Note
The hierarchy view does not show search results for existing force elements unless you provide details in the search section
of the list page. The list view shows these search results.

When you search for an operational force element or an exercise force element by providing the ID and specifying the usage
type as Operation/Exercise, a new column Rotation Ful llment is displayed in the search results. It displays a pictorial
representation of the percentage of active operation/exercise positions that are ful lled for each rotation of the
operational/exercise force element. Ful llment details are only displayed for four rotations at a time, and these can be present
and future rotations. Past rotation details are not displayed here.

In the List View, you can view all force elements by choosing Go.

Creating a Force Element

When creating a force element, you must rst choose the parent force element. The root force element can be created without
a parent force element. It becomes a parent when the rst force element is created below it.

To create a root force element, click Create Root Force Element in the list view. You must make entries in the elds marked with
a red asterisk. The system de nes the current date as a default Valid From date. You can change this if necessary.

 Note
You cannot create a root force element from the hierarchical view.

As soon as you start editing the force element, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you can save it
actively.

You must rst make the Customizing settings as described below for the following elds:

You de ne organizational areas and their assignment to organizational area types in Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element De ne Organizational Areas .

You de ne structure types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element
De ne Structure Types .

You de ne branches in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element De ne
Branches .

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 12
 7/10/2024
You de ne organizational area types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force
Element De ne Organizational Area Types .

You can de ne how the symbol code is generated in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Force Element De ne Symbol Code .

Note that you can only create a force element below a parent force element. You can create one or more force elements
simultaneously for the parent force element by clicking on the option Create Multiple Force Elements. Select the structure type
and enter values for the force element name and abbreviation and then choose Create. The force element created is displayed
on the facet FE Relationships Organizational Structure for the parent force element.

 Note
On the basis of the customer settings, the structure (organizational structure, wartime, administrative chain of command)
used to create or copy a force element or position can be customized so that the disabled structure type cannot be selected.

To update a force element, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds marked with a red
asterisk contain data.

Choose Copy to Force Element to copy a single force element or its structure. You can copy the structure and select the target
force element according to your requirements. You can also rename the force element before you copy it. You can copy force
elements only or the force element structure including positions.

Choose Copy to Force Element in the Background to copy several force elements collectively. You can also use the Copy to
Force Element in the Background app, which you can access from the launchpad. Once mass copying of the force elements is
complete, the system sends an email con rming this.

 Note
You can copy the structure for force elements according to your requirements. You can rename the force element before you
copy it. You can choose which aspects of the force element are to be copied and do not have to copy everything.

Once a mass copy has been created, you can check the logs for the copied force elements in the Selection and Processing of
PPF Actions app.

Basic Information About a Force Element

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a force element.

Header
The header shows the key information about a force element.

When you create a force element, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you
have nished editing. For more information about the status, see Status Network for Force Elements.

For more information about the mass status change, see Mass Status Change.

 Note
The Force Element Name is always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

Name
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 13
 7/10/2024
The name identi es a force element and describes the identifying properties of the organizational unit that also apply to the
force element.

When you create a force element, you must give it a name, abbreviation and a validity period.

The system assigns a force element ID automatically here.

You can create more than one entry. However, only one entry can be active at any time. If you activate a second entry, this
automatically delimits the rst entry to the day before the active entry starts.

You can only enter a name when the force element is in the edit mode.

You can choose Maintain Translation to translate the name entry into any language. All available languages for the entry are
shown, not only the logon language.

This data is stored in infotype 1000 in Organizational Management.

In the table /ISDFPS/FORCE, organizational units are de ned as force elements on the basis of their object ID.

Description
You can enter different types of descriptions, such as legal and technical descriptions that are de ned by the subtype.

You can only enter descriptions when the force element is in the edit mode. The description is a long text with no character limit.

You can choose Maintain Translation to translate the description entry into any language. All available languages for the entry
are shown, not only the logon language.

Descriptions are stored in infotype 1002 in Organizational Management.

Characteristics
The entries shown in the elds here correspond to the data you entered when you created the force element. The structure
level is de ned by the structure type.

When you create a force element, you must specify the country/region, organizational area and structure type for which it is to
be used. The system assigns a force element ID automatically here.

Organizational areas are modeled for each country/region to describe the structure of your organization (independently of the
organizational structure). You assign a force element to an organizational area.

Structure levels are de ned for an organizational area type to describe the hierarchical relationship (and therefore the size) of
an organizational unit. You assign a force element to a structure level.

You de ne structure levels in Customizing, by choosing Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements
De ne Structure Levels .

Structure types are de ned for each structure level in an organizational area. These structure types describe the hierarchical
relationship (and therefore the size) of the organizational unit. You assign a force element to a structure type.

You de ne structure types in Customizing, by choosing Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements
De ne Structure Types .

In accordance with the basic de nition STANG 5500 and A-DatP-3, the unit identi er code pre x (UIC pre x) is made up of the
two-character country/region code and the one-character organizational area. The UIC is a user-de nable, alphanumeric, six-
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 14
 7/10/2024
character code. The rst four characters of the six-character code describe the unit level of the assigned organizational area,
and the last two characters can be used to further subdivide the unit level. The UIC paragraph is a four-character code.

An organizational area has its own branches that represent task-speci c types. You assign a force element to a branch.

You de ne branches in Customizing, by choosing Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements De ne
Branches .

You can use a branch addition to further specify a branch. You assign a force element to a branch addition.

You de ne branch additions in Customizing, by choosing Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements
De ne Branch Additions .

The 15-character symbol code (in accordance with the MIL-STD-2525B standard Common War ghting Symbology) is
generated automatically on the basis of the organizational properties.

You de ne how the symbol code is generated in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force
Elements De ne Symbol Code . You can also nd information about how the symbol code is composed here.

The symbol code can be used to determine the correct tail number for displaying military organizations in geographical
information systems (GIS).

In the event of reorganization, the system checks whether the organizational area for the new higher-level force element is
identical to the subordinate force element. If this is not the case, the user is informed and can adjust the organizational area
details and dependent properties (structure type, and so on).

You can only enter characteristics when the force element is in the edit mode.

Address
Any addresses added are shown here. You can either create a new address or add an existing address to the force element.

To create a new address, you need to go to edit mode and click Create. You must make entries in the elds marked with a red
asterisk. The country/region and postcode are mandatory.

To add an existing address to the force element, you have three options:

You can create an address by choosing Create From Existing Address from the Add Address drop down.

You can copy an existing address to create a new address by choosing Copy From Existing Address.

You can choose Inherit Address to add an address from a higher-level force element.

 Note
You can add one or more addresses to a force element.

The Change Address Globally option is available. If you choose this, the change you make to the address has an impact on all
the force elements to which the address is assigned.

You can transfer the address to a child force element by choosing Transfer Address .

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 15
 7/10/2024

Classi cation
A force element is classi ed using the classi cation system. Class type 068 is de ned for the force element object type. The
class selected de nes the characteristic values that can then be assigned. You can edit these assignments of classes and the
evaluation of characteristics in the classi cation system. For more information about the classi cation system, see
Classi cation (CA-CL).

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution provides a Sensitivity eld, which you can use to assign a speci c sensitivity
value to force elements. This can for example be used to de ne special force units. You can then use this eld to prevent certain
users accessing these units.

To categorize the sensitivity of a unit, you must rst assign the classi cation.

Check whether the eld for sensitivity is already visible on the Classi cation facet. If not, click on Click here to assign a class in
the edit mode to assign the new class type for sensitivity and select class type Sensitivity for Defense (SEN) on the dialog box.

The sensitivity eld has been integrated in the Classi cation facet for force elements. It has been enabled for multiple values,
meaning that a single object can have several different sensitivity values. A user only needs to be granted authorization to
access the object protected by the sensitivity for one of these values. The sensitivity value can also be inherited automatically
from force elements to all other force elements at lower levels of the organizational hierarchy when the usage type of the
sensitivity value is set to F in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Security Sensitivity
De ne Sensitivity Levels .

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

Readiness of a Force Element

To accurately describe and identify force elements, you can enter their degree of readiness and arrange them by their armed
forces classi cation.

The Readiness facet contains the Readiness Level and Readiness Data sections.

Readiness Level
The level of readiness speci es the current readiness of a force element in terms of material, personnel, and training as a
percentage value. Threshold values are used to determine whether the level of readiness is green (ready for action), yellow
(partly ready for action) or red (out of action).

You de ne the threshold values (as a percentage) in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Force Elements Evaluate Level of Readiness .

Material

You enter the level of readiness for the material manually as a percentage.

Personnel

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 16
 7/10/2024
You enter the level of readiness for the personnel manually as a percentage.

Training

You enter the level of readiness for the training status manually as a percentage.

In each subsequent Comment eld, you can enter an explanatory text.

The data for the level of readiness is stored in the table /ISDFPS/FORCE.

Readiness Data
You can specify when a unit is ready in the Readiness Data section. It helps to keep the evaluation of the readiness on track.

You must rst make the Customizing settings as described below for the following elds:

You de ne the readiness in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements
De ne Readiness .

You de ne the activity status in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements
De ne Activity Status .

You de ne the activity completed in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force
Elements De ne Activity Completed .

You de ne the classi cation criteria in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force
Elements De ne Classi cation for Armed Forces .

This data is stored in infotype 1951 (component speci c).

Example
For classi cation purposes, you can use the armed forces classi cations in accordance with NATO conventions:

NATO Command Forces are forces that the member states have placed under the operational command or operational
control of a NATO commander.

NATO Assigned Forces are forces that the member states want to place under the operational command or operational
control of a NATO commander in the case of certain alert measures from the NATO alert system, or as a result of special
agreements.

NATO Earmarked Forces are forces that the member states want to place under the operational command or
operational control of a NATO commander at a later point in time.

Other Forces for NATO are forces that are not NATO Assigned Forces or NATO Earmarked Forces, but which may work
together with NATO forces or which may be placed under the operational command or operational control of a NATO
commander in certain, de ned situations.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 17
 7/10/2024

Force Element Relationships

You display and edit the organizational structures on the FE Relationships facet.

FE relationships are organizational structures that are mapped using relationships between force elements (FE).

When creating a force element relationship, you must rst choose the relationship type to be created.

The following relationships are provided in the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution:

Relationship Type Relationship Description Relationship Object Types

Organizational Structure Reports to A 002 O–O

Organizational Structure ls Line Manager of B 002 O–O

Wartime Reports to A 800 O–O

Wartime Is Line Manager of B 800 O–O

Administrative Chain of Reports to A 803 O–O

Command

Administrative Chain of Is Line Manager of B 803 O–O

Command

Commands Commands A 822 O–O

(Operation/Exercise) (Operation/Exercise)

Commands Is Commanded by B 822 O–O

(Operation/Exercise) (Operation/Exercise)

O = force element

 Note
For a reference force element, only the relationship type organizational structure is applicable. Wartime, administrative
chain of command and commands(exercise/operation) are not applicable.

 Note
Make sure that you create the relationship in the appropriate section of this facet. The system displays all available
relationship types here. However, you can only select the type that matches the relationship to be created.

Once you have created an operation or exercise for a force element, the details of this relationship are displayed in the
Commands (Operation/Exercise) section.

When you create a relationship, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you have
nished editing. As soon as you start editing a force element relationship, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished
editing, you can save it actively.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 18
 7/10/2024
Manage Reference Force Elements

Support Relationships for a Force Element

Functional relationships between force elements that are mapped using relationships.

In contrast to hierarchical command and control relationships, you use support relationships to map functional relationships, in
particular to control supply and maintenance processes.

 Note
A support relationship can only be activated if both force elements have the status Active.

When creating a support relationship, you must rst choose the relationship type to be created.

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution contains the Work Center and Maintenance Capabilities sections on the
Maintenance facet and the following support relationships:

Relationship Desc. Relationship Object Types

Maintains A 807 O–O

Maintained by B 807 O–O

O = force element

When you create a relationship, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you have
nished editing.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the relationship, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you can save it
actively.

The Work Center section displays all work centers that have been assigned to the force element. The initial assignment and
updates are made using the core application for work centers.

In the Maintains section, you specify any other force elements that are maintained by the selected force element.

In the Maintained By section, you specify any other force elements that maintain the selected force element.

In the Maintenance Capabilities section, you specify the capabilities for the selected force element in a maintenance work
center. These maintenance capabilities identify which maintenance unit can perform certain maintenance activities and you can
de ne them according to your requirements. It is possible to assign one or more maintenance capabilities values to a force
element from a pre-con gured value list. Each capability consists of a combination of code and a description eld.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 19
 7/10/2024

Assignments to a Force Element

This topic explains the use and structure of the assignments to a force element.

You can assign exible material planning objects (FMPOs), products, capability codes, and mission essential tasks to a force
element.

You make these assignments on the Material and Capability facets, which show you an overview of all assignments to a force
element.

Material
To perform their tasks, the organizational elements of armed forces, police, and aid organizations require material in the form
of non-consumable goods (NCGs). This material can be equipment, such as speci c vehicles, that are required by the domestic
base or operation.

When assigning an active FMPO, you must specify the object ID, usage type, a validity period, and the assigned variant. The
usage type speci es the structures in which the assignment of the FMPO to the force element is valid.

Once this assignment has been activated, the FMPO can no longer be changed. You need to change the status of the
assignment back to Planned if further changes are required.

When you create this assignment, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you
have nished editing. For more information about the status, see Status Network for Assignments.

You can enter additional information about the assignment, such as the quantity, weighting factor, material category and
material indicator.

The material indicator is used as a lter criterion in actual/authorized comparisons to de ne the material to be procured. You
can assign different material indicators to assign an FMPO to a force element more than once at a given time.

You de ne material indicators in Customizing by choosing Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Flexible Material
Planning Object De ne Material Indicators .

Initial Supply Relevance speci es whether the FMPO is held in stock by the supplier or by the force element to which it is
assigned.

You enter a weighting value between 1 and 999 in the Weighting Factor eld to specify the signi cance of the assignment in
comparison to other assignments. The classi cation of the speci ed factor depends on the method you have chosen to
calculate readiness.

You can select the Readiness Mandatory Indicator if an assignment for the readiness of a force element or substructure is
required. This indicator can also be evaluated for the weighting when the readiness is calculated.

If the assignment has the Active status, you cannot delimit or delete it. You can only delete the assignment if it has the Planned
status.

 Note
Please note that the authorization for deleting an assignment can be restricted.

A user status can be created as an addition to the existing system status. Before you can change a user status, you must rst
make the corresponding settings for it in Customizing. These are found under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Assignments Technical Settings Maintain User Status Pro le for Assignment .

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 20
 7/10/2024
An FMPO 1 can have another FMPO 2 as an accompanying part which in turn can have a further FMPO n as an accompanying
part and so on. All such accompanying part FMPOs (2 to n) that have an assignment indicator de ning them as 'Mandatory' are
assigned to the force element automatically when FMPO 1 is assigned to the force element.

 Note
You assign products using the procedure described above for FMPOs.

Capability
To perform their tasks, the organizational elements of armed forces, police, and aid organizations have capabilities and/or
mission essential tasks (MET) to achieve and to sustain a desired operational effect in a nominated environment.

 Note
You assign capability codes and mission essential task lists (METLs) using the similar procedure described above for FMPOs.

The assignment details for capability codes are limited to the validity period only.

The assignment details of METLs are limited to the validity period and assessment date only. The additional
assessment information is used to record the date on which the identi ed MET was assessed for this unit (based on
for example a major military rehearsal evaluation), and to record the responsible assessor.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

Position for a Force Element

You can de ne the authorized personnel for a force element on the Position facet by assigning positions to the force element.

 Note
You can create a position at force element level. During creation, the position is assigned to the selected force element.

A position can also be created independently from the Manage Positions app and can be assigned to a force element. For
more information, see creating a position.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

Accounting-Related Information about a Force Element

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 21
 7/10/2024
You can view, create and edit the accounting-speci c details.

Accounting Overview
You can view all accounting functions that are related to the force element on this facet. This is a read-only facet.

A force element inherits the accounting functions from its parent force element by default.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Account Assignment
You can use this facet to assign account assignment information to a force element, controlling area, company code, FM area
and so on.

A force element inherits the accounting assignments from its parent force element by default.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Inherited Master Cost Center

You can view the information about the inherited master cost center on this facet. This is a read-only facet.

A force element inherits the master cost center from its parent force element by default.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Controlling
On the Controlling facet, you can view, create or modify the following controlling objects that are assigned to the force element:

The Master Cost Center section displays all master cost centers that have been created or assigned to the force element. The
master cost centers are inherited to child force elements when the assignment is active. The inherited master cost centers are
displayed on the Inherited Master Cost Center facet.

The Cost Center Group section displays all cost center groups that have been created or assigned to the force element. The
master cost centers are inherited to child force elements when the assignment is active.

The Pro t Center section displays all pro t centers that have been created or assigned to the force element.

The Pro t Center Group section displays all pro t center groups that have been created or assigned to the force element.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 22
 7/10/2024

Funds Management
You can see the Funds Management-related elds on this facet. The funds center is selected using the strategy derived in the
FM derivation tool.

For more information about the FM derivation tool, see Account Assignment Derivation.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Additional WBS Element

You can use these assignments to assign mapped projects to force elements using WBS elements.

You can create, assign or delete additional WBS elements and master WBS elements on this facet. You can also change the
status or delimit the additional WBS elements.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

Logistics for a Force Element

This topic provides information about the Logistics and Technical Objects facets.

Logistics
You can assign different logistics units to a force element to support procurement activities.

The stock MRP area and provision MRP area can be created at force element level.

Logistics Data

The following assignment options are available on the Logistics Data facet:

In the Stock Element section, you can assign or modify the data.

 Note
If you select the accountable ag, the stock MRP area is enabled and you can select any value from the search box.
The stock storage location must be selected from the values linked to the stock MRP area. If you deselect the
accountable ag for a parent force element, the stock MRP area is disabled and the storage location is removed from
both the parent force element and all child force elements that are not accountable.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 23
 7/10/2024
In the Provision Element section, you can assign or modify the data.

 Note
If you select the stockholding ag, the provision MRP area is enabled and you can select from the search box. If you
deselect the Stockholding ag, the provision MRP area is disabled.

In the Infrastructure Stock Element section, you can assign or modify the data.

 Note
If you select the Inframaterial ag, the infrastructure MRP area is enabled and you can select from the search box. If
you deselect the Inframaterial ag, the infrastructure MRP area is disabled.

In the Logistics Data section, you can select values for all the elds using the search help.

Purchasing Org.

The purchasing organization procures materials and services, negotiates conditions of purchase with vendors,
and is responsible for such transactions.

You de ne purchasing organizations in Customizing by choosing Enterprise Structure De nition Materials

Management Maintain Purchasing Organization .

Purchasing Group

A buyer or group of buyers responsible for certain purchasing activities. The purchasing group is:

Responsible internally for the procurement of a material or a class of materials; is the principal channel for
a company’s dealings with its vendors

Used for the assignment of purchasing documents and is therefore basically a selection criterion. A
purchasing group allows purchasing documents to be selected for each force element.

You de ne purchasing groups in Customizing by choosing Materials Management Purchasing Create

Purchasing Groups .

Reference Element

The force element that is used as a template for creating material master data.

Organizational Priority

The organizational priority speci es the priority a force element has when material requisitions are determined.
For more information, see Requirement Prioritization.

Logistics Level

You de ne which logistics level is represented by the force element.

You de ne logistics levels in Customizing by choosing Defense & Security Materials Management Return
Delivery Logistics Level .

Supply Relationships

The temporary, to-the-minute relationships between force elements that control which force element is supplied by which other
force element.

You use this object to de ne for each external material group which force element is supplied with material by which other force
element.

When creating a supply relationship, you must rst choose the relationship type to be created.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 24
 7/10/2024
The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution contains the following supply relationships:

Relationship Desc. Relationship Object Types

Supplied by B 806 O–O

Inherited Suppliers O–O

Supplies A 806 O–O

O = force element

The following supply relationships are available on the Logistics facet:

In the Supplied By section, you can specify any other force element that supplies to the selected force element.

In the Inherited Suppliers section, you can view the parent force element supplier details.

In the Supplies section, you can specify any other force elements that are supplied by the force element.

If you do not assign an external material group to a supply relationship, the supplying force element is the standard supplier. All
purchase orders for which the system cannot determine another supply relationship are forwarded to this standard supplier. A
force element can have only one standard supplier at any one time.

Since the relevant supplier can differ according to the material requested, you can use the external material group to
distinguish your supply relationships by different materials.

The external material group assigned in the relevant material master record is used to differentiate supply relationships. When
you create a supply relationship, you de ne a time period (to the minute) for the relationship as well as the external material
group for which the supply relationship is to be used. If a purchase order is created for a material, the system determines the
external material group from the material master record and uses the supply relationship to determine the related force
element. Material requirements therefore arise automatically for the force element that is responsible for supplying this
material.

In Customizing, you de ne external material groups by choosing Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Command
and Support Relationships De ne External Material Groups for Supply Relationships .

 Note
To show and hide elds, you can choose Column Con guration.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Technical Objects
You can use this facet to assign technical objects (master equipment) to the force element (owners).

To model the organizational assignment for large equipment, you can assign the relevant technical objects that are managed in
the system as master equipment to their owner (force element). This allows you to make the following assignments:

New assignment without delimitation of an existing assignment.

Delimitation of an existing assignment and creation of a new assignment.

Delimitation of an existing assignment without creation of a new assignment.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 25
 7/10/2024
The owner, utilizer, and holder of a technical object can be different. The utilizer of a technical object is the force element whose
storage location is assigned the technical object (assignment chain: equipment → serial number → storage location → force
element). The utilizer assignment is therefore modeled using Materials Management functions. The holder of a technical object
is the system in which the change authorization for this object exists.

Structure

Assignments to technical objects are displayed and edited from the perspective of the selected force element (owner) on the
Technical Objects tab page.

Scenario 1

The technical object is assigned to force element 1 from today until 31.12.9999.

The technical object is reassigned to force element 2 from date 1 until 31.12.9999.

When assignment 2 is activated, assignment 1 to force element 1 is automatically delimited to date 1 minus 1 second.

Scenario 2

The technical object is assigned to force element A from today until 31.12.9999.

The technical object is reassigned to force element B from date 1 until date 2.

When assignment 2 is activated:

• Assignment 1 to force element A is automatically delimited to date 1 minus 1 second.

• The technical object is reassigned to force element A from date 2 + 1 second until 31.12.999.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 26
 7/10/2024

The following relationship is provided in the standard system:

Relationship Desc. Relationship Object Type

Belongs to A 820 O – EQ

O = force element, EQ = equipment (technical object)

These relationships for technical objects are stored in the tables for the assignment framework .

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

Operations and Exercises for a Force Element

You can view operations and operation rotations, and create their relationships from the Operation facet. You can view
exercises and exercise rotations, and create their relationships from the Exercise facet.

You de ne the general properties for the highest-level force element in an Operational Structure or Exercise Target. In each
case, these properties apply to the entire operational structure or exercise target. A force element with these properties acts

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 27
 7/10/2024
as the carrier of general information about the operation or exercise. You cannot assign authorized personnel or materials to
this force element.

Create an Operation or Exercise

To create an operation for a force element, click on Create Operation in the ellipsis menu for the force element. When you
create an operation or exercise, you must give it a name, abbreviation and a validity period. You also have to choose a category
and intensity.

You must rst make the Customizing settings as described below for the following elds:

You de ne the category and subcategory in Customizing for Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force
Elements De ne Operation Types .

You de ne the values for the operational intensity in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational
Flexibility Force Elements De ne Operation Intensity .

To create an operational force element for an existing operational force element, click on Create Operational Force Element in
the ellipsis menu for the operational force element. You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. The system
de nes the current date as a default Valid From date. You can change this if necessary.

You can create an exercise or an exercise force element using the procedure described above for the operation or operational
force element.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Periods
You use this infotype to de ne the following periods:

Object period

As for every other force element, you de ne the validity period of the object when you create an operation or an
exercise. At the same time, the system creates a record with infotype 1956 with the same object period. This period is
only used for technical purposes and does not represent the actual operation/exercise period.

Recommendation

The current date should be used as the validity start date and 12/31/9999 should be used as the validity end date. This
gives you the greatest exibility for changing structures at a later point in time.

Operational Time Period

This is the time period for which the operation takes place and a rotation must be de ned within this time period.

The operational time period must fall within the object period of the operation or exercise.

Operation/Exercise Period/Rotation

By de ning rotations, you de ne the operation/exercise period and divide the operational time period or exercise into
time-based phases:

Operation/exercise period.

Each rotation represents a phase of the operation or exercise.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 28
 7/10/2024
The rotation periods of an operation or exercise must not overlap but can have gaps.

Operation/exercise relationships with rotation assignments represent the actual operational structure or exercise
target of the rotation. Operational/exercise force elements can only be assigned to rotations that have already been
assigned to its higher level operational/exercise force elements.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Operation
This facet displays all direct assignments of force elements to an operation, and you can use these assignments to map the
integration of force elements using operational structures.

When you create an operational force element, it is not displayed here, but is displayed instead on the Force Element
Relationships facet under Commands (Operation and Exercise).

You see the details about the operational force element. These cannot be accessed in the force element for which you created
an operation.

Operation Information

The Operation Information section shows all the relevant information about the operation.

The eld Category/Subcategory is the type of operation or exercise. You de ne the category and subcategory in Customizing
for Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements De ne Operation Types .

The eld Intensity speci es the intensity of an operation or exercise. You de ne the values for the operational intensity in
Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements De ne Operational Intensity .

The eld Climate shows the climate in which an operation or exercise is taking place. You de ne the values and descriptions for
the climate in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements De ne Climate .

The eld Terrain describes the terrain where an operation or exercise is taking place. You de ne the values and descriptions for
the terrain in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements De ne Terrain .

The eld Weather displays the weather conditions for an operation or exercise. You de ne the values and descriptions for the
weather in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Elements De ne Weather .

Operation Relationship

The Operation Relationship section displays the relationship type for the operational force element.

You can assign force elements and their child force elements, positions, persons and FMPOs partially or entirely to an operation
by choosing Transfer Assignment.

 Note
The system only observes the active objects for assignment.

Operation Rotation

In the Operation Rotation section, you can view, create or modify operation rotation information. An operation rotation can also
be created when you create the operation for the force element.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 29
 7/10/2024

 Note
The operation rotation date must be found during the operation period you speci ed when creating the operation. You can
also modify the operation period in the edit mode.

Personnel Upper Limit

For each rotation, you specify the maximum number of positions for an operation or exercise. For the purposes of rotation
planning, this value is copied as the maximum rotation size.

Choose Update Rotation Assignments to update the assigned rotation.

 Note
Once you update the rotation, it is updated with its person and operation provider whenever that rotation is assigned.

Choose Split Rotation to split the assigned rotation.

Choose Delete Rotation to delete the assigned rotation.

 Note
When you delete the rotation, all the related rotation assignments are also deleted with their person and operation
provider.

Operation Rotation Assignment

In the Operation Rotation Assignment section, you can assign any existing operation rotation.

You can assign a rotation only to a child operational force element if this rotation is assigned to the parent force element.

Choose Transfer Rotation to assign the same rotation to all child operational relationships (force elements and positions).

Operation Position

In the Operation Position section, you assign positions to operational force elements, which are then displayed on the
operational force element facet.

To create a position, you need to either go to the Manage Positions app or open a force element.

 Note
You can create a position at force element level. During creation, the position is assigned to the selected force element.

A position can also be created independently of the Manage Positions app and can be assigned to a force element. For more
information, see creating a position.

Operational Providers

In the Operational Providers section, you can assign initial material suppliers, force providers or personnel suppliers to the
operation.

Operational Personnel Staffing Proposals

In the Operational Personnel Staffing Proposals section, you can assign an existing personnel. You can delete the proposal as
long as it does not have the active status. You can also delimit the proposal. Once it has been activated, you can convert the

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 30
 7/10/2024
proposal into a personnel staffing.

 Note
To convert the proposal into a personnel staffing, the status of the force element should also be active.

Operational Personnel Staffing

The Operational Personnel Staffing is a read-only section. The details of the personnel staffing are displayed here once they are
converted from a proposal to a personnel staffing. (You can also perform a direct personnel staffing from the backend
transaction Maintain HR Master Data in PA30).

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Exercise
This facet displays all direct assignments of force elements to an exercise and you use these assignments to map the
integration of force elements using exercise targets.

 Note
You can create and assign an exercise using the procedure described above for the operation.

 Note
This functionality is not applicable for reference force elements.

Related Information
Manage Force Elements
Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner
Manage Force Elements - Material Planner
Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner
Manage Reference Force Elements

Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner

App ID: F4113

You can use this app to add or update capability-relevant information to existing organizational units (force elements) by
managing the assignments between the force element and task lists for capabilities or mission essential tasks. This app also
displays general information about the organizational unit to the user.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

See a list of all the organizational units (force elements).

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 31
 7/10/2024
Search or lter on this list using lters such as the force element name, force element abbreviation and force element
ID.

Add, update or delete capability relevant data such as:

Assignments between a force element and capabilities.

Assignments between a force element and mission essential task lists.

Change the status of the capability data assigned to an organizational unit across several levels from planned to active.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
The Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner app was created for a user who assigns capabilities to force elements
(capability planner). Therefore, it contains the Capabilities facet in its structure.

 Note
For more information about viewing, searching for, and creating a force element, see Manage Force Elements.

Manage Force Elements - Material Planner

App ID: F4114

You can use this app to add or update assignments for authorized materials to existing organizational units (force elements).
This app also displays general information about the organizational unit to the user.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

See a list of all the organizational units (force elements).

Search or lter on this list using lters such as the force element name, force element abbreviation and force element
ID.

Add, update or delete authorized material relevant data such as the authorized quantity, minimum quantity, maximum
quantity.

Change the status of the authorized material data assigned to an organizational unit across several levels from planned
to active.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 32
 7/10/2024
Smartphone

Structure
The Manage Force Elements - Material Planner app was created for a user who assigns an authorized material to force
elements (material planner). Therefore, it contains the Material facet in its structure.

 Note
For more information about viewing, searching for, and creating a force element, see Manage Force Elements.

Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner

App ID: F4115

You can use this app to add or update maintenance-relevant information to existing organizational units (force elements). This
app also displays general information about the organizational unit to the user.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

See a list of all organizational units (force elements).

Search or lter on this list using lters such as the force element name, force element abbreviation and force element
ID.

Add, update or delete maintenance-relevant data such as

Maintenance relationships between organizational units.

Work centers assigned to a force element (display only).

Maintenance capabilities of a maintenance unit.

Change the status of maintenance data assigned to an organizational unit between several levels ranging from planned
to active.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
The Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner app was created for a user who de nes and maintains maintenance
relationships (maintenance planner). Therefore, it contains the Maintenance facet in its structure.

 Note
For more information about viewing, searching for, and creating a force element, see Manage Force Elements.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 33
 7/10/2024

Display Force Structure

App ID: F4151

You can use this app to visualize relevant parts of the organizational structure of a Defense and Security organization, which
includes hierarchical command and control relationships.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Get a graphical view of the organizational units and their relationships.

Search for or lter the (reference) force element to be used as a starting point for the hierarchy.

Select which data (such as the usage type for relationships) is displayed in the structure.

View important details for each element in the graphical view.

Navigate between a speci c element within the force structure app and the app used to manage this speci c element,
such as the Manage Force Elements app.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
The Display Force Structure app has a header section and a graphical display section.

In the header section, you make the settings required to display a force structure.

In the graphical display, you can then display the force structure for the force element or reference force element selected.

Displaying a Force Structure

Choose whether you want to see the structure of a force element or a reference force element.

Select the force element or reference force element for which you want to display the structure.

The system automatically loads the force structure and uses the Organizational Structure relationship. The selected element is
the header element. You can navigate up and down the force structure and if you click on the force element ID, you see which
apps are available to you for processing the force element.

You can select any relationship you want to check. You can choose between Organizational Structure, Administrative Chain of
Command and Wartime Establishment or any combination of those three relationships.

Model Structure
App ID: F4896

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 34
 7/10/2024
The model structure provides an enhanced user experience for organizational planning.

You can use this app to create an interactive graphical structure, which is used to create, update or delete structural or
hierarchical models. You can also use it to create a new active structural object based on the modeled entities.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Create a new actual force element structure based on the model structure.

See a graphical view of the organizational units and their relationships.

Create and update models.

Search for models.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
The Model Structure app has a header section and a graphical display section.

In the header section, you have various options to create, open and update model structures.

In the graphical display, you see the model structures when you create a new model or choose any existing model to view or
update.

Search
You can search for an existing model by choosing Open Model at the top of the initial screen. You can use the value help or F4 to
de ne speci c search conditions.

Creating a Model
You can create a model using one of three options.

You can create a new model by choosing New Model from the dropdown. You must give it a name and make entries in the
elds marked with a red asterisk.

You can use an existing model to create a new one by choosing Create from Model from the dropdown. You give the
model a name and select a reference model, which is used as the basis for the new model. You can use the value help to
search for the reference model.

You can use an existing force structure to create a new force structure model by choosing Create from Actual Force
Structure. You give the model a name and select a reference parent force element, which is used as the basis for the
new model. You can use the value help to search for the parent force element.

 Note
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 35
 7/10/2024
As soon as you create the model, it has the planned status. Once you have nished editing, you can save it actively using the
Change Status button.

To update a model, choose Open Model and enter a name for the model. Once the model page opens, choose Continue Editing
to work on the model.

 Note
You cannot edit the model when it has the Active Status. You must change the status to Deactivate → Resubmit. This
changes the model’s status to Planned after which you can edit it.

You can choose Browse Actual Force Structure to open the model structure. The model displays the relationships between the
parent force element and the child force element.

Relationships are displayed in different colors in the model structures. Red lines represent organizational structures, green
lines represent the administrative chain of command and yellow lines represent wartime establishments.

Transfer Model
You can only Transfer a model to a force structure if the model has the Active status.

You can choose Open Model and select the model which you want to transfer and then choose Continue Editing. Choose
Activate and give the force element name from the value help and check all the elds in structures that display relationships
(organizational structures, administrative chain of commands and wartime establishments).

Once you save, go back and choose Browse Actual Force Structure and look for the force element to which the model was
transferred. The graph displays the force structure with the new model that has been transferred.

Copy to Force Element in the Background

App ID: DFS_FE_MASS_COPY

You can use this app to copy multiple force elements with their structures and relationships. When doing so, you can rename the
force element name before copying.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Decrease the time required to copy multiple force elements.

Select which structure or relationship you need to copy.

Create an operational or exercise structure from another usage type structure (not possible for the online copy).

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 36
 7/10/2024

Mass Copy of Force Element

When you are copying a force element along with its structure, you need to make sure:

The status of the child force element is the same as the status of the assignment between the force element and its
child force element.

The status of the position is the same as the status of the assignment between the force element and its position.

Selection and Processing of PPF Actions

App ID: SPPFP

You can use this app to check the change logs for a copied force element, rotation transfer, rotation split and rotation update.
Enter the details in the search section. Logs for the copied force elements are displayed here.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Track or view the copied force element.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

CSV Upload for Assignments

App ID: DFS_CSV_UPLD_ASSGMT

You can use this application to create new planned D&S assignments, such as exible material planning objects (FMPOs) or
supply relationships by uploading an Excel. This mass upload based on a CSV le saves time and simpli es the creation of
multiple assignments to different force elements. If for example a new FMPO has been released or a new supplier exists, they
can be assigned several times using the Excel upload functionality.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Save time and bene t froma simple option for creating new planned assignments to force elements

Test and validate duplicate entries in the Excel datasheet. Values that were maintained in the datasheet that have no
relevance for the type of assignment are ignored.

You have a single Excel that contains two different line items: The rst line contains a new planned assignment FMPO to
an FE and the second line item contains is supplied by. The system ignores this second line item before saving the new
planned assignment between the FMPO and the force element.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 37
 7/10/2024

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Purpose
This program executes a mass assignment upload from a CSV le.

The following assignment combinations are validated and supported:

Force Element

To FMPO

To Maintain

To Maintain By

To Supply

To Supply By

To Product

To Capability

Capability

To Capability (Reference Capability)

To Capability Statements

To FMPO

Position

To FMPO

Integration
The log is stored and can be viewed using the transaction SLG1, Object ʻDEFENSE’ subobject ʻASSGMT_UPLD’.

Prerequisites
Download the CSV template for the corresponding release from note 3028599

Selection
Select: Choose the CSV template.

Option: The Duplicate Check veri es the following:

1. If an existing assignment exactly matches an entry in the Excel (the status can be different, but the content is identical).

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 38
 7/10/2024
2. If an existing assignment has a time overlap with line items in an Excel. Example: If the start date matches the end date
of a new Excel line item, a log entry is posted.

The Skip Duplicates from Excel option allows an upload to continue even if the Excel contains an identical entry, or there is an
overlap in the start and or end time.

Test mode: The test mode performs all checks and the creation process but does not save any data to the database.

Output
A log is displayed (object ʻDEFENSE’ subobject ʻASSGMT_UPLD’), which contains information, errors, and success messages.

Excel Template Details

The Excel template is available in the SAP note 3028599 .

The template contains the technical names of the elds and not the description. The template references the table
DFS_ASSGMT.

The advantage of using the technical names is that attributes that the customer has added can be added to the Excel template.

Note: If the data content exceeds the data eld length, the system automatically removes the additional information. For
example, if the source object type data content was POSI and the data eld length only has three characters, the last digit is
removed – result POS. This also means it is correctly interpreted during the upload. If POIS was entered, the system displays an
error message.

Note: During creation of a manual assignment. the system makes default entries in some elds. These elds cannot be
overwritten while uploading. This means that the column Status is provided, but the content is not updated in the system.

Excel Template Details

Technical Description Description

FORCEELEMENTORGSRCEID Source FE Object ID

FORCEELEMENTORGTARGETID Target FE Object ID

DFSASSGMTVALDTYSTRTDATE Validity Start Date of Assignment

DFSASSGMTVALDTYSTRTTIME Validity Start Time of Assignment

DFSASSGMTVALDTYENDDATE Validity End Date of Assignment

DFSASSGMTVALDTYENDTIME Validity End Time of Assignment

DFSASSGMTVALDTYTIMEZONE Valid Time Zone

DFSASSGMTSTATUSOBJECT Status

DFSASSGMTPLANSTATUSOBJECT Object Number for Planned Operation

DFSASSGMTPLANOPERATIONCODE Planned Operation Code

DFSASSGMTPLANDELIMITDATE Planned Delimitation Date

DFSASSGMTPLANDELIMITTIME Planned Delimitation Time

DFSASSGMTCOMMENT Comment

DFSASSGMTPRIORITY Priority

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 39
 7/10/2024

Technical Description Description

DFSASSGMTTYPE Priority
Assignment Type

BO Business Object

CAP Capability

CAPS Capability Statement

EXER Exercise Rotation

EXERP Exercise Providers

FMPO Flexible Material Planning Object

JOB Job

METL Mission Essential Task List

MNT Maintenance Relationship

MNTCA Maintenance Capability

OPER Operation Rotation

OPERP Operational Providers

PROD Product Master

ROT Rotation

SUP Supply Relationship

TOB Technical Objects

DFSASSGMTSOURCETYPE Source Object Type

FRC Force Element

CAP Capability Code

POS Position

DFSCAPABILITYOBJECTID Capability Object ID

DFSPOSITIONSOURCEID Source Position Object ID

DFSMAINTPLATFORMID Platform ID

DFSCAPABILITYSTATEMENTID Capability Statement ID

FLXBLMATLPLNGOBJECTID Flexible Material Planning Object

FLXBLMATLPLNGOBJVARIANTID FMPO Variant ID

PRODUCT Product Number

MISSIONESSENTIALTASKID ID of Mission Essential Task

FRCELMNTORGMAINTCAPBLT Maintenance Capability

COSTCENTER Cost Center

EQUIPMENT Equipment

FRCELMNTORGROTATIONKEY Contingent Key

FRCELMNTORGOPEXERCISEID Operation/Exercise ID

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 40
 7/10/2024

Technical Description Description

FRCELMNTORGFORCEPROVIDERID Operational Provider – Force Provider ID

FRCELMNTORGINITIALMATLSUPLRID Operational Provider – Material Supplier

FRCELMNTORGINITIALPERSSUPLRID Operational Provider – Personnel Supplier

DFSASSGMTUSAGETYPE Usage Type

DFSASSGMTSTATUSPROFILE Status Pro le

DFSASSGMTSOURCEOBJECTTYPE Source Type

DFSASSGMTLOGICALSYSTEM Logical System

DFSASSGMTNMBROFASSGDMATL Quantity

DFSASSGMTMINNMBROFASSGDMATL Minimum Number

DFSASSGMTMAXNMBROFASSGDMATL Maximum Number

DFSASSGMTMATERIALINDICATORCODE Material Indicator

DFSASSGMTCORRECTIONVALUE Adjustment Value

DFSASSGMTCORRECTIONREASON Adjustment Reason

DFSASSGMTMATERIALWEIGHTINGRATE Weighting Factor

DFSASSGMTISMANDFORRDNSSCALC Readiness Mandatory Indicator

DFSASSGMTISUSEDFORMASSMATLPLNG Mass Creation Indicator

DFSASSGMTMATERIALCATEGORY Material Category

DFSASSGMTINITIALSUPPLYSTATUS Initial Supply Status of Material

DFSASSGMTISOWNPROVISION My Provisions/ Initial Supply Relevance

DFSASSGMTISDEFAULTASSIGNMENT Default Assignment Indicator

DFSASSGMTDAMAGETYPE Maintenance Capability

DFSMAINTPLTFRMISLEADPLTFRM External Material Group

DFSASSGMTEXTERNALPRODUCTGROUP Capability Sequence Number

DFSCAPBLTSTMNTSQNCNMBR Capability Statement Type

DFSCAPBLTSTMNTTYPE Training Assessment Date

DFSASSGMTFRCELMNTTRNGASSMTDTE Training Assessment Performed By

DFSASSGMTFRCELMNTTRNGASSMTBY Indicator: Assessing METL

DFSISACCREDITINGMSNESNLTSK Job ID

DFSJOBID Platform Text

DFSPLATFORMDETAILSTEXT Platform Extension

DFSPLATFORMEXTENSION Platform Boolean Variables (X=true, space=false)

CONTROLLINGAREA Controlling Area

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 41
 7/10/2024

Manage Personnel Staffing for Operations and Exercises

App ID: F4922

You can use this app to staff proposals for an operational or exercise force element.

Prerequisites
You require authorization to access the app. The role required for this authorization is DFS_PERS.

Using the hierarchy view, you need to select the correct Usage Type (operation or exercise) on the force element search page
for the Manage Personnel Staffing button to be enabled.

You require the operation/exercise period maintained in the operation/exercise to navigate to the application.

Navigation from the root (operation or exercise) is not possible.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Assign persons to positions for an operational or exercise force element as a staffing proposal or a personnel staffing.
The staffing proposals or personnel staffing can be executed with and without rotation assignments.

Create new staffing proposals or personnel staffings using the Create Staffing/Staffing Proposal dialog box.

The Display Staffing/Staffing Proposal dialog box in the app can be used to:

Convert staffing proposals to personnel staffings if the status of the staffing proposal is Active.

Change the status or date of existing proposals. The date can only be modi ed for non-active proposals.

Delete proposals or personnel staffings.

Create staffing/staffing proposals.

Display the rotation name, period and the staffed personnel and proposed personnel numbers for each position and
rotation in the calendar view.

 Note
The calendar view of rotations uses three colors. (Green – when the operational/exercise position is completely
staffed, Yellow – when the operational/exercise position has a complete staffing proposal but is not yet staffed, Grey
– when not green or yellow).

Search for a person based on the below criteria while assigning a person:

Force element ID (people who are assigned to this force element)

Job (people who are assigned to a position described by the job)

Position

Person

Quali cations (these are pre-selected since they are inherited from the position level. You can also add/remove
quali cations here.)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 42
 7/10/2024

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
Staffing proposals and personnel staffings are displayed on the Operational/Exercise Personnel Staffing Proposal and
Operational/Exercise Personnel Staffing facets in the Position app.

The following relationship is provided in the standard system:

Relationships for Staffing Proposals

Relationship Description Relationship Object Types

Staffing Proposal for Operation A/B 858 O–P

S–P

Staffing Proposal for Exercise A/B 859 O–P

S–P

O = force element, S = position, P = person

Properties
The following properties are mapped for an assignment:

Object Name/Object ID

Name and ID of the following objects:

Selected force element

Assigned positions with or without rotation assignments. Staffing proposals and personnel staffings are displayed
on the Staffing/Staffing Proposals dialog box.

Assigned persons (as a staffing proposal or personnel staffing with an operational/exercise relationship)

Start/End

Validity period of assignment.

Person/Text (Staffing/Staffing Proposals dialog box only)

Speci es either a staffing proposal or an operational/exercise relationship for the assignment of a person. The following
scenarios are possible:

You have assigned the person directly (without converting a staffing proposal).

You have assigned the person by converting a staffing proposal.

The person is assigned as a staffing proposal. You have not yet converted the staffing proposal.

Position/Text

Speci es the current staffing status of a position. The following scenarios are possible:
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 43
 7/10/2024
Position is not yet lled in the speci ed period.

Position is already partly lled in the speci ed period.

Position is already lled in the speci ed period.

Reference Force Elements

De nition
Organizational unit with reduced data compared to the force element. Used to implement template structures that can be
copied to real force structures.

Use
You can use the reference force element to represent generic force elements and structures in the system. Reference force
elements do not represent real organizational elements that already exist or that are planned in your organization. Rather, they
map comparable, uniform template objects and structures (NATO-wide, for example).

You can also use the reference force element as part of the organizational planning process and real force elements can be
created based on reference force elements.

Structure
Technically the reference force element is implemented by the object type O. As in the case of the force elements, the object is
stored in infotype 1000. The reference force element is differentiated from the force element by the new attribute
RFE_INDICATOR in the table /ISDFPS/FORCE.

Since the reference force element can be used as a template for the force element, the structure of a reference force element
has the same structure as the force element. There are only minor differences here.

SAP Fiori App

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the reference force elements in the Fiori app Manage
Reference Force Elements.

Integration
The following objects can be assigned to a reference force element:

Other reference force elements used to map reference structures

Flexible material planning objects or reportable item codes as material information

Mission essential tasks

Capabilities

Documents

Positions as authorized personnel information

Manage Reference Force Elements

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 44
 7/10/2024
App ID: F4126

You can use this app to create, update, delete and delimit organizational units (reference force elements). You can see detailed
information about the organizational units and their hierarchical command and control relationships with other units on the
various facets that the app provides on the right-hand section of the screen.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

See a list of all reference force elements.

Search or lter on this list using lters, such as the reference force element name, reference force element abbreviation
and reference force element ID.

Add (create/copy), update, delete and delimit reference force elements.

Change the status of reference force elements.

Create organizational relationships between reference force elements.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
Reference force elements are displayed in a list when you open the app. You can de ne a custom view by making the
corresponding settings and save this.

Structure
A reference force element has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it that show different
information. These facets are as follows:

Name

Description

Characteristics

Readiness

FE Relationships

Maintenance

Material

Capability

Position

Attachments

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 45
 7/10/2024
Classi cation

 Note
The reference force element and the force element function in a similar manner. All function-related information has been
covered in the force element documentation.

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a reference force element using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating a Reference Force Element

When creating a reference force element, you must rst choose the parent reference force element. The root reference force
element can be created without a parent reference force element. It becomes a parent when the rst reference force element
is created below it.

To create a root reference force element, click on the ellipsis menu. Click Create Root Reference Force Element. You must make
entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. The system de nes the current date as a default Valid From date. You can
change this if necessary.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the reference force element, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you
can save it actively.

You must rst make the Customizing settings as described below for the following elds:

You de ne organizational areas and their assignment to organizational area types in Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element De ne Organizational Areas .

You de ne structure types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element
De ne Structure Types .

You de ne branches in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element De ne
Branches .

You de ne organizational area types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force
Element De ne Organizational Area Types .

You can de ne how the symbol code is generated in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Force Element De ne Symbol Code .

Note that you can only create a reference force element below a parent reference force element or a root reference force
element.

To update a reference force element, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds marked with
a red asterisk contain data.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 46
 7/10/2024

Human Resources Objects

De nition
Enhancement of additional human resources object types to include component-speci c properties and assignments.

Use
The Defense Forces & Public Security component not only enhances the organizational unit object type for the force element,
but also the position, job and person object types to include additional properties and assignments.

Position
Armed forces, police, and aid organizations require certain personnel to perform tasks or missions. Before you can provide the
organizational elements with personnel, you must assign positions to the relevant force elements to de ne their authorized
personnel and to trigger the relevant recruitment or assignment processes. The central objects involved here are as follows:

Position: Used to de ne the authorized personnel for a force element, such as unit commanders or truck drivers. Various
attributes describe the position in more detail. A position should be lled by a person (Personnel Administration
component).

Job: Can be assigned to multiple positions with the same properties simultaneously. A job is also described in more detail
using attributes.

Structure
Technically, the position corresponds to the position (object type S) in the Organizational Management component.

Status and Validity

The status and validity correspond to the object type Position in the Organizational Management component.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the authorized personnel in the following SAP Fiori apps:

Manage Positions

Manage Force Elements

Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner

Manage Force Elements - Material Planner

Manage Force Elements - Maintenance Planner

Manage Reference Force Elements

Integration
Positions can be:

Assigned to force elements

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 47
 7/10/2024
Assigned topersons

Described using jobs

Linked to logistics work centers on the basis of HR work centers

Command and Control Relationships (Position)

De nition
Assignments of positions to force elements and persons that are modeled using relationships from the perspective of a
position.

Use
Use command and control relationships to de ne the force elements to which a position belongs and the persons assigned to
this position for your domestic base, operations, and exercises.

Structure
Command and control relationships are displayed and edited from the perspective of the selected position using the facets in
the Manage Positions app. The following tabs are provided as standard with the relationships listed below:

Relationship Description Relationship Object types Structure

Belongs to (Organizational A 003 O-S Organizational Structure

Structure)

Includes (Organizational B 008 S-P

Structure)

Belongs to (Wartime) A 801 O-S Wartime Establishment

Includes (Wartime) B 802 S-P

Belongs to (Chain of A 828 O-S Administrative Chain of

Command) Command

Includes (Assigned Person) A 804 S-P (Temporary duty)

Is Described By B 007 S-C (Job description)

Relationship Description Relationship Object types Structure

Belongs to (Operation) A 824 O-S Operational Structure

Includes (Operation) B 805 S-P

Belongs to (Exercise) A 827 O-S Exercise Target

Includes (Exercise) A 825 S-P

O = force element, S = position, P = person, C = job

For information about storing relationships, see Infotypes for Command and Control Relationships.

By choosing Select Relationship, you can choose between the different relationship types.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 48
 7/10/2024
You can de ne which relationships can be displayed and edited.

 Note
You can also change the texts used to name the relationships. These texts override the names of the relationship directions.

Properties

You enter the following properties for an assignment:

Name / ID / Code

Assigned Object

Object Status / Object Status (Text)

The status of the assigned object

Valid from / Valid to

The validity period of the assigned object

Assigned as of / Assigned until

The validity period (to the day) of the assignment

For relationship 805 only: From (Time)/To (Time)

The validity period (to the minute) of the assignment.

For operation/exercise relationships 824 and 827 only: For more properties in these relationships, see
Operational/Exercise Relationships.

Relationship Text

A description of the relationship.

Relationship Status/Relationship Status (Text)

The status of the relationship.

Integration
If you use the functions for integration with Investigative Case Management, you can also use the Plans (Operation)
relationship. For more information, see the documentation for Investigative Case Management for Security Organizations.

Armed Forces-Speci c Position Characteristics (Infotype 1958)

De nition
The properties of a position that are speci c to armed forces.

Use
In addition to the standard position properties, you can use armed forces-speci c properties to describe positions.

Structure
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 49
 7/10/2024
The following elds on the Speci c Characteristics facet are available in the Manage Positions:

Country/Region

The country/region assigned.

Organization Area

The organizational area assigned.

Found in the Position Range

Indicates whether the position is to be included in the actual range of positions. You can use positions that are not found
in the range of positions, for example to assign persons on a temporary basis.

The data is stored in infotype 1958 (component-speci c).

 Note
Blocking reasons are mapped using infotype 1509.

The following date-speci c information is also displayed on this tab:

Usage Type

Speci es the structures in which the position is included.

Position Holder in Operation

An indicator derived from relationship 805 that speci es whether the position holder is deployed in an operation.

Manage Positions
App ID: F4435

You can use this app to efficiently manage your positions.

Key Features
You can:

Create positions that are either assigned to a force element or are independent of this.

Maintain the position master data and use status management.

Assign jobs, quali cations, and persons.

Navigate from the position to the force element and back.

Maintain the chief and deputy position.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 50
 7/10/2024

View
Positions are displayed in a list when you open the app. You can de ne a custom view using the available settings and save this.

Structure
A position has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it that show different information. These
are as follows:

Name

Speci c Characteristics

Description

Employee Group

Rank

Vacancy

NATO

Relationships

Quali cation Overview

Job

Requirements

Tasks

Conventions

Blocked Position

Actual Personnel

Flexible Material Planning Objects

Operations

Exercises

Attachments

Classi cation

The usage of the position involved speci es the facets that contain data. In the case of an occupied position for example, the
Blocked Position facet does not contain any data.

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a position using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 51
 7/10/2024

Creating a Position
Choose Create Position. The object page for the position appears for editing. You must make entries in the elds marked with a
red asterisk. The system de nes the current date as a default Valid From date. You can change this if necessary.

To create a chief or deputy position, select the respective checkbox. You cannot change this subsequently.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the position, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you can save it
actively.

When you create a position, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you have
nished editing. For more information about the status, see Status Network for Positions.

You use the position type to differentiate between groups of positions. You can make a distinction between positions that are in
permanent use or positions that are only used during a transition period.

Basic Information About a Position

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a position. You maintain this information in the header and on the
Name, Description, Speci c Characteristics, and Attachments facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a position. The system assigns a position ID automatically here.

 Note
The Position Name is always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

Name
The name identi es a position.

Since the entry is time-dependent, you can create more than one entry. However, only one entry can be active at any time. If you
activate a second entry, this automatically delimits the rst entry to the day before the active entry starts.

Speci c Characteristics
The entries shown in the elds here correspond to the data you entered when you created the position.

You de ne employee types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element Position
De ne Employee Type .

For more information, see also Command and Control Relationships (Position) and Quali cations/Requirements.

Description
You can enter different types of descriptions, such as legal and technical descriptions that are de ned by the subtype.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 52
 7/10/2024

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

Classi cation
A position is classi ed using the classi cation system. Class type 068 is de ned for the force element object type. The class
selected de nes the characteristic values that can then be assigned. You can edit these assignments of classes and the
evaluation of characteristics in the classi cation system. For more information about the classi cation system, see
Classi cation (CA-CL).

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution provides a Sensitivity eld, which you can use to assign a speci c sensitivity
value to positions. This can for example be used to de ne special force units. You can then use this eld to prevent certain users
accessing these units.

To categorize the sensitivity of a unit, you must rst assign the classi cation.

Check whether the eld for sensitivity is already visible on the Classi cation facet. If not, click on Click here to assign a class in
the edit mode to assign the new class type for sensitivity and select class type Sensitivity for Defense (SEN) on the dialog box.

The sensitivity eld has been integrated on the Classi cation facet for positions. It has been enabled for multiple values,
meaning that a single object can have several different sensitivity values. A user only needs to be granted authorization to
access the object protected by the sensitivity for one of these values.

Related Information
Manage Positions

Person-Related Information About a Position

This topic explains the person-related information that is recorded for a position. You maintain this information on the
Employee Group, Rank, and Actual Personnel facets.

Employee Group
You assign a position to employee subgroups and employee groups on this facet.

You can use this assignment to check the employee and position data in the Personnel Administration and Organizational
Management components. A prerequisite for this check is that the employee groups or subgroups exist in both components.

The system checks whether:

Both the employee who holds a position and the position itself are assigned to the same employee group and subgroup.

The working time that is assigned to positions and employee groups or subgroups in the Organizational Management
component matches the working time assigned to the position holder in the Personnel Administration component.

If the working times do not match, the system issues a warning message.

Data for the employee group or subgroup is stored in infotype 1013. Even if this integration is not active, this infotype is
important, since the system checks the employee groups or subgroups when working times are processed. For more
information, see Customizing for Personnel Administration.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 53
 7/10/2024

Rank
De nition

The rank of a position in the public sector.

Use

In the case of a position, you can de ne the ranks used in the public sector on the basis of pay scale types.

For more information, see the Help Portal under SAP S/4HANA Human Resources Personnel Management (PA) Budget
Management Position Budgeting and Control (PA-PM-PB) Organizational Management for Public Services Job Index
(Infotype 1513) .

Structure

The following elds are available in the Manage Positions on the Rank facet:

Main Group

Subgroup

Rank Key

The appropriate rank for a position can be derived from the position's organizational area and the rank key, main group,
and subgroup de ned in Customizing for Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Ranks .

Ranks are stored in infotype 1513.

 Note
You can also de ne ranks for persons.

Actual Personnel
On the Actual Personnel facet, we can de ne the relationship between a position and a person. This is a display function only.
The relationship is set by the HR department in the Personnel Administration component.

The Holder (A008) relationship is displayed on the Organizational Structure sub-facet and the Subordinate (Command)
(K008) and Subordinate (Defense) (V008) relationships are displayed on the new sub-facet External Relationship.

Related Information
Manage Positions

Vacancy Information About a Position

This topic explains the vacancy information that is recorded for a position. You maintain this information on the Vacancy and
Blocked Position facets.

Vacancy
The Vacancy facet shows information about any open vacancies.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 54
 7/10/2024

Blocked Position
If for example your budget is restricted, it may be necessary to block a position for a certain time period.

You block a position for a certain period, reason, and structure. You de ne blocking reasons in Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element Position De ne Blocking Reason .

If a position is vacant, you need to hire a person. However, if you have de ned a blocking reason here, this is no longer possible.

Related Information
Manage Positions

Usage Information About a Position

This topic explains the usage information that is recorded for a position. You maintain this information on the Job, Relationships,
Requirements, and Tasks facets.

Relationships
In the Organizational Structure section, you can assign a position to a force element.

In the External Relationship section, you can assign a position to a force element with a wartime or peacetime relationship.

For more information, see also Command and Control Relationships (Position).

Quali cation Overview

An overview of the quali cations, including the quali cation level, is displayed on this facet. All quali cations that describe the
position, including the ones inherited from the job and requirement facets, or those that are directly assigned to the position,
are listed here. Quali cation sources are also shown in the overview to provide additional information.

Job
You assign a job to positions to provide a collective description of multiple positions with the same properties. The properties of
a job are inherited by the assigned positions.

Jobs can be assigned to positions even if these positions are assigned to reference force elements.

Requirements
The Requirements facet shows the quali cations for the position.

In the two sections it contains, you can add additional quali cations and you can group the requirements that qualify the
position under Quali cation Block.

Tasks
The Task facet is an assignment block where the tasks that have been created are assigned to the position.

Related Information
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 55
 7/10/2024
Manage Positions

NATO Information About a Position

On the NATO facet, you can de ne the NATO-speci c properties of a position.

The position can only be lled by persons from the countries/regions de ned in the NATO Rotation elds.

 Note
This data is displayed and edited in both the applications for the Organizational Management component, and also in the
Manage Positions app.

The following elds are available:

NATO Position ID

The ID with which the position is maintained by NATO.

NATO Rank

The NATO rank that corresponds to this position.

NATO Rotation 1-6

The position can only be lled by persons from the countries/regions de ned in these elds. You can enter a maximum of
six countries/regions, but the system does not map these in any particular order.

These properties are stored in infotype 1990 (component-speci c).

Related Information
Manage Positions

Conventions for a Position

A convention contains positions with speci c regulations. The Conventions facet speci es the position according to the
convention selected.

You must rst make the Customizing settings as described below for the following elds:

You de ne convention types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element Position
De ne Convention Types .

You de ne function types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element Position
De ne Function Types .

You de ne personnel categories in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Force Element
Position De ne Personnel Categories .

Related Information
Manage Positions

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 56
 7/10/2024

Operations and Exercises for a Position

Operation
This facet shows all direct assignments of positions to an operation. You can use these assignments to map the integration of
positions using operational structures.

The Operation Relationship section displays the operational force element. You can also view the relationship type for the
operational force element.

In the Operation Rotation Assignment section, you can assign any existing operation rotation. You can only assign to the
rotation assigned to the force element. This means that if the operation has two rotations, but only rotation 1 is assigned to the
force element, rotation 2 for the position is not available.

 Note
You can create a position at force element level. During creation, the position is assigned to the selected force element.

A position can also be created independently from the Manage Positions app and can be assigned to a force element. For
more information, see creating a position.

In the Operation Personnel section, you see all persons who are assigned to the operational position. You cannot change or
delete assignments here. You do so in the backend transaction Maintain HR Master Data in PA30 .

Exercise
This facet shows all direct assignments of positions to an exercise and you use these assignments to map the integration of
positions using exercise targets.

 Note
You can create and assign exercises using the procedure described above for operations.

Related Information
Manage Positions

Flexible Material Planning Objects for a Position

To enable materials management processes to be used to provide the organizational elements with the equipment they
require, or to monitor the current equipment situation, you use exible material planning objects (FMPOs) to map the non-
consumable goods (NCGs) required for the relevant position.

When assigning an FMPO, you must specify the object ID, usage type, a validity period, and the object ID of the assigned variant.
The usage type speci es the structures in which the assignment of the FMPO to the position is valid.

 Note
You can only assign an FMPO with the Active status.

Once this assignment has been made, the FMPO can no longer be changed. You must delete the assignment if further changes
are required. Make sure that you set the FMPO status to active to assign the FMPO to the respective position again.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 57
 7/10/2024
When you create this assignment, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you
have nished editing. For more information about the status, see Status Network for Assignments.

You can enter additional information about the assignment, such as the quantity, weighting factor, material category and
material indicator.

The material indicator is used as a lter criterion in authorized or actual comparisons to de ne the material to be procured. You
can assign different material indicators to assign an FMPO to a position more than once at a given time.

You de ne material indicators in Customizing by choosing Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Flexible Material
Planning Object De ne Material Indicators .

My Provisions speci es whether the FMPO is held in stock by the supplier or by the position to which it is assigned.

You enter a weighting value between 1 and 999 in the Weighting Factor eld to specify the signi cance of the assignment in
comparison to other assignments. The classi cation of the speci ed factor depends on the method you have chosen for
calculating readiness.

You can select the Readiness Mandatory indicator if an assignment for the readiness of a position or sub-structure is required.
This indicator can also be evaluated for the weighting when readiness is calculated.

If the assignment has the Active status, you can delimit or delete it.

A user status can be created as an addition to the existing system status. Before you can change a user status, you must rst
make the corresponding settings for it in Customizing. These are found under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Assignments Technical Settings Maintain User Status Pro le for Assignment .

If you need additional equipment for speci c operations, such as snow chains for winter operations, you can specify this under
Accompanying Parts. You can only specify accompanying parts that are part of the FMPO master data. The system
automatically sets the mandatory accompanying parts. You can add optional accompanying parts.

An FMPO can have another FMPO as an accompanying part which can have a further FMPO as an accompanying part. However,
you only see the accompanying part FMPO below the assigned FMPO.

Persons

De nition
An object that represents a person (or an employee) in Human Resources.

Use
You use this object to describe the actual personnel for a force element.

Structure
Technically, the person corresponds to the person (object type P) in the Personnel Administration component.

Status and Validity

The status and validity correspond to the object type Position in the Personnel Administration component.

Properties
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 58
 7/10/2024
The following elds or eld groups are available on the Actual Personnel facet in the Manage Positions app:

Basic Data tab

Position Assignment

The positions to which the person is assigned (if multiple assignments exist with percentages).

Personnel No. / Name

The name and personnel number of the person.

Integration
Persons can be assigned to positions and force elements.

Command and Control Relationships (Person)

De nition
Assignments between persons and force elements/positions that are modeled by means of relationships from the perspective
of a person.

Use
Use command and control relationships to assign a person to positions and force elements for your domestic base, operations,
and exercises.

Structure
Command and control relationships are displayed and edited from the perspective of the selected person using the tab pages in
the Manage Positions. The following tab pages are provided as standard with the relationships listed below:

Relationship Description Relationship Object Types Structure

Subordinate (Organizational A 008 S–P Organizational Structure

Structure)

Relationship Description Relationship Object Types Structure

Subordinate (Operational A 805 O–P Operational Structure

Force Element)

Subordinate (Operational A 805 S–P

Position)

Subordinate (Exercise Force A 825 O–P Exercise Target

Element)

Subordinate (Exercise A 825 S–P

Position)

O = force element, S = position, P = person

For information about storing relationships, see Infotypes for Command and Control Relationships.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 59
 7/10/2024

Material Assignment (Infotype 0800)

De nition
Material that is assigned to a person.

Use
The material equipment for a person (that is, the material provided to the person and, if necessary, returned by the person) is
created in the system using this infotype. A distinction is made between the following material assignments on the basis of two
subtypes:

Functional equipment (FUNC)

Personal equipment (PERS)

 Note
Rather than using the applications in the Personnel Administration component (display only), processing is performed
using a speci c report.

Area Code (Infotype 0801)

De nition
The geographical assignments for a person.

Use
In addition to the properties that are stored in infotype 0006 (addresses and so on), you can also de ne two additional
geographical assignments (area codes) for a person in the system, which are freely de nable in Customizing.

This data has no controlling effect and is for information purposes only.

 Note
This data is displayed and edited in the applications in the Personnel Administration component, and not in the Manage
Positions.

Structure
Infotype 0801 adds the following elds to the infotype 0006:

Area Code 1 and Area Code 2

The area codes (geographical assignments) de ned for a person

Integration
Infotype 0801 is an enhancement of infotype 0006. To enhance infotype 0006 and de ne area codes for persons, the value DG
must be set as a return parameter in the IVWID characteristic for each country/region.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 60
 7/10/2024

Sanctions/Offenses (Infotype 0802)

De nition
Sanctions that have been imposed on a person or offenses that a person has committed.

Use
In the system, you can de ne whether:

A person has committed an offense

Sanctions have been imposed on a person

The following subtypes are available to model different types:

Military Offense

Disciplinary Punishment

Civil Offense

This data has no controlling effect and is for information purposes only.

 Note
This data is displayed and edited in the applications in the Personnel Administration component, and not in the Manage
Positions.

Structure
The following elds are available:

Sanction/Offense

The offense committed or sanction imposed.

Description

A textual description of the offense or sanction.

Reference

A textual reference to a letter or le number.

Authority

The force element with disciplinary authority.

File Number

The le number.

Discip.Punish.End

The end date of the disciplinary punishment. These properties are stored in infotype 0802 (component speci c).

These properties are stored in infotype 0802 (component speci c).

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 61
 7/10/2024

Military Seniority (Infotype 0803)

De nition
The position held by a person within a sequence of seniority.

Use
You can de ne a rank number for a person for each organizational area and branch, and this number determines the person’s
position within the sequence of seniority. This sequence can then be used for promotional measures.

 Note
Use this infotype only for selected employee subgroups in your organization, since it is not suitable for mass data entry.

This data has no controlling effect and is for information purposes only. However, you can implement a Business Add-In, which is
part of the standard infotype framework (for example, in the GENERIC_INITIAL_COMPUTATIONS method).

 Note
This data is displayed and edited in the applications in the Personnel Administration component, and not in the Manage
Positions.

Structure
The following elds are available:

Organization Area

The organizational area for which the serial number entered is valid.

Branch

The branch for which the serial number entered is valid.

Serial Number

The position of the person within the sequence of seniority for the combination of organizational area and branch
speci ed.

These properties are stored in infotype 0803 (component speci c).

Personal Features (Infotype 0804)

De nition
The physical features of a person.

Use
In the system, you can de ne physical features for a person.

This data has no controlling effect and is for information purposes only.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 62
 7/10/2024

 Note
This data is displayed and edited in the applications in the Personnel Administration component, and not in the Manage
Positions.

Structure
The following elds are available:

Height

Height of the person

Weight

Weight of the person

Eye Color

The eye color of the person.

 Note
Once you have initially de ned these features, they can no longer be changed.

Hair Color

Hair color of the person

Blood Group

The blood group of the person ( xed values are available for selection).

 Note
Once you have initially de ned these features, they can no longer be changed.

Speci c Characteristics

User-de ned text for specifying additional special features of the person.

These properties are stored in infotype 0804 (component speci c).

Decorations (Infotype 0805)

De nition
Decorations that have been conferred on a person.

Use
In the system, you can de ne which decorations have been conferred on a person.

This data has no controlling effect and is for information purposes only.

 Note

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 63
 7/10/2024
This data is displayed and edited in the applications in the Personnel Administration component, and not in the Manage
Positions.

Structure
The following elds are available:

Type of Decoration

Decorations that have been conferred on the person.

Loan Date

The date on which the decoration was conferred on the person.

These properties are stored in infotype 0805 (component speci c).

Training Data (Infotype 0806)

De nition
Assignment of a person to one or more training programs (target), as well as the recording and storing of completed training
activities (actual).

Use
To map training requirements and record and compare training activities actually completed, you can assign persons to one or
more training programs, which may each comprise several training items. In Customizing, you de ne the set tasks that are to
be completed by the persons assigned within a speci c period of time for the respective functions of each training program. You
can then record the training activities that were actually completed.

 Note
This data is displayed and edited in the applications in the Personnel Administration component, and not in the Manage
Positions.

Structure
The following elds are available:

Training Date

The date for which the actual value should be entered.

Order

The assignment to a maintenance order (such as a ight).

Training Program ID

The assignment of a person to a training program.

From / To

The validity period of the training program.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 64
 7/10/2024
Function ID

The assignment of the person to a function de ned for the selected training program (activity pro le).

Addit. Function ID

The assignment of a person to an additional function (activity pro le) that the person carries out in addition to the rst
function (activity pro le).

Training Status ID

The assignment of a person to one of the training statuses de ned for the function selected (training level).

You can de ne several training levels for which different set tasks apply to each function. Each training level corresponds
to a speci c readiness of the person.

Training Details

You can de ne several individual training items for each training program.

Training ID

The individual training items de ned for the training program.

Actual Data

The training activities actually completed by the person.

Unit

The unit in which the target and actual values are de ned.

Total Act. Data

The total values recorded in the Actual Data eld for the selected training program within the validity period of
the training item.

Minimum

Optional target value that represents a minimum requirement below the target value in the Plan eld, for
example: 2 ( eld Minimum) of 3 attempts ( eld Plan) must have been completed successfully.

Planned

The target value that speci es which training activities are to be completed within the de ned time frame.

Training Passed

Indicates whether the person has passed the training.

Valid from / Valid to

The validity period of the training item.

Completed

Speci es that you have already completed this training data.

Job

De nition

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 65
 7/10/2024
An object used to describe positions.

Use
You assign a job to positions to collectively describe multiple positions that have the same properties. The properties of a job
are inherited by the assigned positions. For more information, see the SAP Help Portal for Organizational Management under
SAP S/4HANA Human Resources Personnel Management .

Structure
Technically, the job corresponds to the job (object type C) in the Organizational Management component.

Status and Validity

The status and validity correspond to the object type job in the Organizational Management component.

Integration
Jobs can describe positions.

Quali cations/Requirements

De nition
Assignment of quali cations and quali cation blocks to positions, jobs, or persons.

Use
You can assign objects of the type quali cation (object type Q) or quali cation block (object type QB) to jobs, positions, and
persons to describe the quali cation pro le or requirement pro le.

Structure
You assign quali cations or quali cation blocks in the Manage Positions on the Personnel Categories facet for the relevant
objects. The following relationships are provided in the standard system:

Relationship Description Relationship Object Types

Required (Quali cation) A/B 031 S-Q

C-Q

Required (Quali cation Block) A 031 S - QB

C - QB

Ful lled (Quali cation) A/B 032 P-Q

Ful lled (Quali cation Block) Determined indirectly using the P - QB

quali cation and simulated as A 032

S = position, C = job, P = person, Q = quali cation, QB quali cation block

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 66
 7/10/2024

Properties

The following elds are also available for these assignments:

Description

Speci es the assigned quali cation or quali cation block.

Assigned From/Assigned Until

Speci es the validity period of the assignment.

Characteristic Value

Speci es the characteristic value for the quali cation or requirement.

Mandatory

Speci es that the quali cation or requirement is required.

Inherited / Relationship Inherited From

Speci es whether the assignment was inherited from another object.

Notes

You can add notes.

Storage

The assignments are stored as relationships in infotype 1001.

Integration
This function uses objects from the Personnel Development component. For more information, see SAP Library under SAP
S7$HANA Human Resources Personnel Management Personnel Development Quali cations and Requirements .

Structures

Use
Organizational elements of armed forces, police, and aid organizations, which you map in the system as force elements, as well
as positions and persons, can be included in different organizational structures.

An organizational structure is a structure that is modeled between objects such as organizational units (basis of a force
element), positions, and persons, by means of relationships.

The following scenarios are possible:

Several structures exist alongside one other within an organization.

In a military organization, for instance, there can be parallel organizational structures for peacetime and wartime.
Additional structures can exist for operations and exercises.

Objects can be included in several structures simultaneously.

Certain organizational elements or positions exist in both the peacetime establishment and the wartime establishment,
while some exist in the wartime establishment only.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 67
 7/10/2024
Cross-references exist between parallel structures.

In order to map command responsibility, organizational elements of an operational structure can be assigned to an
organizational element from the peacetime establishment.

Example of three structures

O = force element (organizational unit), S = position, P = person

You can use such structures to map both the hierarchical arrangement of your organization (the organizational structure and
various command and control relationships) as well as functional relationships, such as support relationships. Some of these
structures will be permanent in nature, while others will be temporary (in some cases, to the minute). In addition to legally
binding structures, you can map non-binding work breakdowns.

In addition to the existing structures, you can:

Plan future structures

Create templates or reference structures to enable you to create structures effectively and consistently

You can use organizational structures to:

Represent reporting paths

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 68
 7/10/2024
Identify supporting units in logistics processes

Identify work ow agents

Pass on properties to lower-level objects

When you create and assign objects, you specify in which structure(s) the object is to be included. This connection is displayed in
the object as the usage type.

Integration
Structures are mapped by force elements, positions, and/or persons. You can also set up structures using reference force
elements.

Prerequisites
If necessary, you have de ned the required relationships in Customizing in order to be able to map customer-speci c structures
(such as work breakdowns).

For more information about the relationships provided and de ning your own relationships, see Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Command and Support Relationships Edit Relationships .

You have de ned in which combinations and the dependencies with which relationships are to be created when objects are
created.

Features
In the standard system, relationships are available for the following structures, which comprise force elements, positions, and
persons:

Command and control relationships in the domestic base between force elements, positions, and persons

Organizational Structure

Administrative Chain of Command

Wartime Establishment

Command and control relationships in operations and exercises between force elements, positions, and persons

Operational Structure

Exercise Target

Support relationships between force elements

Reference structures between reference force elements

Editing and Displaying Structures

Structures (and the inclusion of objects in structures) are displayed as follows:

Complete structures are displayed in the force element hierarchy view.

Details about the exact inclusion of a particular object are displayed on the object’s tab pages.

The usage type displayed in the object properties gives a general indication of the structure in which the object is included.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 69
 7/10/2024

Organizational Structure

De nition
Organizational structure-based command and control relationships between all force elements, positions, and persons that
belong to your organization’s domestic base.

The highest-level force elements of operations and exercises are also included.

Use
In the organizational structure, you map all force elements, positions, and persons as well as their hierarchical relationships
between each other that are part of the administrative chain of command and/or wartime establishment and thus together
represent the domestic base.

Structure
The following relationships are available in the standard system:

Relationship Object Types Meaning

A/B 002 O-O Assigns force elements in the organizational

structure to one another.
Reports (Line) to / Is Line Manager of

A/B 003 O-S Assigns a position to a force element in the

organizational structure.
Belongs to/Includes

A/B 008 S-P Assigns a person to a position in the

organizational structure.
Holder/Holder

O = force element, S = position, P = person

Organizational structure relationships (graphical representation)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 70
 7/10/2024

Administrative Chain of Command

De nition
An organizational structure that consists of force elements, positions, and persons for peacetime.

Use
Use this object to map both the force elements, positions, and persons for a peacetime situation, and their hierarchical
relationships.

Structure
The following relationships are available in the standard system:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 71
 7/10/2024

Relationship Object Types Meaning

A/B 803 O-O Assigns force elements in the

administrative chain of command.
Reports to (administrative chain of
command)/Is line manager of
(administrative chain of command)

A/B 828 O-S Assigns a position to a force element in the

administrative chain of command.
Belongs to (administrative chain of
command)/Includes (administrative chain
of command)

A/B 008 S-P Assigns a person to a position in the

organizational structure (transferred from
Holder/Holder the organizational structure).

O = force element, S = position, P = person

Administrative Chain of Command Relationships (Graphical Representation)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 72
 7/10/2024

All administrative chain of command objects are also part of the organizational structure, but not all organizational structure
objects have to be part of the administrative chain of command, nor do they have to be included at the same point.

Wartime Establishment

De nition
An organizational structure that consists of force elements, positions, and persons for wartime.

Use
Use this object to map both the force elements, positions and persons for a wartime situation, and their hierarchical
relationships.

Structure
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 73
 7/10/2024
The following relationships are available in the standard system:

Relationship Object Types Meaning

A/B 800 O-O Assigns force elements for a wartime

establishment to one another.
Reports to (Wartime) / Is Line Manager of
(Wartime)

A/B 801 O-S Assigns a position to a force element in the

wartime establishment.
Belongs to (Wartime) / Includes (Wartime)

A/B 802 S-P Assigns a person to a position in the

wartime establishment.
Subordinate (Wartime) / Includes (Wartime)

O = force element, S = position, P = person

Wartime Establishment Relationships (Graphical Representation)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 74
 7/10/2024
All wartime establishment objects are also part of the organizational structure, but not all organizational structure objects are
part of the wartime establishment, nor do they have to be included at the same position.

Operational Structure

De nition
An organizational structure for an operation. It consists of force elements, positions, and persons.

Use
Use this object to map the force elements, positions, and persons and their hierarchical relationships for a particular operation .
You can also create relationships to objects from different structures.

Structure
An operational structure contains the following objects:

A top-level force element that is identi ed as an operation using infotype 1956 (Operation/Exercise).

Lower-level operational force elements that are created speci cally for this operation and for additional force elements
from other structures if required.

Lower-level operational positions that are created speci cally for this operation and for additional positions from other
structures if required.

Persons assigned to the position.

The following relationships are available in the standard system:

Relationship Object Types Meaning

A/B 002 O-O Assigns the highest-level force element

(operation) of an operational structure to a
Reports (Line) to / Is Line Manager of
root object.

A/B 822 O-O Assigns an operation to a force element

from a different structure (command
Is Commanded by (Operation/Exercise) /
responsibility).
Commands (Operation/Exercise)

A/B 823 O-O Assigns a force element to an operation or a

different force element in an operational
Reports to (Operation) / Is Line Manager of
structure.
(Operation)

A/B 824 O-S Assigns a position to an operational

structure.
Belongs to (Operation) / Includes
(Operation)

A/B 805 O-P Assigns a person to an operational

structure.
Subordinate (Operation) / Includes S-P
(Operation)

O = force element, S = position, P = person

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 75
 7/10/2024
In the case of relationships of type 823 or 824, you must distinguish between relationships with and without rotation
assignments.

You can also create personal staffing proposals for planning purposes.

Example
Operational Structure Relationships (Graphical Representation)

The example in the diagram shows the following assignments:

The operation force element represents the operation. It is assigned to two objects in the organizational structure: a root
object for operations (relationship 002) and a leading command (relationship 822).

The operational force element FE 1 is assigned to the operation (relationship 823).

The operational force element FE 2 is assigned to the operational force element FE1 (relationship 823). It contains an
operational position (relationship 824) that is occupied by a person (relationship 805) who occupies a position in the
organizational structure (relationship 008). It also contains a directly subordinate person (relationship 805) who also occupies
a position in the organizational structure (relationship 008).

The force element FE 3 is assigned to the operational force element FE1 (relationship 823). This is part of the organizational
structure (relationship 002) and takes its position from the organizational structure (relationship 003). It also has an

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 76
 7/10/2024
operational position (relationship 824).

Exercise Target

De nition
An organizational structure that consists of force elements, positions, and persons for an exercise.

Use
Use this object to map the force elements, positions, and persons and their hierarchical relationships for a particular exercise.
You can also create relationships to objects from different structures.

Structure
An exercise structure contains the following objects:

A top-level force element that is identi ed as an exercise using infotype 1956 (Operation/Exercise).

Lower-level exercise force elements that are created speci cally for this exercise and for additional force elements from
other structures if required.

Lower-level exercise positions that are created speci cally for this exercise and for additional positions from other
structures if required.

Persons assigned to the position.

The following relationships are available in the standard system:

Relationship Object Types Meaning

A/B 002 O-O Assigns the highest-level force element

(exercise) of an exercise target to a root
Reports (Line) to / Is Line Manager of
object.

A/B 822 O-O Assigns an exercise to a force element from

a different structure (command
Is Commanded by (Operation/Exercise) /
responsibility).
Commands (Operation/Exercise)

A/B 826 O-O Assigns a force element to an exercise or a

different force element in an exercise
Reports to (Operation) / Is Line Manager of
target.
(Operation)

A/B 827 O-S Assigns a position to an exercise target.

Belongs to (Operation) / Includes

(Operation)

A/B 825 O-P Assigns a person to an exercise target.

Subordinate (Operation) / Includes S-P

(Operation)

O = force element, S = position, P = person

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 77
 7/10/2024
In the case of relationships of type 826 or 827, you must distinguish between relationships with and without rotation
assignments.

You can also create personal staffing proposals for planning purposes.

Example
Exercise Structure Relationships (Graphical Representation)

This example corresponds to the Operational Structure example.

Infotypes for Command and Control Relationships

De nition
Storage of component-speci c relationships between force elements, positions, and persons to map command and control
relationships.

Use

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 78
 7/10/2024
The relationship data for command and control relationships that is speci c to the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution
is stored in the following infotypes:

Infotype 1955

Storage of relationships between force elements and between force elements and positions to map the administrative
chain of command and the wartime establishment.

Infotype 1985

Storage of relationships between force elements and between force elements and positions to map the operational
structure/exercise target; in addition, storage of relationships between persons and positions, or force elements as staff
assignment proposals.

Infotype 0748

Storage of relationships between persons and positions or force elements to map the wartime establishment,
operational structure, exercise target, and temporary duties.

The standard relationships for mapping the organizational structure are stored in infotype 1001 in the Organizational
Management component.

Structure
The relationships are stored as follows:

Infotype Relationship Objects Use

1001 002 O-O Organizational Structure

003 O-S

008 O-P Organizational Structure,

Administrative Chain of
Command

1955 800 O-O Wartime Establishment

801 O-S

803 O-O Administrative Chain of

Command
828 O-S

1985 822 O-O Operational Structure, Exercise

Target

823 O-O Operational Structure

824 O-S

826 O-O Exercise Target

827 O-S

858 O-P Manage Personnel Staffing for

Operations and Exercises
S-P

859 O-P

S-P

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 79
 7/10/2024

Infotype Relationship Objects Use

0748 802 S-P Wartime Establishment

804 O-P Temporary duty

S-P

805 O-P Operational Structure

S-P

825 O-P Exercise Target

S-P

Integration
If you use the functions for integration with Investigative Case Management, the system also stores the relationships A/B 290
in infotype 1001. For more information, see the documentation on Investigative Case Management.

Capabilities
This topic describes the structure of a capability, and how this structure has been implemented in the SAP S/4HANA Defense &
Security solution.

De nition
A capability is the power to achieve a desired operational effect in a nominated environment and to sustain that effect for a
designated period.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 80
 7/10/2024

Defense organizations are facing new geopolitical challenges, meaning that they must use agile operating models to respond to
rapidly changing operating environments. They need to understand and control their current capabilities and identify any
capability gaps (that can then be addressed using capability development programs).

Use
Capabilities de ne what an organization can do. At a national level, they can be used to make political decisions about the
organization's strategic setup.

Capabilities are also important at an international level, for example if countries/regions are involved in joint missions with
other countries/regions and need to align their capabilities. Any capability de cits in speci c countries/regions can be identi ed
and a decision can be made about how capabilities can be shared between the different countries/regions involved.

Capabilities can be described by capability codes and capability statements. The term 'capability' refers to a capability code
here. Capability codes can be assigned to force elements or reference force elements, mission essential tasks or other
capability codes.

Structure
Capability Tree

Capability codes are structured in capability hierarchies known as capability trees. The following gure shows a simple example
of such a capability tree. The rst-level element is the capability root element. The capability code itself is the last node of a tree
branch. The hierarchy node is the level in between.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 81
 7/10/2024

Example of a Simple Capability Tree

When you create a capability tree, you start with a root node. Create any number of hierarchy nodes and capability codes below
this root node.

You can create several capability trees in your system, for example for your own nation, alliances, and allied countries/regions.
You can only de ne one capability tree as the national capability tree.

Capability Code

The capability code is the last node of a hierarchy tree and contains all of the important operational information.

For more information about the structure of a capability, see Manage Capabilities.

Capability Statements

A capability code contains capability statements that describe the capability in more detail.

For more information about capability statements and how to create them, see Capability Statements.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the capability codes or their capability statements in the
following three SAP Fiori apps:

Manage Capabilities

Manage Capability Statements

Manage Force Elements - Capability Planner

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 82
 7/10/2024
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Capability Statements
This topic describes capability statements, their types, and categories, and how they have been implemented in the SAP
S/4HANA Defense & Security solution.

De nition
A capability statement describes the requirements for a capability.

Capability Statement Type

You create and maintain the capability statement types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Capabilities Capability Maintain Capability Statement Type .

You can maintain the three most common international capability statement types:

Capstone capability statement - Represents the target description of the capability. Each capability code can only have
one capstone capability statement.

Principal capability statement - Describes the capability in more detail.

Enabling capability statement - Describes additional information to be provided.

Use
Capability statements are assigned to one or more capabilities and can also be linked to one or more variant groups. You assign
a capability statement to a capability under Manage Capability → Statements → Capability Statements.

When you assign a capability statement to a variant group, it is referred to as a variant group capability statement.

You do not assign a variant group capability statement to a capability directly. You create a variant group capability statement
and assign it to a variant group. When you assign a capability to the same variant group, the variant group capability statement
appears automatically as an assignment under Manage Capability → Statements → Variant Group Statements.

A separate maintenance view is provided to manage variant groups. This can be accessed using the backend transaction
Manage Variant Groups (DFS_CAP_VARG_MAINT). You maintain the variant group name and the characteristics here.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the capability statements in the SAP Fiori app Manage
Capability Statements.

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Mission Essential Tasks

This topic describes the structure of a mission essential task and how this structure has been implemented in the SAP
S/4HANA Defense & Security solution.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 83
 7/10/2024

De nition
Standardized mission essential task lists (METL) are the defense force’s official listings of the fundamental tasks that units are
expected to perform in any operational environment. In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, the mission essential
task and task hierarchy consists of a written task description along with additional features such as characteristics and possible
attachments.

Use
The METLs break down the tasks, such as those from the government strategic directives into individual requirements. They
can also be universal joint task list descriptions with a hierarchical structure. As such, they can be used to identify the unit’s
crucial tasks and to support preparedness reporting.

Mission essential tasks are created in a hierarchy. Therefore, parent-child relationships must be created between the mission
essential tasks.

Typically, a unit for example in an operation is linked with a number of mission essential tasks. The related operational or
preparedness measures are monitored outside the system. The assessment of the unit’s trainings can be recorded in the
system.

SAP Fiori App

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the mission essential tasks in the SAP Fiori app Manage
Mission Essential Tasks.

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Integration
Mission essential tasks can be assigned to capability codes and force elements or reference force elements.

Scenario
This topic describes scenarios with their categories, and how they have been implemented in the SAP S/4HANA Defense &
Security solution.

De nition
A single scenario consists of one or more of possible alternatives. Alternatives can be response options to a threat or natural
disaster. Each alternative includes a set of objects related to a capability code, and they are combined with active force
elements as an alternative tasks level. A task can be seen as a logical step or a milestone or a reporting level in a scenario
alternative.

A scenario contains capability requirements, which are de ned by capability codes. You can combine these capability
requirements with active force elements to identify which unit is expected to perform the tasks.

Use
A scenario can for example be used in capability-based planning and development processes. It collects different capability-
related objects and actual active force elements and allows the user to compare the scenario alternative’s requirement de ned
by the capabilities assigned to it with active force elements that could possibly ful l the requirements. A planner can view the

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 84
 7/10/2024
crucial personnel, material and training requirements (job, FMPO, METL) linked with each required capability code in the
scenario alternative task. This allows the planner to evaluate whether the identi ed unit is now ready and prepared to
undertake the operation at hand.

This scenario master data is also used as the basis for any tailored and complex readiness and preparedness evaluations,
reporting or simulations.

Scenarios are divided into two different types:

Preparedness monitoring scenario

Capability development scenario

The preparedness monitoring scenario is a scenario that is monitored periodically. The aim is to identify shortcomings in
capabilities and provide input for different downstream processes such as material replenishments or any human resources
management activities.

The capability development scenario is used to introduce new or upgraded capabilities.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the software solution SAP S/4 HANA Defense & Security, you can maintain the scenario in the SAP Fiori app Manage
Planning Scenarios.

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Manage Capabilities
App ID: F4133

You can use this app to manage capability codes and to structure them hierarchically. You can maintain your organization's own
capabilities and standardized reference capabilities.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

See a hierarchical view of a capability structure.

See a detailed description of a capability (code, owner, name, symbol, status, validity).

View capability statements, (reference) force elements, and mission essential task lists for a capability code.

Create or update a capability code, hierarchy, or capability variant group.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 85
 7/10/2024
The capability codes can be viewed as a list or a hierarchy. The list view is displayed as a default when you open the app.

If you choose View Hierarchy to switch to the hierarchy view, you can choose List View to return to the list view. You can also
de ne a custom view and save this. However, you can only access this in the view in which you created it.

The hierarchy view of the capability code represents the capability tree and this hierarchy is de ned by the settings made for
each capability code.

Structure
A capability code has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it which show different information
about it. The structure of a capability code is de ned as follows:

General Information

Classi cation

Statements

Assignments

User Status

Lines of Development (LoD)

Attachments

Administrative Information

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a capability code using the elds at the top of the initial screen. This search is available in both the list view
and the hierarchy view.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating a Capability Code

When creating a capability code, you must rst choose the level of the capability hierarchy at which the capability code is to be
created. You can create it as a root node, which is the highest level of the capability tree. Alternatively, you can create it as a
hierarchy node or you can create it as a capability code at the lowest level of a capability tree branch.

Choose Create Hierarchy Node to create a root node or a hierarchy node. To de ne a root node, select the option Is a Root
Node?.

Choose Create Capability. The object page for the capability code appears for editing. You must make entries in the elds
marked with a red asterisk. The system de nes the current date as a default Valid From date. You can change this if necessary.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the capability code, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you can save
it actively.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 86
 7/10/2024

To update a capability code, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds marked with a red
asterisk contain data.

Basic Information About a Capability

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a capability code. You maintain this information in the header and
on the General Information, User Status, Attachments, Classi cation and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a capability code.

Each capability has an actual unique capability code.

When you create a capability code, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you
have nished editing. For more information about the status, see Status Network for Capabilities.

 Note
The elds Capability Code and Capability ID are always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

General Information
This facet shows all of the general data for the capability. The capability description is a generic description of the
capability.

The capability owner is a real person, such as the responsible capability planner, and the system enters their name
automatically once you have entered the capability owner ID.

The parent ID is the ID of the capability hierarchy node, which is the parent of the respective capability. The system enters the
parent name automatically once you have entered the parent ID. This can be changed later if required.

Capabilities are assigned to a capability tree.

The variant group is a bundle that contains the capability statements that are common to all capabilities that belong to this
variant group. You should only add this for capabilities that are part of such groups. The variant groups are created separately
and are only assigned here.

You can add a textual reference to other documents under Reference Document. You link digital documents on the
Attachments facet.

The Copied from eld tells you where the capability code has been copied from. Note that this eld is only visible for those
capabilities that are copies of another capability.

Classi cation
A capability is classi ed using the classi cation system. Class type C01 is de ned for the capability object type. The class
selected de nes the characteristic values that can then be assigned. You can edit these assignments of classes and the
evaluation of characteristics in the classi cation system. For more information about the classi cation system, see
Classi cation (CA-CL).

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 87
 7/10/2024
The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution provides a Sensitivity eld, which you can use to assign a speci c sensitivity
value to capabilities. This can for example be used to de ne special force units. You can then use this eld to prevent certain
users from accessing these units.

To categorize the sensitivity of a unit, you must rst assign the classi cation.

Check whether the sensitivity eld is already visible on the Classi cation facet. If not, click on Click here to assign a class in the
edit mode to assign the new class type for sensitivity and select the class type Sensitivity for Defense (SEN) on the dialog box.

The sensitivity eld has been integrated in the Classi cation facet for capabilities. It has been enabled for multiple values,
meaning that a single object can have several different sensitivity values. A user only needs to be granted authorization to
access the object protected by the sensitivity for one of these values.

User Status
A user status can be created as an addition to the existing system status.

Before you can change a user status in the Manage Capabilities app, you must rst make the corresponding settings for it in
Customizing. These are found under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Assignments Technical Settings
Maintain User Status Pro le for Assignment .

You can de ne and activate any number of user statuses.

 Note
You can only make changes to the user status using the Change User Status button at the top of the screen.

Lines of Development (LoD)

This is a framework for strategic capabilities that is used for subsequent planning activities in the training, equipment,
personnel, information, doctrine and concepts, organization infrastructure or logistics sectors.

These are critical elements of a capability code that are required for a capability or to deliver one. These are de ned as
assignments with capability codes, which are exible material planning objects (FMPO), mission essential task lists (METL) and
jobs.

You can assign, view and modify assessing METLs, jobs and FMPOs for the capability from this facet.

METs that represent training requirements are referred to as an assessing MET, and are assigned as an LoD object.

In the Assessing METL section, you can assign existing METLs from the search help. When assigning the METL, you can link
capability statements for the capability code that are ful lled by the assigning METL. You can use the capability statement
button to view the capability statement assigned to the METL.

 Note
The capability statement button is only available once you have selected the METL.

You assign the FMPOs and jobs using the procedure described above for Assessing METLs.

The capability statements that are assigned to the capability code can be linked to the LoD objects, but not to any other
statement available in the system.

Attachments
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 88
 7/10/2024
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Related Information
Manage Capabilities

Capability Statements for a Capability

This topic explains the use and structure of the capability statements that are assigned to the respective capability. You use the
capability statements to describe the capability code in more detail.

The Statements facet contains the Capability Statements and Variant Group Statements sections.

Capability Statements
In the Capability Statements section, you nd all the capability statements that are assigned to the capability code and that
are not part of a variant group. These are regular statements and shared capability statements.

You can enter a sequence number to sort the order of the capability statements.

You must enter the capability statement ID to assign a shared capability statement.

Once a capability statement has been assigned to the capability code, the system displays the capability statement description,
type and category here automatically.

Once you have assigned a capability statement, the system initially sets the status to Planned. For more information about the
assignment status, see Status Network for Assignments.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the assignment, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you can save it
actively.

For information about capability statements and their creation, see Capability Statements.

Variant Group Statements

Capability statements that are assigned to the capability code and are part of the same variant group are shown here. These
are not created here. When you add a variant group to the capability code on the General Information facet, the app
automatically shows all variant group capability statements for the respective variant group to the capability code.

As is the case for the capability statements, you see the type and category of the variant group capability statement that you
assigned to the selected capability code and its validity period. If you want to see additional information about the capability
statement, set the corresponding lter to do so.

For more information about variant group capability statements and their creation, see Capability Statements.

Related Information
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 89
 7/10/2024
Manage Capabilities

Assignments to a Capability
This topic explains the use and structure of the assignments to a capability code.

You can assign force elements, other capabilities, and mission essential tasks to a capability code. You assign mission essential
tasks (METs) to the capability code to implement a capability.

You make these assignments on the Assignments facet, which shows you an overview of all assignments to a capability code.

Utilizing METL
A utilizing MET is a mission essential task that is assigned to a capability code to describe the capability’s requirements. The
purpose is to identify the critical capabilities that are required when undertaking this identi ed mission essential task.

The mission essential tasks assigned are listed in a table in the Utilizing METL section. You can make new assignments, or edit
and delete existing assignments, for example by changing the validity date or the status.

When creating a new assignment, you must specify the MET ID. If you need to search for a MET ID, use the value help (F4). The
system uses this ID to access the information about the assigned mission essential task and enters this information in the
respective elds in the Utilizing METL section.

As soon as you start editing the assignment to the mission essential task, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished
editing, you can save it actively.

You must enter the validity date here.

Reference Capabilities
You can assign any capability code to the respective capability in the Reference Capabilities section. This reference supports
any subsequent reporting requirements, such as the planner wanting to see what reference capabilities are linked to a national
capability. The direction of the assignment is signi cant here (see below).

Example

You have two capability trees: the rst one represents your national capabilities and the second one represents an international
capability catalog (for example from NATO). Capability A is part of your national capability tree. Capability B is based on NATO
guidelines, and is part of the NATO capability tree that you have created. You assign capability B to capability A as a reference in
the Reference Capabilities section in capability A.

This assignment then appears automatically in the Referred Capabilities section in capability B. For more information about this
section, see the Referred Capabilities section below. The assignment can only be displayed while you are making changes in the
Reference Capabilities section in capability A.

The capabilities assigned to the respective capability are listed in a table in the Reference Capabilities section. As is the case
for mission essential tasks, you can create and delete assignments or edit existing ones here.

You must enter a valid capability ID here. If you need to search for a capability ID, use the value help (F4). Once you have
entered the capability ID, the system automatically receives the information about the assigned capability code and enters this
information in the respective elds in the Reference Capabilities section.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 90
 7/10/2024
As soon as you start editing the assignment to the capability code, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished
editing, you can save it actively.

The system de nes the name and description of the capability. You must enter the validity date here.

Referred Capabilities
In the Referred Capabilities section, you see all capabilities that are assigned to the respective capability code. You cannot
delete or change assignments here. You do this in the section Reference Capabilities section in the capability code to which the
selected capability is assigned.

The capability code name is displayed here. The usage type speci es the structures in which the assignment of the capability is
valid.

Force Elements
In the Force Elements section, you see all force elements to which the selected capability is assigned listed in a table. You
cannot change or delete assignments here. You do so in the section Manage Force Elements Capability Capabilities . For
more information about assigning a capability to a force element, see Capability.

The object ID and name are the ID and name of the force element to which the selected capability is assigned. The usage type
speci es the structures in which the assignment of the capability to the force element is valid.

Related Information
Manage Capabilities

Manage Capability Statements

App ID: F4137

You can use this app to manage capability statements. Each statement can be used for several capability codes or variant
groups. This makes it easier to maintain statements. Statements are typically the end result of strategic planning activities. In
some cases, the statement only exists in connection with a single capability code. However, some statements, such as 'enabling
statements', can be used for several different capability codes.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Create and update statements.

Search for statements and sort and lter the statement lists.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 91
 7/10/2024

Structure
A capability statement has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it which show different
information about it. The structure of a capability statement is de ned as follows:

General Information

Classi cation

Variant Group

Attachments

Administrative Information

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a capability statement using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating a Capability Statement

Choose Create to create a new capability statement.

You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. The system de nes the current date as a default Valid From
date. You can change this if necessary.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the capability statement, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you can
save it actively.

Once the capability statement has been saved, the capability statement is displayed on the object page in the display mode.

To update a capability statement, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds with a red
asterisk contain data.

Basic Information About a Capability Statement

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a capability statement. You maintain this information in the header
and on the General Information, Classi cation, Variant Group, Attachments and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a capability statement and provides you with the necessary context.

You can copy an existing capability statement to create a new one by choosing Copy Statement. When you copy a statement,
you must make entries in all of the mandatory elds that are marked with a red asterisk. The object page for the new statement
created appears once you have saved it.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 92
 7/10/2024

General Information
You can view the statement that has been created under this facet. You can only modify the statement in the edit mode.

The Copied From eld shows you where the capability statement has been copied from. Note that this eld is only visible for
those capability statements that are copies of another capability statement.

Classi cation
A capability statement is classi ed using the classi cation system. Class type ST1 is de ned for the capability statement type.
The class selected de nes the characteristic values that can then be assigned. You can edit these assignments of classes and
the evaluation of characteristics in the classi cation system. For more information about the classi cation system, see
Classi cation (CA-CL).

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution provides a Sensitivity eld, which you can use to assign a speci c sensitivity
value to capability statements. This can for example be used to de ne special force units. You can then use this eld to prevent
certain users accessing these units.

To categorize the sensitivity of a unit, you must rst assign the classi cation.

Check whether the eld for sensitivity is already visible on the Classi cation facet. If not, click on Click here to assign a class in
the edit mode to assign the new class type for sensitivity and select class type Sensitivity for Defense (SEN) on the dialog box.

The sensitivity eld has been integrated in the Classi cation facet for capability statements. It has been enabled for multiple
values, meaning that a single object can have several different sensitivity values. A user only needs to be granted authorization
to access the object protected by the sensitivity for one of these values.

Variant Group
You can view the variant group for the capability statement on this facet. Note that you can only assign the variant group in the
edit mode.

You can assign a variant group when you create a capability statement. When making this assignment, ensure that you have
made entries in all of the mandatory elds that are marked with a red asterisk.

Additional statement types are available for the variant group. You de ne these statement types in the Customizing activity
Defense & Security → Organizational Flexibility → Capabilities → Capability → Maintain Capability Statement Type. The
indicator Is Statement Type Relevant to VG? is provided. Statement types for which this indicator is set are regarded as variant
group statements.

A separate maintenance view in which you maintain the variant group and its characteristics is provided to manage variant
groups. You access this using the transaction Manage Variant Groups (DFS_CAP_VARG_MAINT).

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Related Information

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 93
 7/10/2024
Manage Capability Statements

Manage Mission Essential Tasks

App ID: F4138

You can use this app to manage the different mission essential task lists (METLs). The METLs re ect the tasks that units need
to train for and execute in missions. METLs are structured hierarchically and are used in conjunction with capabilities to
describe the abilities of organizational units.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

See a hierarchical view of the METL structure.

View a detailed description of the METL (name, description, tasks, owner, status).

Create or update METLs and their hierarchy.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
The METL can be viewed as a list or a hierarchy. The list view is displayed as a default when you open the app.

If you choose View Hierarchy to switch to the hierarchy view, you can choose List View to return to the list view. You can also
de ne a custom view and save this. However, you can only access this in the view in which you created it.

The hierarchy view represents the METL tree and is based on the parent-child relationships between METLs.

Structure
A mission essential task has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it which show different
information about it. The structure of a mission essential task is de ned as follows:

General Information

Classi cation

Assignments

User Status

Attachments

Administrative Information

 Note

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 94
 7/10/2024
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a mission essential task using the elds at the top of the initial screen. This search is available in both the list
view and the hierarchy view.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating a Mission Essential Task

Choose Create MET to create a mission essential task (MET).

The object page for the MET appears for editing. You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. The system
de nes the current date as a default Valid From date. You can change this if necessary.

You also de ne a MET type in the creation mode. You decide whether the MET is a task or a hierarchy node.

You de ne MET types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Capabilities Mission Essential
Tasks Maintain Mission Essential Task Types .

 Note
As soon as you start editing the mission essential task, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you
can save it actively.

To update a MET, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds with a red asterisk contain data.

Basic Information About a Mission Essential Task

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a mission essential task (MET). You maintain this information in the
header and on the General Information, Classi cation, User Status, Attachments, and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a mission essential task and provides you with the necessary context.

The MET code is the acronym of a mission essential task.

When you create a mission essential task, the system initially sets the status to Planned. You can change this status once you
have nished editing. For more information about the status, see Status Network for Mission Essential Tasks.

 Note
The elds MET Code and MET ID are always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

General Information
General information for a mission essential task includes the parent ID, MET type and MET description. The parent ID is the
object ID of the MET hierarchy node, which is the parent of the MET. If you do not enter a parent ID when working in the create

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 95
 7/10/2024
mode, this eld is not visible in the display and edit modes.

You can modify the MET type and MET description elds in the edit mode.

 Note
To move a MET, you need to change the parent ID here.

Classi cation
A mission essential task is classi ed using the classi cation system. Class type MT1 is de ned for the mission essential task
object type. The class selected de nes the characteristic values that can then be assigned. You can edit these assignments of
classes and the evaluation of characteristics in the classi cation system. For more information about the classi cation system,
see Classi cation (CA-CL).

User Status
A user status can be created as an addition to the existing system status.

Before you can change a user status in the Manage Mission Essential Tasks app, you must rst make the corresponding
settings for it in Customizing. These are found under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Assignments
Technical Settings Maintain User Status Pro le for Assignment .

You can de ne and activate any number of user statuses.

 Note
You can only make changes to the user status using the Change User Status button at the top of the screen.

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Related Information
Manage Mission Essential Tasks

Assignments to a Mission Essential Task

This topic explains the use and structure of the assignments to a mission essential task.

A mission essential task can be assigned to force elements and capabilities. The Assignments facet, which contains the Force
Elements and Capabilities sections, shows you an overview of all assignments to a mission essential task.

Force Elements

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 96
 7/10/2024
In the section Force Elements, you can see all force elements to which the selected mission essential task is assigned. The
usage type here speci es the structures in which the assignment of the capability to the force element is valid.

Note that the MET ID and object ID are not shown automatically. You must select these elds in the settings if you want to
display them here.

You cannot delete or change assignments here. You do this in the Manage Force Elements app under Capability Mission
Essential Tasks . For more information about assigning a mission essential task to a force element, see Capability.

Capabilities
In the section Capabilities, you see all capabilities to which the selected mission essential task is assigned. A capability code
that is assigned to the MET identi es the critical capability that is required when undertaking this mission essential task.

Note that the MET ID and description of the capability (CO Description) are not shown automatically. You must select these
elds in the settings if you want to display them here.

You cannot delete or change assignments here. You do this in the Manage Capabilities app under Assignments Mission
Essential Tasks . For more information about assigning a mission essential task to a capability, see Assigned Mission Essential
Tasks.

Related Information
Manage Mission Essential Tasks

Manage Planning Scenarios

App ID: F4697

You can use this app to manage your organization’s scenarios and their alternatives.

A single scenario consists of one or more of possible alternatives. Alternatives are for example alternative response options to
a threat or natural disaster. A scenario can also be used in capability-based planning and development processes.

A scenario collects different capability-related objects and actual active force elements and allows the user to compare the
scenario alternative’s requirement de ned by the capabilities with active force elements. A planner can view the crucial
personnel, material and training requirements (job, FMPO, METL) linked with each required capability code in the scenario
alternative task. This allows the planner to evaluate whether the identi ed unit is now ready and prepared to undertake the
operation at hand. This data is used as the basis for tailored complex readiness and preparedness evaluations or simulations.

A task is a milestone or a reporting level in a scenario alternative.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Create and update scenarios.

Search for scenarios and sort and lter the scenario lists.

Supported Device Types

Desktop
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 97
 7/10/2024
Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
A scenario has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it which show different information about
it. The structure of a scenario is de ned as follows:

General Information

Classi cation

Scenario Alternatives

Attachments

Administrative Information

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a scenario using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating a Scenario
Choose Create to create a new scenario.

You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the scenario, the system saves it in draft. Once you have nished editing, you can save it actively.

Once the scenario has been saved, it is displayed on the object page in the display mode.

To update a scenario, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds with a red asterisk contain
data.

Basic Information About a Scenario

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a scenario. You maintain this information in the header and on the
General Information, Classi cation, Alternatives, Attachments, and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a scenario and provides you with the necessary context.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 98
 7/10/2024

 Note
The scenario code is always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

General Information
This section shows all the general data for the scenario. You enter the scenario description when you create the scenario.

The scenario owner is a real person, such as the responsible scenario planner, and the system enters their name automatically
once you have entered the scenario owner ID.

A directive is a legal act that provides defense forces with guidance on how to execute their activities. It is a guideline rather
than a speci c set of instructions. Note that directives are maintained using the transaction Manage Directives
(DFS_CAP_DIRCTV_MAINT).

Classi cation
A scenario is classi ed using the classi cation system. Class type SCN is de ned for the scenario object type. The class selected
de nes the characteristic values that can then be assigned. You can edit these assignments of classes and the evaluation of
characteristics in the classi cation system. For more information about the classi cation system, see Classi cation (CA-CL).

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Related Information
Manage Planning Scenarios

Scenario Alternatives
A scenario alternative is an item level in a scenario. It can be used to create different optional approaches to a scenario. It can
also be used at a subsequent stage to compare different approaches to dealing with a speci c scenario.

Therefore, each alternative contains additional information, which is displayed on a sub-object page. This object page contains
the General Information, Planning Parameters, Tasks, Projects, Attachment and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a scenario alternative.

General Information
This section shows all the general data for the scenario alternative.

Planning Parameters
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 99
 7/10/2024
You maintain the Planning Parameters in the backend. Class type SCA is used in CL24N. This is a read-only facet.

Tasks
In the Tasks facet, you can create one or more alternative tasks to which you can also assign force elements and capabilities
(METL, FMPO, jobs).

On the Alternative Task List object page, you can modify the FMPO assignment types by choosing Manage Requirement.

Projects
On the Projects facet, you can assign one or more projects from the value help.

Related Information
Manage Planning Scenarios

Manage Variant Groups

App ID: DFS_CAP_VARG_MAINT

You can use this app to manage variant groups. You maintain the variant group name and the characteristics here. You can
access the app in the backend.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Create and update variant groups.

Create and update their characteristics.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Manage Directives
App ID: DFS_CAP_DIRCTV_MAINT

You can use this app to manage directives. A directive is a legal act that provides defense forces with guidance on how to
execute their activities. It is a guideline rather than a speci c set of instructions. You maintain the directives and their ID and
description here. You can access the app in the backend.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 100
 7/10/2024
Create and update directives.

Create and update their ID and description.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Organizational Changes and Status Changes

Use
Changes to organizational structures, objects, and object assignments may result in changes to the business processes that
use these structures, objects, and assignments.

The mapping of organizational structures, the planning of material categories, personnel categories, and logistical
requirements for each force element, and changes to structures and plans are subject to a multilevel planning and approval
process. Functions are available to:

Map and change the status of each object or assignment in the system

Adhere to the status sequences (from creating an object or assignment with the status Planned through to activation of
the object or assignment) de ned in accordance with your requirements

Features
The following functions are available:

Status Networks (possible statuses and status changes) for object types and assignments

Functions for changing the status of individual objects and assignments

Organizational measures to bundle organizational changes for a joint status change

Individual measure used for changes that are made by speci c users.

Status Networks

Use
A status network is available for each object type that has its own status. This network is also available for the assignments of
objects to force elements. A status network de nes:

Available statuses

Possible status changes

These status networks de ne the lifecycle of the respective object types, and therefore document the planning and approval
process.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 101
 7/10/2024

Prerequisites
You are familiar with SAP Status Management and status management in Organizational Management.

Features
The following status networks are available:

Force elements

Reference force elements

Positions

Flexible material planning objects

Capabilities

Mission essential task

Assignments

Allowance plans

Status Network for Force Elements

Status Network for Force Elements

From Status Change To

Planned 2 Submit BEAN Submitted 3

Submitted 3 Approve GENE Approved 4

Submitted 3 Reject ABLN Rejected 5

Approved 4 Activate AKTI Active 1

Approved 4 Reject ABLN Rejected 5

Rejected 5 Propose Change PLVO Planned 2

Status Network for Reference Force Element

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 102
 7/10/2024

Status Network for Reference Force Elements

From Status Change To

Planned 2 Submit BEAN Submitted 3

Submitted 3 Approve GENE Approved 4

Submitted 3 Reject ABLN Rejected 5

Approved 4 Activate AKTI Active 1

Approved 4 Reject ABLN Rejected 5

Rejected 5 Propose Change PLVO Planned 2

Status Network for Positions

Status Network for Positions

From Status Change To

Planned 2 Submit BEAN Submitted 3

Submitted 3 Approve GENE Approved 4

Submitted 3 Reject ABLN Rejected 5

Approved 4 Activate AKTI Active 1

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 103
 7/10/2024

From Status Change To

Approved 4 Reject ABLN Rejected 5

Rejected 5 Propose Change PLVO Planned 2

Status Network for Flexible Material Planning Objects

This topic shows the status network for exible material planning objects.

Status Network for Flexible Material Planning Objects

Overview of Status Network for Flexible Material Planning Objects

From Status Change To

Planned IDFS 0 Submit DFS 1 Submitted IDFS 1

Planned IDFS 0 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Submitted IDFS 1 Approve DFS 2 Approved IDFS 2

Submitted IDFS 1 Reject DFS 3 Rejected IDFS 3

Approved IDFS 2 Activate DFS 4 Active IDFS 4

Approved IDFS 2 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Rejected IDFS 3 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Rejected IDFS 3 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Active IDFS 4 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Deactivated IDFS 5 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Status Network for Capabilities

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 104
 7/10/2024
This topic shows the status network for capabilities.

Status Network for Capabilities

Overview of Status Network for Capabilities

From Status Change To

Planned IDFS 0 Submit DFS 1 Submitted IDFS 1

Planned IDFS 0 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Submitted IDFS 1 Approve DFS 2 Approved IDFS 2

Submitted IDFS 1 Reject DFS 3 Rejected IDFS 3

Approved IDFS 2 Activate DFS 4 Active IDFS 4

Approved IDFS 2 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Rejected IDFS 3 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Rejected IDFS 3 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Active IDFS 4 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Deactivated IDFS 5 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Status Network for Mission Essential Tasks

This topic shows the status network for mission essential tasks.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 105
 7/10/2024

Status Network for Mission Essential Tasks

Overview of Status Network for Mission Essential Tasks

From Status Change To

Planned IDFS 0 Submit DFS 1 Submitted IDFS 1

Planned IDFS 0 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Submitted IDFS 1 Approve DFS 2 Approved IDFS 2

Submitted IDFS 1 Reject DFS 3 Rejected IDFS 3

Approved IDFS 2 Activate DFS 4 Active IDFS 4

Approved IDFS 2 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Rejected IDFS 3 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Rejected IDFS 3 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Active IDFS 4 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Deactivated IDFS 5 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Status Network for Assignments

This topic shows the status network for assignments.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 106
 7/10/2024

Status Network for Assignments

Overview of Status Network for Assignments

From Status Change To

Planned IDFS 0 Submit DFS 1 Submitted IDFS 1

Planned IDFS 0 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Submitted IDFS 1 Approve DFS 2 Approved IDFS 2

Submitted IDFS 1 Reject DFS 3 Rejected IDFS 3

Approved IDFS 2 Activate DFS 4 Active IDFS 4

Approved IDFS 2 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Rejected IDFS 3 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Rejected IDFS 3 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Active IDFS 4 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Deactivated IDFS 5 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Status Network for Allowance Plans

This topic shows the status network for allowance plans.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 107
 7/10/2024

Status Network for Allowance Plans

Overview of Status Network for Allowance Plans

From Status Change To

Planned IDFS 0 Submit DFS 1 Submitted IDFS 1

Planned IDFS 0 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Submitted IDFS 1 Approve DFS 2 Approved IDFS 2

Submitted IDFS 1 Reject DFS 3 Rejected IDFS 3

Approved IDFS 2 Activate DFS 4 Active IDFS 4

Approved IDFS 2 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Rejected IDFS 3 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Rejected IDFS 3 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Active IDFS 4 Deactivate DFS 5 Deactivated IDFS 5

Deactivated IDFS 5 Resubmit DFS 0 Planned IDFS 0

Mass Status Change

Use
You can use this functionality to change the status of the selected force element, its children, assignments and/or position at
the same time.

 Note
The functionality is only available when the organizational measure is not active.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 108
 7/10/2024

Activity
To change the status, click on Change Status. The Change Status dialog box opens.

You can set the following parameters:

Status

Set the current and new status.

Force element

To change the status of an individual force element, choose Individual Operation.

To change the status of a complete structure of force elements, choose Structure Operation.

Area

Choose the area of the objects for which you want to change the status. The system automatically shows the objects
that can be updated.

Once you have nished setting the parameters, you can run a check and save the settings. The check simulates the changes and
displays any warnings and errors that occur.

Organizational Measure

De nition
A centralized planning tool for the force element that is used to group several measure areas that contain changes to force
elements, positions, organizational structures, and object assignments that are to apply to the entire system.

Use
An organizational measure combines all changes with a common business focus that are performed during an organizational
change, such as changes that are made collectively and for which the status is to be changed centrally. Individual measures are
also available, in which speci c users can update data and then change the status.

The Manage Measures app displays an overview of open organizational and individual measures and the changes that are made
using them for future reference. It is also possible to create and edit an individual measure using the Manage Measures app and
select existing measures.

Organizational measures are relevant for two different users in the system:

A user who creates organizational measures centrally and changes the status of organizational measures and measure
areas.

A user who performs day-to-day tasks in the system as de ned by the organizational measure.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the organizational and individual measures in the SAP Fiori
app Case Management and see details of them in the SAP Fiori app Manage Measures.

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 109
 7/10/2024

Creating an Organizational Measure

Power users, such as central planners within an organization set up organizational measures using the Case Management app.

For more information about this app, see Case Management.

Customizing Settings for an Organizational Measure Activation

Before you create or use an organizational or an individual measure, you must activate this in Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Structures Workbench Organizational Measure De ne Settings for Organizational
Measure .

 Note
Once you have activated an organizational measure, this applies to the entire system. The Organizational Measure button is
displayed and you cannot edit data without selecting a measure that is in use.

Creating an Organizational Measure in Case Management

In the Case Management app, under Role-Based View, drill down to the Organizational Measure and right click to create a new
one.

The measure type de nes what can be changed by the organizational measure. You de ne it in Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Structures Workbench Organizational Measure De ne Measure Types .

You must provide the ID of the header force element, which is used to open the hierarchy from the correct node. Effectiveness
speci es the date used as a default valid from date for the new data when the organizational measure is used. You must change
the status from In Preparation to In Process here to be able to use the organizational measure in the app.

After saving the organizational measure, you must activate the measure area, which de nes the areas to be changed. You
de ne measure areas in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Structures Workbench
Organizational Measure De ne Measure Areas .

Choose the measure area under Linked Objects [DE] Maßnahmenbereiche for the organizational measure and double-
click it. The measure area opens. You can now assign a user to the measure area in the Process Route section. When assigning
a user, make sure that you enter their user ID and an activity that they are to perform.

Changing the status from In Preparation to In Process triggers a work ow for users telling them that they have been assigned
to a measure area. They receive this noti cation in the Business Workplace or their SAP Fiori inbox. This noti cation includes
work items, which describe the work to be done in more detail.

 Note
You can only make changes using a measure area if the measure area has the In Process status and the work item in your
inbox has the Executed status.

Alternatively, you can restrict access according to the measure type. Using the Assign activities, you can con gure facets and
child facets for the required measure type. This can be done for create/update/delete/delimit/assign activities.

You can de ne all the action elds within a facet that you want to enable for measures in Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Structures Workbench Organizational Measure Assign Action Fields to Facets .

You can de ne the facets or child facets that are to be edited for a measure type in measures in Customizing under Defense &
Security Organizational Flexibility Structures Workbench Organizational Measure Assign Facet to Measure Type .

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 110
 7/10/2024
An example of a possible con guration for the measure type S001 (Formation) is shown below.

Assignment of Facets to Measure Types

Type Ty Facet ID Facet Name

S001 Formation C_FrcElmntExerStaffAssgmtList Exercise Personnel Staffing

S001 Formation C_FrcElmntExerciseRelshpList Exercise Relationship

S001 Formation C_FrcElmntOrgCharcsTP Characteristics

S001 Formation C_FrcElmntOrgDescriptionTP Description

S001 Formation C_FrcElmntOrgExerRotationTP Exercise Rotation

S101 Delimit and Process Active Data C_FrcElmntExerciseRelshpList Exercise Relationship

S101 Delimit and Process Active Data C_FrcElmntOperationRelshpList Operation Relationship

S101 Delimit and Process Active Data C_FrcElmntOrgCharcsTP Characteristics

Manage Measures
App ID: F4434

You can use the Manage Measures app to apply measures. You can select measure folders here, which are used to create force
elements and organizational structures, and to make object assignments and perform data updates.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Search for organizational measures using different criteria

See an overview of the organizational measure details (main details, list of subfolders, change log)

Select a measure to use

Create an individual measure

Change the status of an individual measure

Update the responsible person of an individual measure

Upload/delete attachments and links to an individual measure

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
Organizational and individual measures are displayed in a list when you open the app. You can de ne a custom view and save
this. However, you can only access this in the view in which you created it.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 111
 7/10/2024

Structure
An organizational measure has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it that show different
information. These are as follows:

Organizational Measure

Measure Areas

Change Log

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for an organizational measure using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating an Organizational Measure

A power user creates an organizational measure in the Case Management app. For more information about doing so, see
Creating an Organizational Measure.

Creating an Individual Measure

To create an individual measure, choose Create Individual Measure. You must make entries in the mandatory elds.

Individual measures can only be used if organizational measures have been activated at system level.

Basic Information About an Organizational Measure View

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for measures. You can see this information in the header and on the
Measure, Measure Areas, and Change Log facets.

All information displayed in this app is also available in the Case Management app. Note that you cannot make any major
changes directly in the Manage Measures app. You can create an individual measure and change its status, but otherwise this is
a read-only app that shows you an overview of any changes that have been made.

If the organization measure is active, the measure effectiveness date is used as the valid from date for all actions that are
performed in the manage force element and manage position apps.

If the date is in past, it uses the current date.

Header
The header shows the key information about measures.

 Note
The measure name is always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 112
 7/10/2024

Measure
This facet shows the general data for the measure.

You can access the force element or reference force element directly from this app by clicking the Header Element ID eld to
open it directly in the respective app. In the force element, the header section shows the measure name that applies to the
respective force element.

In the selected app it is possible to navigate to other force elements and update their data. You can also choose Organizational
measure in the Manage Force Element app to select the measure in use.

Measure Areas
All measure areas that you speci ed in the Case Management app are shown here. The measure areas with In Process status
shows you which tasks can be currently used to modify data.

Change Log
The Change Log facet automatically records every change made for this measure.

The central planner can monitor the tasks done and once the tasks have been completed, they can submit the changes by
changing the status in the Case Management app. This changes the status of all assignments under this measure area. Before
the measure status is changed to active, it is possible to change the status back to In Process, which changes the status of the
assignments back to Planned. If the central planner is not happy with the work done, they can also withdraw the measure by
setting the status to Withdrawn. This reverses any changes that have been made. The measure can no longer be modi ed and a
new measure must be created to continue working.

Related Information
Manage Measures

Materials Management

Purpose
In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, Materials Management (MM) supports you when supplying armed forces,
police, and aid organizations with non-consumable, individual consumable, and bulk consumable goods.

Material planners and MRP controllers can plan and execute initial supplies and other supplies for both the domestic base and
for operations and exercises.

Implementation Considerations
You have familiarized yourself with the MM component and have made the required settings in Customizing.

Integration
The functions in the area of Material Management are integrated with the functions in the Materials Management (MM)
component.

Features
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 113
 7/10/2024
The goods to be supplied are divided into non-consumable, individual consumable, and bulk consumable goods:

Non-consumable goods (NCGs) include capital goods such as vehicles and aircraft, for which evidence of use must be
provided.

Bulk consumable goods include ammunition and fuel.

Individual consumable goods include spare parts.

The following functions are available in the MM area:

Supply of NCGs

The authorized/actual comparison is the tool for procuring NCGs. The authorized/actual comparison can be used
to determine which precise material is to be supplied to the individual force elements.

The authorized stock is de ned on the basis of the exible material planning object (FMPO). The related actual
stock is managed in special stock storage areas for the force element.

You can use the central maintenance dialog for the warehouse structure to edit all of the objects that are
required to set up a warehouse structure for a new warehouse number, without having to navigate directly to
Customizing for the Warehouse Management component.

You can use a loan to exchange stocks temporarily between units.

MRP controllers can forward purchase requisitions to a different supplier if they know that the material is
available there. In such cases, the system automatically creates a follow-on requisition for the original purchase
requisition.

Initial Supply of Individual and Bulk Consumable Goods

The initial supply quantity for individual and bulk consumable goods is de ned in FMPOs that are assigned to the force
elements.

In the domestic base, the supplier is determined on the basis of the initial supplier of material. During an operation or
exercise, the supplier is determined on the basis of the force provider of the force element awaiting supplies.

Creation of Material Master Data

If a new force element is created or the materials for a force element are changed, you must create material master
data so that the logistics processes (procurement, inventory management, material requirements planning, and so on)
for this force element can be supported.

Adjustment of Reorder Points for Organizational Changes

If the supply relationships change for a force element that holds its provisions stocks at the supplier, you have to adjust
the reorder points for the materials concerned.

This means that when a supply relationship expires, the reorder point is reduced, and when a new supply relationship
starts, the reorder point is increased.

Processing of Open Documents When Supply Relationships Change

If supply relationships are changed, any documents open at this time have to be processed. The person responsible is
noti ed by means of a work ow and must decide which documents are to be executed.

Support of Cross-Plant Reorganization

If a force element or its higher-level force element is assigned to a new plant, the force element to which organizational
changes have been made can either keep its old plant or change to the new plant. The change can be de ned differently
for stock and provisions. The system supports plant changes internally.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 114
 7/10/2024
Additional functions are available for prioritizing requirements.

Support for the Return Delivery Process for Material

When deliveries are made to force elements, the system can create requisitions for return deliveries automatically.

Codes for Supporting and Controlling Transactions

The condition code categorizes material stocks so that the availability and usability can be controlled. The advice code is
used in the stock transport requisition, stock transport order, and reservation to provide the user with additional
information about a logistics operation. The status code provides the user with additional information about a logistics
operation (for requisitions and return deliveries, for instance).

External Batch Management

You can use external batch management to monitor and track materials with regard to their composition and origin.

You can use SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) for planning processes relating to materials management. The
system provides you with support for the required transfer of D&S-speci c master data to SAP SCM.

Manage Material Assignments for Force Elements

App ID: DFS_MCHG_ASSGMT

You can use this app to manage all authorized materials for force elements or any sub-levels that they contain.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

View all materials or speci c authorized materials, which are assigned to a force element and/or any sub-levels that it
contains, during a validity period.

Manage authorized materials assignments by creating, changing, deleting and delimiting multiple items collectively.

Apply status management to multiple authorized material assignments.

Filter down the authorized material assignments to create a working list, which can also be exported to Excel.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Manage Support Relationships

App ID: DFS_MCHG_SUP_REL

You use this app to change the support relationships for multiple force elements collectively.

Key Features

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 115
 7/10/2024
You can use this app to do the following:

Specify the force elements for which you want to change the support relationships.

Specify the reporting period and the required usage type.

Choose the perspective from which you want to change support relationships. The choice you make here controls the
selection and editing options that are available to you.

Relationship Characteristics A

Choose this relationship characteristic if you want to change the assignments to the force elements that are responsible for the
selected force elements as the supplier and maintenance worker.

You can either delete or delimit these assignments.

Relationship Characteristics B

Choose this relationship characteristic if you want to change the assignments to the force elements that are responsible for the
selected force elements as the supplier, maintenance worker, or supporter. In the Previous Relationships eld, specify which
supplier or maintenance worker you want to change. If you do not specify a value, all assignments are changed.

You can replace, delete, or delimit these assignments.

If you replace them, you specify the new supplier or maintenance worker, and the period that partially or completely contains
the support relationships to be replaced. If the support relationships are only partially in the speci ed period, they are only
replaced for this period. Sections of these support relationships that are found outside this period are retained.

If required, you can perform a test run, which does not update the changes to the system.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Actual/Authorized Comparison

Use
This function is a key tool used during the replenishment and procurement of non-consumable goods (NCGs). Replenishment
involves the internal supply of NCGs from the depot.

The authorized materials for a force element de ne the material that is required by the organizational unit. You can use the
authorized/actual comparison to determine the current equipment levels for force elements and trigger procurement
processes as required.

You access the Compare Authorized with Actual Materials app to display the authorized/actual comparison.

Integration

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 116
 7/10/2024
The authorized/actual comparison is based on the mapping of the authorized materials for a force element. This mapping is
done by assigning the exible material planning objects (FMPOs) to the force element.

Prerequisites
You have mapped the authorized materials for force elements.

Features
Based on the planned authorized materials, the authorized/actual comparison provides information about the equipment levels
for force elements. You de ne a force element’s authorized materials by assigning exible material planning objects (FMPOs).
The authorized materials are compared with the respective actual materials. The system displays whether there is a shortfall or
a surplus, or whether the equipment matches the authorized materials. The result is displayed for each FMPO.

The following criteria affect the result of the authorized/actual comparison:

The Evaluation Area determines the force elements that can be used for the authorized/actual comparison. It can be a
single force element, multiple force elements and storage locations belonging to an MRP area, or force elements in a
structure (such as an organizational structure, wartime establishment, administrative chain of commands and so on).

Only force elements that are valid on the current date or the key date speci ed are evaluated.

Only FMPO assignments that are valid on this key date are taken into account.

Displaying an FMPO assignment also has a stock dependency.

Overview of the Dependencies between an FMPO Assignment and Stock

FMPO Assignment Actual Stock Visible in AAC

yes yes yes

yes no yes

no yes yes - unauthorized material (UN) is

displayed

no no no

You can use the logistics adjustment parameter to control how the system determines the authorized materials, for
example if an organizational unit is to be equipped to a percentage below 100%. The value for the logistics adjustment
parameter is added as a ʻCorrection Value’ to the associated authorized materials during the assignment of FMPO.

De ne the equipment to be evaluated:

Structural equipment

Functional equipment

Installed Equipment

If installed equipment is selected, the number of pieces of equipment is displayed in the Installed Equipment column and
the actual quantity of FMPOs now also includes the installed quantity. The installed quantity is added to the actual
quantity in the last FMPO assignment line item.

All equipment held in stock at stock storage locations for the force elements determined is displayed. The quantity of
installed equipment is also re ected in the status display. The installed equipment is assigned to the authorized/actual
comparison data using the related FMPO. The system therefore determines the FMPO for the installed material and
adds this material to the FMPO.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 117
 7/10/2024
If the installed equipment is not selected, the actual quantity is reduced by the installed equipment quantity.

Logistics Adjustment Parameter

As an alternative to using the logistics adjustment parameter, you can also specify a minimum quantity and a maximum
quantity when assigning a exible material planning object to a force element. These two values are displayed in the issue list, in
the Minimum and Maximum columns.

Adjustments with Business Add-Ins and Customizing Settings

You can use the BAdI: Compare Authorized with Actual Materials Business Add-In to make customer changes to the setting
parameters, to the authorized and actual table, and to the output table for the authorized/actual comparison. For example, it is
thus possible to use this Business Add-In to consider storage locations of an MRP area that are not assigned in the
authorized/actual comparison.

Adjust Quantities in Material Planning

You can use the Adjust Requested Quantity for New PReqs in Material Planning Process Customizing activity to specify the
default quantity that the system uses for new purchase requisitions that are created for the authorized materials. For each
combination of plant and external material group, you can specify whether the requested quantity of material and serialized
material is to be adjusted. If the adjustment is active, the default quantity is calculated as follows:

Default quantity = adjusted authorized quantity – planned quantity – ordered quantity – actual quantity.

This calculation applies to purchase requisitions if the material list is called in the authorized/actual comparison, or if the
system creates the purchase requisitions automatically. If no Customizing setting has been made, the system sets the default
quantity to 1.

You can use the BAdI: Adjust Quantities in Material Planning (/ISDFPS/BADI_MATPLN_QUAN) Business Add-In to adjust the
quantity for new PReqs to the difference from the authorized/actual comparison, if the material is available in the
authorized/actual comparison. If the material is not available in the authorized/actual comparison, the quantity remains
unchanged.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the authorized/actual comparison in the SAP Fiori app
Compare Authorized with Actual Materials.

Compare Authorized with Actual Materials

App ID: F4776

You can use this app to determine the authorized materials and the actual equipment levels for force elements and provide a
detailed comparison. Flexible material planning objects (FMPOs) are assigned to the force element to de ne the authorized
materials for the unit. They indicate which materials are required by the unit.

The app is also a key tool used during the replenishment and procurement of non-consumable goods (NCGs). Replenishment
involves the internal supply of NCGs from the depot.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 118
 7/10/2024
Trigger the comparison based on multiple parameters.

See a comparison result aggregated for the FMPO for quick reference purposes.

See a comparison result with details for each assignment of the FMPO variant.

In conjunction with the adjusted authorized and actual quantity, view the ordered, requested, installed and issued to
personnel quantity in the comparison result.

See the accompanying part-FMPO relationship between FMPOs in the comparison details.

Trigger purchase requisitions based on the comparison.

Display equipment and serial number details, with an additional option to navigate to the display status board
application to check the detailed equipment status.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
When you open the app, you need to set lters to see the comparisons of authorized with actual materials for a speci c force
element.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

You can de ne a custom view including the parameters for the comparison and save this. However, you can only access this in
the view in which you created it.

Get an Authorized/Actual Comparison

To get an authorized/actual comparison, you must rst de ne the force element. You must also de ne the force element
status, evaluation area and the usage type. Change the default values speci ed by the system if necessary. The system sets the
current date as the key date, which you can modify as required. In addition to these mandatory parameters, you can also
specify many other optional parameters, such as the FMPO ID, material indicator, assignment status, equipment to be
evaluated and so on. Once all the necessary parameters for comparison have been maintained, choose Go. The comparison
result for the selected force element is displayed in a list ordered by the material/ exible material planning object (FMPO). In a
dropdown for each comparison, you can see a more detailed comparison for each assignment of the FMPO variant. You need to
open a comparison to display the detailed information.

The columns displayed in the authorized/actual comparison contain the following information:

FMPO shows the FMPO name and ID.

Variant contains the FMPO variant ID

Adjusted Authorized (Adjusted Authorized Quantity) describes the authorized materials corrected using the correction
value (logistic adjustment parameter) maintained in the FMPO assignment.

Actual describes the actual quantity (current stock + installed equipment + issued to personnel) and is distributed
between any multiple assignment lines that exist based on the weighting factor maintained in the FMPO assignment. (if
the weighting factor is not maintained in the FMPO assignments, the distribution algorithm considers all assignments of
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 119
 7/10/2024
the FMPO to be equal. It distributes the actual quantity to assignments sequentially until the actual quantity or
assignments have been exhausted).

Ordered quantity contains the quantity of open purchase orders and is distributed between any multiple assignment
lines that exist based on the actual quantity that has already been distributed and that has met the requirement
(adjusted authorized quantity).

Requested quantity contains the quantity of open purchase requisitions and is distributed between any multiple
assignment lines that exist based on the actual and ordered quantity that has already been distributed.

The system calculates the Difference based on the Actual + Ordered + Requested – Adjusted Authorized.

Installed quantity represents the quantity that exists as installations of other equipment.

Issued to Personnel represents the quantity that is issued to personnel which belongs to a position of the force element

Status in the Authorized/Actual Comparison

The result of an authorized/actual comparison is indicated with a status and a related status icon.

The table below contains more information about the status and how it is calculated.

Status Icon Description Calculation Details

Green square Authorized is the same as the actual. No actual = adjusted authorized.
purchase orders or requisitions exist.

Red circle Below minimum (authorized) When the minimum and maximum is not
maintained, (actual + ordered + requested)
< adjusted authorized.

When the minimum and maximum is

maintained, (actual + ordered + requested)
< minimum.

Blue diamond The actual and ordered quantities are found When the minimum and maximum is not
in the admissible range. No purchase maintained, (actual + ordered) = adjusted
requisitions exist. authorized.

When the minimum and maximum is

maintained, minimum <= (actual + ordered)
<= maximum.

Brown triangle The actual, ordered and requested When the minimum and maximum is not
quantities are found in the admissible maintained, (actual + ordered + requested)
range. Purchase requisitions exist. = adjusted authorized.

When the minimum and maximum is

maintained, minimum <= (actual + ordered
+ requested) <= maximum.

Yellow square Above maximum (authorized) (actual + ordered + requested) > adjusted
authorized.

Structure
A comparison has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it that show different information.
These facets are as follows:

Accompanying Parts - FMPOs

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 120
 7/10/2024
Models

Serial Number/Equipment Details

Basic Information About an Authorized/Actual Comparison

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for an authorized/actual comparison. You maintain this information in
the header and on the Accompanyings – FMPOs, Models and Serial Number/Equipment Details facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a comparison.

Accompanying Parts - FMPOs

Accompanying parts, which are also exible material planning objects (FMPOs), are already listed on the list page with the
comparison results. However, the accompanying part - relationship between FMPOs is not displayed. You see that information
on the Accompanying Parts – FMPOs facet.

Models
An FMPO can have multiple models. This means that the actual quantity that was available on the list page represents the total
actual quantity for that FMPO taking all models into account. The system displays the actual quantity, the ordered quantity and
the requested quantity for each of the models that exist within the FMPO on the Models facet.

Any differences between the quantities mentioned above can be resolved by creating purchase requisitions. Two options are
available to do this:

Create Purchase Requisitions On the Basis of AAC Proposal

Create Purchase Requisitions

If a speci c model is selected, it creates purchase requisition proposals or direct purchase requisitions for this model according
to the option the user selected. If no model is selected, it retrieves the de ned default model for the FMPO master data.

The option to manage purchase orders is also included to directly convert existing purchase requisitions into purchase orders.

All three functionalities Create Purchase Requisitions on the Basis of the AAC Proposal, Create Purchase Requisitions and
Manage Purchase Orders are also available as standalone transactions.

Serial Number/Equipment Details

Equipment details, including serial numbers, are displayed in this section for each actual equipment (including the installed
equipment).

You can also navigate to the Display Status Board app to see further details about the equipment and its status. Select one or
more equipment rows/lines and click View Equipment Status to navigate to status board.

Related Information
Compare Authorized with Actual Materials

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 121
 7/10/2024

Compare Authorized with Actual Materials for Person

App ID: DFS_AAC_FOR_PERSON

You can use this app as a key tool that focuses on which material a person has and which material is planned for them. The
perspective is always from person to position. The initial overview is a summarization that provides a quick overview of the
difference between authorized materials versus issued materials to persons. Separate line items for authorized materials and
issued materials are displayed in a more detailed overview This clear presentation enables you to review a timeline of
authorized materials versus issued materials.

You can access the Compare Authorized with Actual Materials for Person app to display the authorized and actual/issued
overview.

 Note
This app only works if existing FMPO assignments are available. You cannot use the app to view the content of the personal
master record. A relationship between authorized material versus issued material is always required.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Select a wide range of criteria for both authorized materials and issued materials to a person, like the usage type.

Get a summarized overview of authorized assignments to a person versus issued to a person.

Get a detailed overview to provide context of what is planned and what a person has.

Optionally incorporate additional materials that are not authorized.

Flexibly display structures to view returns, but also to see incoming orders or even stock.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Get an Authorized/Actual Comparison for Person

When you open the app, you need to set the selection criteria for the authorized/actual comparison.

Basic Data

Key Date: By default, the current date is displayed or any other date in the future. Only those relationships, assignments, and
force elements for which the validity date is found during the range of the key date are selected.

The Basic Data - Relationship Type refers to the relationship between the force element and the position.

The selection of the usage type is available on three levels:

1. Basic Data – Relationship Type: Here it refers to the relationship between the force element and the position and
person.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 122
 7/10/2024
2. Material Assignment – Assignment Usage Type: Usage type of the exible material planning object (FMPO) assignment
to a position.

3. Personnel Master Data – Personnel Usage Type: If you issue a material, you can also assign it to a speci c usage type.

The selection criteria force element and position retrieve the relationship to each other based on the usage type. If you only
enter a force element, the system only retrieves the relationship to the position based on the usage type (top down). If you only
enter a position, the system uses the position as the starting point and searches for the relationship to the force element from
there (bottom up).

The material category is divided into the following:

Assignment material category of the FMPO assignment to a position, which can either be functional equipment (FUNC)
or personal equipment (PERS)

Material type for the issued to person, be this functional equipment or personnel equipment

The indicator Include Personal Master Records retrieves all issues to this material, even if the plant and storage location are
different from the force element and/or position. If you deselect it, you only see the plant and storage location for the force
element.

The indicator Include Unauthorized Materials retrieves the additional materials that a person has received without a
relationship to an FMPO assignment.

The indicator Read Installed Equipment displays the number of pieces of equipment in the Installed Equipment column.

 Note
The default selection criteria are available for the key date (today), relationship type, force element status (1), assignment
usage type (F), assignment status (IDFS4 Active), personnel usage type (F), and include personal master records.

After executing, an aggregated view is displayed. If more than one personnel is maintained for a position, the FMPO
assignments to the position are expected to be duplicated across all personnel.

The quantities that are displayed can be veri ed by opening additional apps:

Requested Quantity: Use the Process Purchase Requisitions (V2) app

Ordered Quantity: Use the Display Purchasing Documents by Material app and or the standard Compare Authorized with
Actual Materials app

Stock Quantity: Use the Display Material Situation app

Installed Quantity: Use the Compare Authorized with Actual Materials app

Author Quantity: Use the Flexible Material Planning Objects facet in the Manage Positions app

Issued Quantity: Use the Monitor Personal and Functional Equipment report

The difference takes into account the issued to person, the adjusted authorized quantity, and the returned from person
quantity.

By selecting and double-clicking on a line item, a new detailed view is presented displaying authorized quantities separate to the
issued line items to show users how the difference occurred.

Logistical Execution
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 123
 7/10/2024
Please nd information about the following transactions below:

Display Material Situation (DFS_MAT_SIT_D)

Display Warehouse Stock (DFS_MB52)

Manage Storage Locations (/ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC)

Create and Process HUs from Packing Instructions (DFS_PI_HU)

Process Open Documents when Supply Relationships Change (/ISDFPS/CHANGE_PARTY)

Display Material Situation

App ID: DFS_MAT_SIT_D

You use this app to display the current stock levels and current provision levels for selected force elements (organizational
exibility view) or selected plants, storage locations, or MRP areas (materials management view).

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

In the Organizational Flexibility View, specify the required force element for which you want to display the stock
levels/provision levels.

In the Organizational Flexibility View, specify whether and which lower-level force elements are to be included in the
selection.

In the Organizational Flexibility View, specify whether you want to display stocks, provisions, and/or infrastructure
material, which are the storage locations that are to be evaluated.

In the Materials Management View, de ne the plant, storage location, or MRP area for which you want to display the
stock levels/provision levels.

Drill down to a detailed stock overview of material line items for further analysis.

Review the material master setting to ensure that the replenishment items are correctly generated.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Display Warehouse Stock

App ID: DFS_MB52

You use this app to nd out about the stock situation for materials that are assigned to selected exible material planning
objects (FMPOs).

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 124
 7/10/2024
Enter the FMPO and variant for which you want to display the stock situation.

De ne the plants and storage locations or MRP areas for the stock situation display.

The other selection options are identical to those available in the standard transaction Warehouse Stock (MB52).

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Manage Storage Location

App ID: /ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC

You can use the report for distributing and grouping storage locations to transfer stock from one or more storage locations to
other storage locations. You can also transfer stock between all plants. The system also supports transfers between HU storage
locations. You can transfer the stock online or in the background. During the transfer, the report creates an application log that
displays all material documents generated and any noti cations that occurred.

The report can for example facilitate the distribution of force elements once operations and exercises are complete. You can
also perform transfers based on reorganizations. You cannot use this report to create and delete storage locations.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Transfer stock from one or more storage locations to other storage locations by splitting quantities, changing the
receiving plant and storage location, and posting it in the front or backend.

Specify the movement types for stock transfers for unrestricted, blocked and quality inspection stock

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities

You can enter your selection criteria on the initial screen.

In the Organizational Flexibility view, you can select a force element with assigned stock, provisions, or infrastructure material.
By entering the structure operation and the related evaluation path, you specify which lower-level force elements are to be
included in the selection.

In the Materials Management view, you can select according to MRP area, plant, and storage location. You can further restrict
the search by entering a material.

In the Reorganization view, you can enter a reorganization. You can choose whether you want to consider stock, provisions, or
infrastructure material.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 125
 7/10/2024
You can specify the movement types for the transfer for each stock type (unrestricted-use stock, blocked stock, quality
inspection stock), independently of the chosen view. If you do not specify a movement type here, the system uses the standard
movement type.

When you run the report, the system displays the selected stock according to the selection criteria.

In the displayed stock list, select the stock items that you want to transfer and use the Change Receiving Plant/SLoc button to
change the receiving plant and storage location as required. A dialog box appears on which you can select the plant and storage
location. In the case of an issuing HU storage location, an HU storage location must be available as the receiving storage
location. Copy your selection. In the stock list, the system groups rows with the same combination of receiving plant and storage
location.

You can use the Split Quantity button to split the stock for an individual row that you select between multiple storage locations.
On the Split Quantity dialog box, you can enter the required plants and storage locations with the respective quantity. Use the
Copy button to con rm your selection. The system adds the new rows to the stock list, and you can split them further if
required. You can only transfer handling units completely. In the case of serialized materials, the system can automatically
assign the serial numbers, or you can use the Assign Serial Numbers Automatically <-> Manually button to assign the serial
numbers manually for each row. Once you have distributed the quantity, copy your selection.

Once you have made all of the assignments, start the transfer for the selected row online (Start Stock Posting button) or in the
background (Start Stock Posting in Background button). Once you con rm the con rmation prompt, the system executes the
transfers and then displays the log. In the case of postings in the background, you can use the Own Jobs button to view your
jobs.

If you have used a reorganization to select the stock, you can also use the Save List button. You can use this button to save the
edited stock list for the displayed reorganization and continue the transfer later.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Report: Distribute and Group Storage Locations.

Create and Process HUs from Packing Instructions

App ID: DFS_PI_HU

To integrate packing instructions in the logistics process, you pack them in a handling unit (HU). This enables inventory to be
managed at special HU storage locations.

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites must be ful lled:

The entries relevant for the packing process have been de ned in the material master views.

You have already created packing instructions.

The packing instructions contain material items.

The packing instructions have the status Approved.

The packing instructions are assigned to an FMPO and variant.

 Note
To pack multilevel HUs, use the standard transaction HU02.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 126
 7/10/2024

Key Features

HUs can be managed and created for FMPOs that contain packing instructions.

You can use this app to do the following:

Create new HUs

Manage existing HUs

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Procedure

Start the application Create and Process HUs from Packing Instructions ( DFS_PI_HU).

Processing Existing Handling Units

1. Choose Process Existing HU with PIs.

2. Enter the number of the HU and choose Execute.

The Process HUs from Packing Instruction screen appears.

3. You can then do the following:

Empty the HU completely

Delete the HU

Unpack individual HU materials

Change the total quantity at item level of the HU

Pack materials to the HU from the Worklist Packing Instructions.

4. To check whether your entries are correct, choose Check HU Content.

5. Save the HU.

Packing the Packing Instructions in the Handling Unit

1. Choose Create New HU with PIs.

2. In the Packing Default Values area, enter a plant and (optionally) a from and to storage location.

This data can be changed during subsequent processing.

3. Choose Execute.

The Items in Handling Unit screen appears.

In the Worklist Packing Instructions area, you can see the materials found in the packing instructions. All elds ready for
input are required entry elds.

4. Select the items you want to pack and choose Pack Selected Items.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 127
 7/10/2024
The packed materials are transferred to the Items of Handling Unit area.

5. For materials requiring serial numbers, enter the serial number. To do so, choose Serial Numbers.

6. Save the HU.

Result

The packing instruction is packed as an HU and held in stock at an HU storage location. The HU contains the packing instruction
ID of the FMPO for which it was created.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Report: Distribute and Group Storage Locations.

Process Open Documents when Supply Relationships Change

App ID: /ISDFPS/CHANGE_PARTY

You can use this report to select open purchasing documents based on the supply relationships for the de ned force element. It
is possible to either delete these documents or assign new suppliers. If supply relationships are changed from the current
supplier de ned in the logistics document and its requested delivery date, you can reassign the new supplier to the existing
documents.

Inherited relationships or external material groups based on supply relationships are also observed here.

The report lists the logistics documents based on the following selection criteria:

Purchase requisitions (stock transfer requisitions)

Purchase orders (stock transfer orders)

Outbound deliveries

The unit requesting the material is Consumer, and the unit covering the requirement for the requesting unit is Supplier. Stock
transfer requisitions and stock transfer orders are processed by the consumer. Outbound deliveries are processed by the
supplier. To navigate directly from the listed documents to the processing application, you can double-click on a document.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Choose a supply relationship for the force element required, either from the supplier or requester perspective.

List all open logistics documents that are created based on the chosen supply relationship.

Re ne the document selection using the delivery date.

Reassign or delete documents, set up background jobs for reassignments or deletions.

Display the application logs created.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 128
 7/10/2024
Smartphone

Activities

Using the Process Open Documents when Supply Relationships Change app you can list all open logistics documents for a
selected supply relationship and process them.

Stock transport requisitions are processed by the consumer (initial screen selection). You can convert any items that are
still required to a stock transport requisition with a new supplier. You can delete any stock transport requisition
documents that are no longer required.

Stock transport orders are also processed by the consumer. You can convert any document items that are still required
to a stock transport order with a new supplier. You can select the Inward Delivery Completed indicator for any document
items that are no longer required.

Outbound deliveries are processed by the supplier (initial screen selection). The supplier and consumer decide jointly on
how to handle purchase order items with open deliveries. The supplier can decide whether to send or cancel deliveries.

To navigate directly from the displayed documents to the processing application, you can double-click on a document.

Report-speci c action buttons are available in the bar at the top of the screen:

Delete selected document

Delete selected documents in the background

Reassign PReq (delete follow-on documents)

Reassign PReq in the background

The same options are also available in the main menu.

When you choose Reassign, a veri cation dialog box appears. After answering Yes, the system searches for new support
relationships and assigns the supplying force element found with its new supplying storage location. The reassignment can also
be triggered as a background job.

Prerequisites

Requirements cannot be reassigned to a new supplier unless a new supply relationship is already active in the system, and
documents that were created on the basis of an outdated relationship exist.

To navigate to a document’s processing applications, authorizations are checked in the background. If for example you are only
authorized to display purchase requisitions, the system displays all purchase requisitions, excluding the information and details
about the purchase orders and deliveries.

Data Output

The report displays the selected documents as an ALV grid list format.

The dependent follow-on documents are shown along with the purchase requisition.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Report: Distribute and Group Storage Locations.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 129
 7/10/2024

Process Material Documents

Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage Purchase Orders (DFS_PO_MANAGE)

Create Purchase Requisitions On the Basis of AAC Proposal (DFS_PR_PROP_MANAGE)

Create Purchase Requisitions (DFS_PR_CREATE)

Follow on Documents – Purchasing (/ISDFPS/PURDOCS)

Create Return Delivery Preqs (/ISDFPS/MM_RL01)

Display Purchase Requisitions (DFS_MAT_PLANNING)

Return Delivery Processing (/ISDFPS/STOCK_RETURNS)

Manage Purchase Orders

App ID: DFS_PO_MANAGE

You can use this app to manage and search purchase requisitions and orders to ensure that you receive the ordered items on
time, at the correct location, and in the required quantity for a speci c force element structure.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Create a handling unit for the material

Display serial numbers

Request a material

Change a purchase requisition

Convert a requisition to a purchase order

Process return deliveries

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Planning

Creating a Handling Unit for the Material

1. Choose Matl No. > Serial No.

The system displays one stock line for each serial number.

2. Select a line.

3. Choose Create Request HU.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 130
 7/10/2024
The system groups the chosen material in a HU and transfer posts the material to the supplier’s HU storage location in
the background.

Requirements

Displaying Serial Numbers

In the stock/requirements list, choose Matl No. > Serial No.

Any serial numbers belonging to the materials are displayed here if available.

Requesting a Material

1. Choose Request.

The Create Purchase Requisition screen appears.

2. Make the required selection.

3. Save your entries.

The system creates a requisition in the stock/requirements list with the record type PurRqs.

Changing a Purchase Requisition

1. In the stock/requirements list, choose Change PReq.

The Change Purchase Requisition screen appears.

The following elds are available:

General Data tab page

Source Elem.

The source force element.

Plant

The plant for the source force element.

Stor. Loc.

The storage location for the source force element.

Material

The material that is to be procured.

Batch

In the case of material that is to be handled in batches, select a batch for the material.

WBS Element

The WBS element to which the transaction is to be assigned.

Quantity

The quantity that is to be ordered.

Loan

Select this indicator for loan transactions.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 131
 7/10/2024
Change of Ownership

Controls whether the maintenance information for this purchase order is changed in goods issues.

Delivery Date

The date on which the delivery is to be made.

Return Date

In the case of a loan, the date on which the material is to be returned.

Requirement Urgency

For more information, see Customizing and choose Materials Management General Settings for Materials
Management Requirement Prioritization .

Advice Code

Status Code

MRP Controller

Enter the MRP controller responsible for this transaction.

Closed

If no further purchase orders are to be created for the requisition, select this indicator.

Addit. Data tab page

Material Group

The assignment to a material group (material groups combine several materials with the same properties).

Requirement Prio

Requisitioner

You can enter additional information in the requisitioner.

Planning Comment

Texts tab page

Text ID

De nes the type of text. The text is displayed at item level.

Text eld

A eld for entering a user-de ned text.

2. Enter the required data.

3. Save your entries.

Converting a Requisition to a Purchase Order

1. In the stock/requirements list, select a row with the record type PurRqs.

2. Choose Convert PReq.

The Convert Purchase Requisition screen appears.

3. Enter the required data.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 132
 7/10/2024
4. Save your entries.

The system creates a new purchase order.

Create Purchase Requisitions on the Basis of the AAC Proposal

App ID: DFS_PR_PROP_MANAGE

You can use this app to perform mass creation of purchase requisitions (PReqs) for multiple exible material planning objects
(FMPOs) and multiple force elements (MRP areas and substructures), based on procurement proposals (planned purchase
requisitions (PReqs)). The system creates the procurement proposals based on the authorized/actual comparison.

Key Features

You can use this app to:

Verify the system’s proposals in an issue list

Adjust, convert, or delete the proposals as required to create a purchase requisition (PReq)

 Note
The proposal is not created based on the availability check, and serial numbers are not assigned and cannot be added.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Adjustments Using a Business Add-In

You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Adjust Mass Purchase Requisition for Authorized/Actual Comparison
(/ISDFPS/BADI_MATPLN_MASS_AAC) to adjust the application. You can use the BAdI to adjust the selection parameters for
the associated authorized/actual comparison. You can change the material to be requested or change, supplement, or delete
the proposed PReqs. You can also enable automatic creation of PReqs, so that you can immediately generate PReqs based on
the system’s proposals without issuing the procurement proposals in the list. If you do not want to include any initial
procurement proposals in the issue, you can deactivate this function.

In Customizing, choose Defense & Security Materials Management Business Add-Ins.

Activities

Choose Create Purchase Requisitions on the Basis of the AAC Proposal directly from an authorized/actual comparison to open
the app or open the app directly. Independently of how you access the app, the selection screen is either empty or prede ned if
you’re coming from the authorized/actual comparison app. You can also select the Do Not Generate Defaults indicator, so that
the system does not display procurement proposals in the issue list. This means you can use the Generate Proposal button to
manually create speci c procurement proposals.

 Note
If the wrong quantity is shown, you need to change the settings in Customizing. For more information see Adjust Quantities
in Material Planning.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 133
 7/10/2024
The upper area of the issue list contains the authorized/actual comparison based on the chosen selection criteria. You can
choose Planning Level to switch between the evaluation levels FMPO and Force Element – FMPO , which also affects the details
displayed at material level ( Material Details button). The columns Planned Quantity and Adjusted Difference show the impact
of the procurement proposal on the quantity for each FMPO. This is also taken into account for the status icon.

The lower area of the issue list contains the suggested PReqs for each FMPO. You can select individual, multiple, or all rows and
choose Convert Default to create the PReqs. Choose Change Proposal to change the individual PReqs suggested as required. If
you have selected multiple proposed PReqs, choose Fast Change to make a mass change to all of the PReqs. If you do not want
to convert a proposal, choose Delete Proposal to remove it from the list. The system immediately takes this into account when
displaying the authorized/actual comparison.

The list displays the PReqs from converted proposals and you can choose Delete PReq to remove them any that you do not
require.

If a material surplus exists for an FMPO, the system can also suggest purchase requisitions to return the surplus to the supplier.
In Customizing for material planning ( Parameters for Material Planning Customizing activity), you need to select the Generate
PReqs for Surplus Quantities indicator.

Create Purchase Requisitions

App ID: DFS_PR_CREATE

You can use this app to create purchase requisitions. The app ensures that the items requested are available on time, at the
required location, and in the required quantity.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Create a purchase requisition for a receiving force element

Select the product and/or exible material planning object that is to be procured

De ne your speci c delivery date

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Creating a Purchase Requisition

Once you have selected a force element, product, and/or exible material planning object, you can add more speci c
information to the purchase requisition.

1. Choose Execute.

The Create Purchase Requisition (DFS_PR_CREATE) report is called. The following selection parameters are available on
the Create Purchase Requisition screen:

General Data

Receiving Element

Order Type
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 134
 7/10/2024
The order type displayed is the document type that was de ned in Customizing. This order type is determined
using the following criteria:

a. D&S plant-dependent settings

b. Generic D&S settings (material planning)

c. MM standard Customizing ( Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Requisition De ne

Document Types for Purchase Requisitions )

If the proposed order type is not correct, you can change this manually.

Plant

The plant for the receiving force element.

Stor. Loc.

The storage location for the receiving force element.

Order Type

Based on Customizing settings for material planning, plant, and/or generic, the purchase requisition order type is
determined. If you have an alternative order type customized in material management, you can select an
alternative to the D&S Customizing proposal.

Supplying Element

If a supply relationship is maintained, it is displayed here.

Plant

The plant for the supplying force element.

Location

The storage location for the supplying force element.

Material

If you selected an FMPO, the default model is shown.

If you did not select any model as a default, the most recent model added is displayed here.

Batch

In the case of material that is to be handled in batches, select a batch for the material.

WBS Element

The WBS element to which the transaction is to be assigned.

Open quantity

The quantity that is to be ordered.

 Note
If the wrong quantity is shown, you need to change the settings in Customizing. For more information see
Adjust Quantities in Material Planning.

Delivery Date

The date on which the delivery is to be made.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 135
 7/10/2024
Requirement Urgency

For more information, see Customizing and choose Materials Management General Settings for Materials
Management Requirement Prioritization .

Advice Code

Status Code

Loan

Select this indicator for loan transactions.

Change of Ownership

Controls whether the maintenance information for this purchase order is changed in goods issues.

Return Date

In the case of a loan, the date on which the material is to be returned.

MRP Controller

Enter the MRP controller responsible for this transaction.

Additional Data

Material Group

The assignment to a material group (material groups combine several materials with the same properties).

External Material Group

The assignment to an external material group.

Requirement Prio

Requisitoner

Planning Comment

Texts tab page

Text ID

De nes the type of text. The text is displayed at item level.

Text eld

A eld for entering a user-de ned text.

2. After completion you can either check, save, convert to a HU PR, or cancel the creation of a purchase order. If the
purchase requisition was created successfully, the number is displayed here.

Follow on Documents – Purchasing

App ID: /ISDFPS/PURDOCS

You can use the report for displaying the document ow in a hierarchical tree structure, starting with the purchase requisition,
followed by the purchase order, right through to the goods movements. This allows you to obtain a quick overview of the
procurement process and its current status. You can restrict the selection results on the selection screen and by using dynamic
selections. All preceding documents and follow-on documents are included in the selection.

The following documents and their respective items are displayed:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 136
 7/10/2024
Purchase requisition

Purchase requisition with loan indicator (loan requisition)

Purchase requisition with return delivery speci cation (return delivery requisition)

Forwarded purchase requisition

Purchase requisition for services

Purchase order

Delivery

Goods issues and goods receipt

Service entry sheet

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Use a broad range of criteria to nd and select purchase requisitions

Display the selected data as a tree structure in the output list for the report

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Prerequisites

To use the program, you must be authorized to display purchase requisitions, purchase orders, and deliveries. The following
authorizations are checked:

M_BANF_BSA and M_BEST_BSA for the document type

M_BANF_EKO and M_BEST_EKO for the purchasing organization

M_BANF_EKG and M_BEST_EKG for the purchasing group

M_BANF_WRK and M_BEST_WRK for the plant

Function module ME_CPP_AUTH_CHECK_BESWK for the supplying plant

If, for example, you are only authorized to display purchase requisitions, the system displays all purchase requisitions, excluding
the information and details about the purchase orders and deliveries. If you are authorized to display both purchase requisitions
and purchase orders, the system excludes the details about the delivery.

Data Output

The system displays the selected data as a tree structure in the output list for the report. This tree structure is subdivided into
Plant Purchase Requisition Purchase Requisition Item Purchase Order Purchase Order Item Delivery Goods Issue
and Goods Receipts . The goods movements are displayed in the tree structure on the suitable position. This can be on
purchase order level or on delivery level.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 137
 7/10/2024
If you double-click on a document in the tree structure or choose Display Details, the system displays a table with the
corresponding details in the lower part of the screen. You can de ne which details the table speci ed below displays (standard
variants) as required. If you double-click a row in this table or choose Display Document, the system calls up the relevant
default app for displaying the document, such as Display Purchase Requisition (ME53N).

When you export data to an Excel list by choosing Export, note the following:

Choose Spreadsheet All Available Formats Excel (In Existing XXL Format) .

In the case of very large lists, you can adjust the view by choosing Select Layout… Change Layout… View (tab
page) and selecting the Microsoft Excel template.

In Microsoft Excel, you must choose Tools Macro Security Trusted Sources and select the Trust Access to
Visual Basic Project eld.

Documents such as purchase requisitions with the loan indicator (loan requisition), purchase requisitions with a return delivery
requirement (return delivery requisition), and forwarded purchase requisitions are not displayed using this template, since
these documents have follow-on documents that in turn generate follow-on documents (such as return delivery requisitions).
Each document is identi ed by an icon and a quick info text.

Due to the amount of data involved, the system restricts the details displayed for purchase requisitions, purchase orders,
deliveries, and goods movements. By default, the system displays the de ned number of elds from the tables speci ed below
for the eld catalog. You can use the Business Add-In speci ed below to add or remove elds for the detailed displayed in the
table (ALV grid).

Example of a Tree Structure:

If you create a purchase requisition with the loan indicator 10...1, the system automatically creates a return delivery requisition
10...2 when converting this purchase requisition into a purchase order 45...1.

Origin of Displayed Data

When retrieving data, the system uses the tables EBAN and EBKN for the purchase requisition, tables EKKO, EKPO, EKET, EKBE,
EKPV, and EKKN for the purchase order, and tables LIKP and LIPS for the delivery. Note that you cannot display purchase
requisitions that have already been archived.

Making Customer-Speci c Adjustments Using a Business Add-In

You can use the Business Add-In Report – Adjust Follow-On Documents for Purchase Requisition
(/ISDFPS/MM_FOLLOW_ON_PURDOCS in the enhancement spot /ISDFPS/MM_FOLLOW_ON_DOCS) to adjust the report to
meet your requirements. You can use the method CHANGE_FCAT to add and remove elds for the detailed display in the table
(ALV grid). You cannot add details to the tree.

To call up the Business Add-In in the Implementation Guide (IMG), choose Defense & Security Materials Management
Business Add-Ins BAdI: Report – Adjust Follow-On Documents for Purchase Requisition .

 Note
If you are using this app in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Report: Follow-On Documents for Purchase Requisition.

Create Return Delivery Purchase Requisitions

App ID: /ISDFPS/MM_RL01

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 138
 7/10/2024
You can use this app at any point to create D&S-speci c return delivery purchase requisitions for materials in which the force
element is no longer required.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Create return delivery requisitions for every material item

Specify a different recipient for each material

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Prerequisite

You maintain return-delivery document types in Customizing under Defense & Security Materials Management Enter
Return-Delivery Document Types for Authorization Check . You only de ne the return delivery document types that can be
used in this app here.

Activities

1. Start the Create Return Delivery Requisitions app.

2. Select the Return Delivery order type.

When specifying the material items, enter the returning force element, issuing plant, and issuing storage location under
Default Values for Items.

3. Choose Further Default Values.

You can enter data for the recipient for example. If you select the Return Delivery to Standard Supplier indicator, the
system enters the standard supplier of the material as the recipient.

 Note
The system displays an error message if a standard supplier has not been de ned at material level.

Your entries are copied into the entry row of the item and can be overwritten if necessary.

4. Choose Insert Row.

5. Enter one or more material items.

6. Choose Save. A log le appears with the return delivery number or with error messages if any issues occur during
creation.

Alternatively, you can verify the material situation at storage location or MRP area level by either selecting Storage Location or
MRP Area.

Note that when a handling unit is entered, the system generates a return delivery requisition with the items for all materials in
the equipment package.

 Note

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 139
 7/10/2024
If you are using this app in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Creation of Return Delivery Requisitions.

Display Purchase Requisitions

App ID: DFS_MAT_PLANNING

You use the Display Purchase Requisitions app to process purchase requisitions.

The Display Purchase Requisitions app is used based on the authorizations assigned to the MRP controller role.

MRP controllers use the Display Purchase Requisitions app to display provisions for the purchase requisitions. As a "planning
tool", the system displays all purchase requisitions assigned to MRP controllers based on their storage location authorization.

For more information, see NCG Material Loans.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Process provisions for the purchase requisitions

Display all purchase requisitions assigned to MRP controllers based on their storage location authorization

Perform several actions regarding purchase requisitions from a worklist

Use the stock list as a tool for creating plans and converting plans into purchase orders

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Selection Criteria

The system initially displays a detailed selection screen. Based on your entries, the system creates a worklist for processing the
purchase requisitions.

Handling Units

The following functions are available for processing handling units:

You can:

Find suitable handling units

Change handling units in the purchase requisition

Convert purchase requisitions into deliveries with handling units

Display the content of handling units using the display app

Requisition List

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 140
 7/10/2024
The requisition list contains your purchase requisition worklist.

You can see these types of purchase requisitions:

Purchase requisition (record type PurRqs)

Loan requisition (record type LN Req)

Return delivery requisition - loan (RD Loan)

Return delivery requisition (RD Req)

Return Delivery Processing

App ID: /ISDFPS/STOCK_RETURN

This report shows the stock situation for a given force element. You can trigger a complete return delivery (RD) or create
individual RD orders.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Show the stock situation for a given force element

Trigger a complete return delivery

Create individual return deliveries

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Selection Parameter

The following selection parameters are available on the Return Delivery Processing screen:

Issuing Force Element

Force Element

Structure Operation

You specify whether and which lower-level force elements are to be included in the selection.

Evaluation Path

An evaluation path enables you to evaluate objects that are part of a particular chain of relationships.

Leave the eld empty if you do not want to use evaluation paths.

Stock Storage Location

If stock storage locations are to be considered, select this indicator.

Provisions Storage Locations

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 141
 7/10/2024
If provisions storage locations are to be considered, select this indicator.

MRP Area

Number of the MRP area for which material requirements planning should be performed separately.

Plant

Key that uniquely identi es a plant.

Location

Number of the storage location in which the material is stored. A plant may contain one or more storage locations.

Receiving Force Element

Return Standard Supplier

The system determines the standard supplier for each item at material level and creates a purchase requisition for each
item. If the indicator is not selected, the system generates a purchase requisition that contains all items for the
receiving force element.

Force Element

Plant

The plant for the receiving force element.

Stor. Loc.

The storage location for the receiving force element.

Processing Options

Plan Complete Return Delivery

If the complete open quantity is to be returned with a delivery, select this indicator.

Plan Serial Numbers

If you select this indicator together with the Plan Complete Return Delivery indicator, materials with serial numbers are
also transferred to the requisition. A return delivery order created at a later date contains one item for each serial
number and serialized material.

Create Return Delivery Purchase Orders

If you want the system to generate return delivery orders automatically, select this indicator.

Return Delivery Date

The date by which the transaction is to be completed.

Material Number

The selection of materials to be returned.

Material Group

The assignment to a material group (material groups group together several materials with the same properties).

External Material Group

The assignment to an external material group.

Handling Unit
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 142
 7/10/2024
Speci es an identi er for the handling unit.

FMPO ID

Variant ID

Delivery Date

Date on which an item is to be delivered or the service provided.

WBS Element

The WBS element to which the transaction is to be assigned.

Activities

1. Enter the data as required and choose Execute.

The Return Delivery Processing screen appears with the data records to be processed.

2. To create requisitions or change existing requisitions, choose RD PReq (record type RD Req).

3. To convert these records to purchase orders, choose Convert PReq.

The requisitions must have the status Released.

The system converts RD requisitions for non-serialized materials to purchase orders (record type RelOrd). In the case of
materials with serial numbers, the system creates outbound deliveries with the record type Outbound.

4. You can branch directly to various applications. To do so, select a row and choose More Functions.

5. If you want to delete requisitions, select one or more rows and choose Delete PReq.

 Note
If you are using this app in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Planning Materials.

Initial Supply

Use
You can create new formations of force elements and assign the force elements to individual and bulk consumable goods using
material assignments.

You use the initial supply function to create purchase orders for this initial supply quantity amount.

Integration
Two initial supply scenarios exist:

Initial supply during an operation or exercise

The force element is assigned to an operation or exercise. You de ne the supplier in the Operational Providers section of
the Operation facet for an operation, or in the Exercise Providers section for an exercise. You can maintain the force
provider or the material supplier in that section. If both a force provider and the material supplier are available, the
material supplier has priority.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 143
 7/10/2024
Initial supply without an operation or exercise assignment

The force element is not assigned to an operation or exercise. In this case, the system determines the suppliers on the
basis of the supply relationships for the force element awaiting the initial supplies.

Alternative Supplier Determination for an Operation or Exercise Assignment

Even if the force element is assigned to an operation or exercise by an operation or exercise assignment, the initial supply can
take place using the supply relationships for the force element awaiting the initial supplies. In this case, you select Stockholding
by Supplier (2) when initially supplying a force element.

When a force element with an operation or exercise assignment is initially supplied and this indicator Stockholding by Force
Element to Which FMPO is Assigned (1) is selected, the supplier is also determined based on the supply relationships for the
force element. The system ignores the assigned supply relationships for the initial supplier of the material and the force
provider in this case. This means that the supplier is determined as if an operation or exercise assignment did not exist. If an
operation or exercise assignment does not exist, this indicator has no effect.

Prerequisites
You have de ned material assignments for the force element in question and created the necessary material master data. You
have entered the force element master data for the provisions MRP area. (Exception: All material assignments are indicated as
being held in stock by the supplier.) Note that only material assignments with the Active status and with the initial supply
relevance are observed by the system here.

You have assigned the material assignments to a force element and you have set the initial supply in the assignment to either
Stockholding by Force Element to Which FMPO is Assigned (1) or Stockholding by Supplier (2). Only these two settings are
observed in the initial supply run. The default setting in the assignment is Not Relevant for Initial Supply. You have to explicitly
select options 1 or 2 as being relevant for the initial supply.

In the operation assignment, you have entered a force provider and/or a material supplier. The force element is active.

You have ensured that the supplier has a provisions MRP area with a storage location.

Features
The system uses the following rules to determine the supply relationship for a material:

The system determines the valid supply relationship for each provisions material that is to be procured. If an operation or
exercise is not involved, the supply relationships are derived from the force element awaiting the initial supplies, sincea force
provider or material supplier is not available in such cases.

If the force element is related to an operation or exercise by an operation or exercise assignment, the supply relationships are
determined on the basis of the next chronological operational or exercise assignment.

If a force provider is assigned here, supply relationships are derived on the basis of this force provider. If a material supplier
exists, the supply relationships for the material supplier apply. If both a force provider and material supplier exist, the material
supplier has priority. For force elements with an operational or exercise assignment, you can also use the alternative supplier
determination process described above.

The force provider and material supplier do not provide the material itself, only their supply relationships.

If an operational or exercise assignment with the current date does not exist, the supply relationships and the material
assignments are speci ed on the key date on which the operation or exercise begins.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 144
 7/10/2024
In the case of material assignments that are held in stock by the supplier, the supply relationship is derived from the force
element to which the material assignments are assigned.

Initial supply is also possible for distributed materials management. Since the distributed materials management in a
distributed system landscape can only handle purchase orders that were converted from purchase requisitions, purchase
requisitions are created during the initial supply.

You can perform an initial supply run in the application Applications for Initial Supply .

You can also schedule this transaction as a job for background processing.

Initial Supply Status

Each material in the exible material planning objects (FMPOs) that has products as accompanying parts assignments assigned
to the force element, the FMPO that has products as accompanying parts assignments itself, and the force element all have an
initial supply status. The status informs you whether the initial supply:

Has been triggered completely ( purchase orders have already been generated)

Has been executed completely (a goods receipt posting has already been made)

The status is controlled at the following levels:

Force element level

Force element/material assignments level

Force element/material assignments/material level

Status Initial Supply Triggered

If the required initial supply quantity has been ordered completely, the status of a material is set to Initial Supply Triggered. This
quantity is calculated as follows:

Purchase order quantity = initial supply quantity - actual stock - on-order stock

Actual stock refers to the valuated, unrestricted-use stock. On-order stock refers to the total of all open purchase order
quantities for the material. You can override the calculation of the actual stock as required.

The status of the material assignments is set to Initial Supply Triggered only if all the materials assigned to the material
assignments also have this status. A force element is not assigned this status unless all the material assignments have this
status.

Status Initial Supply Completed

A material has been initially supplied when the actual stock is greater than or equal to the initial supply quantity. The on-order
stock is not taken into account.

The status of material assignments is not set to Initial Supply Completed unless all the materials assigned to the material
assignments also have this status.

A force element is not assigned this status unless all the material assignments have this status.

Status Changes

If new materials are assigned to material assignments, or materials are deleted from such an material assignment, the
following applies:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 145
 7/10/2024
If new accompanying parts are added, this is not re ected in the existing assignments. You need to delimit the existing
assignment and create a new assignment. The new assignment containsall new accompanying parts products. There is no
option to refresh an existing assignment.

If materials are deleted from an material assignments, the system checks whether all the remaining materials have the same
status and the FMPO retains one of the two statuses. If this is the case, the status of the material assignments is set to Initial
Supply Triggered or Initial Supply Completed.

The system also has to check whether the status can also be set for the force elements to which the material assignments are
assigned.

Material Assignments Held in Stock by the Supplier

Material assignments held in stock by the supplier are taken into account when the supplier receives initial supplies.

The following applies to material assignments that are held in stock by the supplier:

The order quantity is calculated statistically from the initial supply quantity in the material assignments, without taking into
account the actual stock or on-order stock.

The full initial supply quantity amount can only be ordered for materials in the material assignments. Partial quantities are not
allowed here.

This function can also be used to provide initial supplies to force elements that do not have an MRP area.

FMPOs/products held in stock by the force element awaiting initial supplies

FE = Force element

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 146
 7/10/2024

FMPOs/products held in stock by the supplier of the force element

FE = Force element

Applications for Initial Supply

App ID: DFS_INITIAL_SUPPLY

Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage Initial Supplies for the Material (DFS_INITIAL_SUPPLY)

Display the Initial Supply Status for the Force Element (DFS_INITIAL_SUPPLY_D)

Display Initial and Subsequent Supply (DFS_INIT_SUP_SUB_D)

Manage Initial Supplies for the Material

You can use this app to generate purchase requisitions or orders for the consumables that are assigned to your force elements.
The initial supply quantity de ned, the stock situation and your supply structures are observed during generation. The
consumables can be direct product assignments and/or accompanying parts.

Key Features

You can use this app to:

Generate purchase requisitions and/or orders for your initial consumables requirements for usage type-dependent force
elements or structures.

Initially execute the supply that can be based on the valid supply relationships or the force provider de nitions.

Test the assignments for which initial requirements can be generated or get a detailed overview of potential issues by
using the test mode.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 147
 7/10/2024
Repeat the initial supply run if new assignments are added to the force elements or structures or existing ones are
changed.

Get a detailed overview of any issues that occur during the initial supply run.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Rerun of Initial Supply

When the initial supply run is executed, it sets the initial supply status to Executed. It remains in status Executed even if you
change the assignment status. If you add new assignments, the initial supply status is not on Executed and then is being set by
rerunning the initial supply for the same force element.

Display the Initial Supply Status for the Force Element

App ID: DFS_INITIAL_SUPPLY_D

You can use this app to verify the initial supply status of a force element either before you run the initial supply or after. The
initial status provides a clear overview at which level and for which assignment the run was executed successfully. You can also
use the long text to identify the cause of any errors.

Key Features

You can use this app to:

Display the initial supply status for each force element at the rst level.

Display the FMPO or product assignment's initial supply status at the second level.

Display the materials, the accompanying parts for the assigned FMPOs, and its initial supply status at the lowest level.

Get a detailed overview of initial supply logs for further investigation.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Display Initial and Subsequent Supply

App ID: DFS_INIT_SUP_SUB_D

You can use this app to display the material situation for the initial supply-relevant items for your force element and
substructure.

Key Features

You can use this app to:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 148
 7/10/2024
Display the stock situation for each force element or its sub-levels.

Display initial supply requests for each force element or its sub-levels.

Display replenishment elements for each force element or its sub-levels.

Display reorder levels for each force element or its sub-levels.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Requirement Prioritization

Use
The following functions in the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution have been added to the standard functions available
in the Materials Management component for requirement prioritization:

De nition of the organizational priority of a force element

Prioritized materials planning

Integration
The following graphic illustrates the overall relationship between priorities:

Overview of requirement prioritization

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 149
 7/10/2024
The connection of the force elements to the standard functions is achieved using the plant/storage-location combination of the
requesting force element.

Prerequisites
You are familiar with requirement prioritization. For more information, see:

Requirement Prioritization under Source and Procurement Further Functions

in Customizing under Materials Management General Settings for Materials Management Requirement
Prioritization

Features
The following component-speci c functions are available:

Organizational priority of a force element

The organizational priority determines what priority a force element has when determining material requirements.

You can manually assign the organizational priority to a force element (with MRP area) on the Logistics facet in the force
element app. The system determines the organizational priority in the documents on the basis of the receiving storage location
(and therefore the receiving force element).

To do so, you de ne the desired values for the organizational priority in Customizing by choosing Materials Management
General Settings for Materials Management Requirement Prioritization De ne Organizational Priorities .

Manual Customizing entries for prioritizing storage locations (Customizing activity Assign Plants and Storage Locations) are
not required. If an organizational priority has already been assigned to the force element, the system makes the plant/storage
location assignment automatically when a force element is activated.

For more information about prioritized materials planning, see prioritized materials planning batch control and prioritized
materials planning user control.

Process Prioritized Material Planning in the Background

App ID: DFS_PRPLB

You can continue to process purchase requisitions with different classi cations systematically using batch control. Prioritization
of requirements produces these purchase requisitions in the system.

Alternatively, you can continue processing using user control.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Perform an availability check, if required by the document type.

Change the supplier to trigger the requirement to be forwarded

Trigger the requirement to be forwarded to the next logistics level

Create deliveries

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 150
 7/10/2024

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Prerequisites
You have made the required settings in Customizing for Defense & Security by choosing Materials Management
Requirement Prioritization Prioritized Materials Planning .

Features
In the case of batch processing, the system performs the following actions in accordance with the settings made in Customizing:

It performs an availability check, if required by the document type.

It can change the supplier to trigger the requirement to be forwarded.

It can trigger the requirement to be forwarded to the next logistics level.

It can create deliveries.

You can perform the process with or without work ow control.

Activities
1. Start the application Background Processing of Prioritized Materials Planning (DFS_PRPLB).

The selection screen with the same name appears.

2. Make the required selection settings.

If you select the High-Priority Requirements indicator, the system selects all purchase requisitions with the requirement
priorities de ned in Customizing. This results in the following:

a. If you are working with the release procedure for purchase requisitions, the system only observes released open
purchase requisitions. See also Customizing for Materials Management under Purchasing Purchase
Requisition Release Procedure . Otherwise, the system selects all open purchase requisitions.

b. The system does not select any reservations.

c. The system does not perform rescheduling.

In the Reqmt Priority elds, you can specify a subset of the value range de ned in Customizing.

If you make entries in the advice code elds, the system only processes the purchase requisitions that contain the
speci ed advice codes.

3. Choose Execute.

The system starts processing the purchase requisitions in accordance with the settings made in Customizing.

Manage Prioritized Material Planning

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 151
 7/10/2024
App ID: DFS_PRPLD

You can use this app to process purchase requisitions with a high priority and to perform processing yourself. Prioritization of
requirements results in purchase requisitions with different classi cations in the system.

Alternatively, you can use batch control.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Process purchase requisitions from a worklist

Structure the selection of the documents to be processed

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Prerequisites
You have made the required settings in Customizing for Defense & Security, under Materials Management Requirement
Prioritization Prioritized Materials Planning .

Features
You can execute the process with or without work ow control.

Selection

The screen Prioritized Material Planning is available for selection purposes. Based on your entries, the system creates a
worklist that is used to process the purchase requisitions. This enables you to easily structure the selection of documents to be
processed.

Quick Selection area

You can make a quick selection based on the following properties:

If you select the High-Priority Reqs Only indicator, the system selects all purchase requisitions with the
requirement priorities de ned in Customizing.

If you select the Manual Advice Codes Only indicator, the system only selects those purchase requisitions that
have an advice code for manual processing of the purchase requisition.

Worklist area

You can specify whether you want the system to process purchase requisitions, purchase orders, or reservations from
the worklist.

You can delimit the delivery date and the selection at material level.

Supplier tab page

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 152
 7/10/2024
You use the Return Delivery View indicator for return deliveries. The entries in the following elds represent the recipient
data. These are the same entries as those found on the Recipient tab page. Selecting this indicator means you do not
have to make any entries on the Recipient tab page.

Recipient tab page

You can select the plant, storage location, and MRP area for the receiving force element.

If the Return Delivery View indicator is selected on the Supplier tab page, the system interprets the entries made here
as supplier data.

Purchase Requisition tab page

You can do the following:

Specify which document types are to be processed by the system

Delimit the MRP controllers

Delimit the purchase requisitions to be processed

Make entries in the Reqmt Priority elds to select a partial quantity from the value range de ned in Customizing

Make entries in the Advice Code elds to restrict the document selection to documents with the relevant advice
code

PO tab page

You can delimit the document selection from a purchasing perspective.

Reservation tab page

You can specify the type of reservations you want to process and whether forwarded reservations are to be taken into
account.

Navigation

You can navigate from the Prioritized Materials Planning screen to the following areas:

Stock overview

Availability overview

Stock/requirements list

List of purchase requisitions

Purchase orders for purchase requisition items

Application log for document

Document linking

Processing Functions

Purchase requisitions can be processed on the Prioritized Materials Planning screen, using various buttons for the following
functions:

Purchase Requisition tab page

Rescheduling

Initiates rescheduling for the material of a selected purchase requisition.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 153
 7/10/2024
Prioritized Processing (Prioritized PReq Processing)

Initiates the automatic conversion of a purchase requisition to a purchase order, taking into account the follow-on
functions de ned in Customizing.

Release

Releases the purchase requisition.

Create Purchase Order

Starts the transaction ME21N.

PO tab page

Create Deliv.

Initiates the automatic conversion of the purchase order to a delivery.

Reservations tab page

Pick List

Initiates the automatic creation of the pick list.

Prioritized Processing (Forward PReq to Reserv. List)

Forwards uncon rmed reservation quantities to the next highest logistics level by creating a purchasing
requisition.

Activities
1. Start the Manage Prioritized Material Planning app.

The Prioritized Material Planning screen appears.

2. Make the required selection settings.

3. Choose Execute.

The Prioritized Materials Planning screen appears with a requisition list.

4. Edit the purchase requisitions as required.

External Batch Management

Use
The use of batches plays a central role in the monitoring and tracking of materials.

The batch where-used list ful ls the legal and technical requirements in terms of full veri cation of the composition and origin of
materials. At the same time, certain materials also have to be accounted for right through to the consumer. Not only is this
legally required for certain materials, in some cases it is also desirable.

The information required here is transferred in the delivery note and entered. The representation is not explicitly dependent on
the manufacturer. A simple bill of material for the material is used as a basis for the input screen.

As far as ammunition is concerned, for example, it is essential that only ammunition that is safe, effective, and functional is
used. This means that information about which ammunition is/was used where, and where it is stored must be available at any

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 154
 7/10/2024
time. Ammunition monitoring must ensure that changes to ammunition are recognized in time and the required measures
initiated (such as a block).

In the medical corps, it must be possible to trace medicines that require documentation (according to the transfusion law) right
through to the patient. In the case of other materials, the material or batch in question must be tracked right through to the
end consumer (such as avgas).

Features
The following functions are available:

Batch number assignment

You use this function to assign a number to the batch to identify it uniquely.

Batch speci cation

You use this function to describe each batch uniquely using characteristics and characteristic values. You de ne the
allowed range of values in the assigned material master record.

Batch status management

You use this function to indicate whether a batch is suitable for use. You set the status

Manually in the batch master record, or when the goods are received

Automatically in the usage decision in Quality Management

Batch determination

You can use this function to nd batches in stock that satisfy various criteria, such as:

For goods issue postings

When combining suitable material components for production and process orders

When creating a delivery according to certain customer requirements

Batch where-used list

The batch where-used list shows the path that a batch has taken from the procurement stage right through to its
delivery to the customer.

Item split

In a delivery item split, a different batch can be assigned to each split item. The relevant external batch number is
entered for each of these delivery item batches.

Bill of material

This function is a prerequisite for the use of the Load BOM as Template function.

Apps for External Batch Usage

You can use the following apps:

Create External Batch Usage (/ISDFPS/EXT_BATCHES)

You can use this app to create and change external operation batches for materials.

Display External Batch Usage (/ISDFPS/EXT_BATCHES3)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 155
 7/10/2024
You can use this app to display assignments that exist in the system.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation External Batch Management.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Relocation of Material

Use
In this context, relocation involves relocating stock and provisions as part of an operation or exercise.

To provide material for the operation or exercise areas, you can relocate material to these areas using relocation project plans.

Relocation Process
The relocation process has four steps:

Creating a Project De nition

Project Assignment to Force Element

Relocation Allocation

Inventory Management and or Transportation Management

In the rst step Creating a Project De nition, you de ne your relocation project with its steps and cost elements. You can de ne
different dates for each of these. This can be done in the SAP Project System.

Once you have released your relocation project, you assign it to the involved force elements. This is the second step Project
Assignment to Force Element.

The third step Relocation Allocation has three levels:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 156
 7/10/2024

Level 1 shows the relocation structure. The WBS elements are pulled from the relocation project if the Project Type is set to
Relocation Step/Cost in SAP Project System and are shown in a Gantt chart. This level is performed in the Plan Project Steps
app, which displays the Gantt chart overview.

Level 2 represents the relocation planning of material on the basis of your existing force element assignments and stock.
Therefore, you rst create the initial relocation plan in the background before the actual planning takes place. This is performed
for authorized material in the Relocate Authorized Materials app, for stock materials in the Relocate Stock Materials app. Once
this has been done, the planning is synchronized.

You can also perform a mass upload for this level.

At level 3, you generate the follow-on documents that you hand over to inventory management and or transport management
in the fourth step.

The relocation process is not a rigid step-by-step process. Therefore, you can return to earlier steps if necessary.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the relocation of materials in the following SAP Fiori apps:

Relocate Authorized Materials

Relocate Stock Materials

Synchronize Authorized Materials with Relocation Steps

Synchronize Stock Materials with Relocation Steps

Create Purchase Requisitions in Relocation Projects

Create Purchase Requisition for Relocation in Storage Location

Prerequisites
You have created and released a relocation project and a force element to which the respective WBS elements and authorized
material are assigned.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 157
 7/10/2024

Features
You use the Relocate Authorized Materials app to relocate authorized materials at exible material planning object (FMPO)
and model level.

The type of logistics follow-on documents can be customized individually. Three default options are provided:

Own Stock

Internal Supply

External Supply

Individual types of follow-on document types can be maintained and executed for all three options by selecting the function
Create PR. The Create PR dialog box needs to be populated accordingly. Alternatively, you can trigger the creation of purchase
requisitions from the Gantt chart overview by selecting the function Create Purchase Requisition. It then creates a purchase
requisition at model and or accompanying part level for all line items that have a material document quantity and an assigned
material document type.

Relocation Planning According to Relocation Step Type

Different types of relocations are supported:

Own Stock

A force element is relocated and transports its materials itself. Therefore, the materials do not have to be transferred to
the target location again. The supplying storage location and the receiving storage location are identical. The supplying
storage location and force element logistical data maintained are used for both the receiving and supplying storage
location.

The system creates transport orders to create the papers required for transportation according to the Customizing
settings that have been made.

Internal Supply

An alternative force element and or an alternative storage location can provide the materials.

The system creates purchase requisitions according to the Customizing settings that have been made.

External Supply

The materials are transported by external transport capacities that do not belong to the force element.

Notes

The material document type determines the follow-on document type.

The issuing plant and storage location are determined from the supply relationships. The delivery date is the
commander’s required date (CRD) from the assignment of the relocation/relocation step to the force element.

The delivery address (goods recipient) is de ned in the force element and has a validity period.

When the logistics follow-on document is created, the address that is valid for the delivery date is used.

Plan Project Steps

App ID: F5745

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 158
 7/10/2024
Relocation projects of any size require precise planning of all associated activities. The relocation project manager must ensure
that the project is executed efficiently, on time and within budget. Such relocation or deployment projects can be de ned using
the SAP Project System, which provides both a exible and comprehensive means of combining organization-relevant tasks
with the material relocation steps. The force element exercise, operation or training duration needs to be aligned with the
relocation project duration. The material-relevant relocation steps need to be highlighted in the project de nition.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Integration between Project System (PS) and D&S

Monitor all aspects of your relocation-relevant project steps

Structure the display of your relocation project steps using the work breakdown structure (WBS)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
Released relocation projects are displayed in a list in the Relocate Authorized Materials and Relocate Stock Materials apps.
You can de ne a custom view and save this. However, you can only access this in the view in which you created it.

Structure
The object page for the relocation project has a header section and the facet Relocation Structure, which displays the
relocation-relevant steps in a table and chart overview known as a Gantt chart display.

Prerequisite
You must rst de ne the relocation-relevant project pro les in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational
Flexibility Relocation Planning De ne Relocation Relevant Project Pro les . The systm only displays the project pro les
you de ne here in the list of projects.

WBS elements are pulled from the relocation project if the Project Type is set to Relocation Step/Cost in the SAP Project
System and are shown in a Gantt chart.

 Note
You assign a WBS element to the Relocation Step, or Cost project pro le or to both.

For more information about the SAP Project System please see Project System (PS).

For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a relocation project using the elds at the top of the initial screen.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 159
 7/10/2024
You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating a Relocation Project

Note that you do not create relocation projects in this app. You create them in the standard SAP Project System, where the
project is then available once it has been released.

You can plan authorized materials for each relocation project if you assign the project to the force element structure.

Relocation Project Structure (Level 1)

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded in the relocation structure. You nd this information in the header and
on the Relocation Structure facet.

Header
The header shows the key information about a relocation project.

Relocation Structure
The Relocation Milestones facet is a read-only facet. The system pulls all visible information from the relocation project you
have created and released.

The work breakdown structure elements (WBS elements) that you created in your relocation project are listed here with their
structure and their start and end dates.

 Note
You assign a WBS element to the Relocation Step, or Cost project pro le or to both.

A Gantt chart shows the relocation objects in a time context.

Choose Plan Authorized Material to retrieve the relocation plan for the authorized material assignments. The system takes you
to level 2. From the WBS Element Assigned to Force Element screen, select the force element and usage type and select the
hierarchy if stock exists. If you choose View Step Plan, the system takes you to the object page for level 2 if an initial relocation
plan has been created.

Prerequisite for the View Step Plan Action Button

To plan both authorized material and stock material, you need to create the initial relocation plan using either the transaction
Synchronize Authorized Materials with Relocation Steps or Synchronize Stock Materials with Relocation Steps. Then you can
choose Plan Authorized Material or Plan Stock Material to retrieve the relocation plan.

Choose Create Purchase Requisition to create multiple purchase requisitions for those relocation plans that are created in
both the Relocate Authorized Materials and Relocate Stock Materials apps. This is level 3 where purchase requisitions are
generated directly in the background.

Planning the authorized material (level 2) can take place in three ways:

1. Initial step planning

2. Iterative step planning

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 160
 7/10/2024
3. No relocation plan is available for the selected force element. Please create the initial plan from Synchronize Authorized
Materials in Relocation Projects. No step planning is possible here.

Scenario 1 occurs when you plan the authorized material for a force element and a usage for the rst time and you excluded
FMPOs from the initial creation. The deselected FMPO assignments are retrieved automatically to ensure that all relocation-
relevant FMPOs are planned. The object page for level 2 opens in the edit mode, so you can make further settings directly and
then save.

 Note
The full authorized quantity is assigned to the default and/or rst step of the relocation project. You can change this in
scenarios 1 and 2. During step planning, you can split the adjusted authorized quantity into different steps that can have
different end dates and therefore different delivery dates.

If you have already planned authorized materials, scenario 2 takes place. The object page for level 2 opens in the read-only
mode, and you can continue working.

Scenario 3 is an error message reminding the user that no initial relocation plan has been created. The log for the initial
relocation creation is displayed if creation was successful. If this is not the case, the message No valid FMPO assignments
available for project XXXX FE XXX is displayed. This message indicates that assignments with a usage type are not available
and or valid during the time frame for the relocation project. You need to verify the duration of the default relocation step
selected and check whether assignments exist for this same time period.

Related Information
Plan Project Steps

Relocate Authorized Materials

App ID: F5743

Relocate Authorized Materials supports the detailed planning process for authorized materials that are required for a speci c
operation or movement. The relocation projects created are combined with force element structures to reuse the preplanned
assignments. This foundation enables the required authorized materials to be scheduled for relocation for a de ned date and
quantity. Even the consumption of original authorized materials can be in uenced by selecting the material document type
accordingly. This enables you to perform nite planning at material level for each step quantity and material document type.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

List the released relocation projects that are linked to a force element structure.

See the Gantt chart overview of the relocation project created.

Retrieve the authorized materials assignments that were preplanned in the force element structure.

Determine nitely authorized quantities for a relocation project step.

Flexibly map the material document type to each relocation project step.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 161
 7/10/2024
Tablet

Smartphone

View
Relocation projects are displayed in a list when you open the app. You can de ne a custom view and save this. However, you can
only access this in the view in which you created it.

Structure
The relocation allocation has a three-level structure:

Relocation Project Structure (Level 1)

Step Plan for Authorized Materials (Level 2)

Plan Authorized Materials (Level 3)

The relocation project structure is shown in the object page of the Plan Project Steps app.

The object page for level 1 has a header section and the facet Relocation Structure with a Gantt chart as an overview.

The object page for level 2 has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it, which show different
information about it. The structure of level 2 plan materials is de ned as follows:

Flexible Material Planning Objects

FMPO Assignments

Step Overview

The object page for level 3 has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it, which show different
information about it. The structure of level 3 plan materials is de ned as follows:

Models

Accompanying Parts Models

Accompanying Parts Products

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Plan Authorized Materials

Note that you do not create relocation projects in this app. You create them in the standard SAP Project System, where the
project is then available in the list view once it has been released.

You can plan authorized materials for each relocation project if you assign the project to the force element structure. They are
only displayed on the dialog screen after you do this.

Step Plan for Authorized Materials (Level 2)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 162
 7/10/2024
This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for relocation planning of authorized materials.

Header
The header shows the key information about the step plan for authorized materials. This includes the duration of the project
with the start and end date that is displayed for the force element and usage type.

Flexible Material Planning Objects

The active material assignments for the force element are collected here. You can check and split the quantities between steps.
This level is used to pre-plan a relocation. The adjusted authorized quantity is automatically assigned to your default and/or
rst relocation step. The split into multiple steps is not mandatory and is dependent on the required delivery date of the
authorized materials for a relocation project.

The column Step represents the WBS elements you nd in the Gantt chart on the object page for level 1. You can change the
step and the quantity in the edit mode for the entire list display.

Choose Add Quantity to Step to add a quantity for a exible material planning object (FMPO) to another step in your relocation
step. You can split the adjusted quantity between multiple steps here.

ChooseDelete Step to remove one of the multiple steps that is available for a single FMPO. One assignment between the
adjusted authorized quantity, step and step quantity must remain to ensure that the authorized quantity is covered.

When you click the step, the system takes you to level 3.

FMPO Assignments
The table on the FMPO Assignments facet lists all accompanying parts. Both accompanying parts - FMPOs and products - are
shown here. These are pulled from the FMPOs and you can see them on the FMPO facet.

Step Overview
This read-only facet contains the second-level objects with their start and end date.

The order is the same as the one you see in the Gantt chart.

Note that lower-level WBS elements in the relocation project are not shown here.

Related Information
Relocate Authorized Materials

Plan Authorized Materials (Level 3)

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a WBS element.

This object page (level 3) pulls additional information from the actual/authorized comparison. It gives you an overview of the
available quantity for a exible material planning object (FMPO), and of how much has been ordered and/or requested.

Header

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 163
 7/10/2024
The header shows the key information about planning for a relocation step.

Models
An FMPO can have multiple models. This means that the actual quantity that is available on the list page represents the total
actual quantity for that FMPO taking all models into account. The system displays the actual quantity, the ordered quantity and
the requested quantity for each of the models that exist within the FMPO on the Models facet. The full step quantity for level 2
is automatically assigned to the defaulted model of the FMPO, material document quantity and material documents type Own
Stock.

Choose Add Quantity to the Document Type to add a quantity of a product, which is dependent on the material document type,
to your relocation step. You can create any purchase requisitions required on the basis of this quantity.

 Note
A link to material documents is provided if the role SAP_BR_PRODN_PLNR is assigned to you.

Be aware that the Cost Element can differ from the step. It depends on the setting you have made in the relocation project.

For more information about models, see Models.

Accompanying Parts Models

Accompanying parts, which are also exible material planning objects (FMPOs), are already listed on the list page with the
comparison results. However, the accompanying part - relationship between FMPOs is not displayed. You see that information
on the Accompanying Parts – FMPOs facet.

Choose Add Quantity to the Document Type to add a quantity of a product, which is dependent on the material document type,
to your relocation step. You can create any purchase requisitions required on the basis of this quantity.

Accompanying Parts Products

You can use products and their corresponding initial supply quantities and reorder points for planning purposes, and to supply
individual and bulk consumable goods.

An FMPO can have multiple accompanying parts products. This means that the actual quantity that is available on the list page
represents the total actual quantity for that product. The system displays the actual quantity, the ordered quantity and the
requested quantity for each of the products that exist within the FMPO.

Choose Add Quantity to the Document Type to add a quantity of a product, which is dependent on the material document type,
to your relocation step. You can create any purchase requisitions required on the basis of this quantity.

 Note
A link to material documents is provided if the role SAP_BR_PRODN_PLNR is assigned to you.

Be aware that the cost element can differ from the step. It depends on the setting you have made in the relocation project.

For more information about accompanying parts, see Accompanying Parts.

Related Information
Relocate Authorized Materials

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 164
 7/10/2024

Relocate Stock Materials

App ID: F5744

You can use this app to determine the current material situation for the MRP area provision, stock and infrastructure of a force
element and or structure. The unrestricted use stock quantity is automatically assigned to the defaulted step quantity with the
material document type Own Stock. If required, the receiving force element can be changed.

Prerequisite
Initial creation of the relocation has been performed either at force element and/or structure level. The usage type is only
relevant for the force element structure, and not for stock, since it is dependent on the usage type.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Complete the material situation for the force element that is relocated or deployed.

Splitting the unrestricted use of stock into multiple steps if required.

Changing the receiving force elements since supplying and receiving can involve different materials.

Automatically assign unrestricted use stock to the default step. Following the initial creation and after viewing the
output in the Relocate Stock Materials app, this input can immediately be used in the background creation of purchase
requisitions.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
The relocation allocation has a three-level structure:

Relocation Project Structure (Level 1)

Step Plan for Authorized Materials (Level 2)

Plan Authorized Materials (Level 3)

The relocation project structure is shown in the object page for the Plan Project Steps app.

The object page for level 1 has a header section and the facet Relocation Structure with a Gantt chart as an overview.

The object page for level 2 has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it, which show different
information about it. The structure of level 2 plan materials is de ned as follows:

Materials

Step Overview

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 165
 7/10/2024

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Step Plan for Stock Materials (Level 2)

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for planning stock materials.

Header
The header shows the key information about the step plan for stock materials.

 Note
If the force element structure is included, the Hierarchy and Usage Type elds in the header contain entries.

Materials
All materials for a force element and/or structure that are available for the force element's plant, MRP area stock, provision
and infrastructure, and storage location are listed. The relevant logistical data is retrieved from the force element. The material
situation highlights the unrestricted use stock, the blocked stock, stock in quality, restricted use stock, stock in transit, ordered
quantity and requested quantity.

If no stock is available at any of the storage locations, a message is displayed saying ʻNo items available even if an initial
relocation plan is created', and the stock situation only is displayed here.

The column Step represents the WBS elements you nd in the Gantt chart on the object page for level 1. You can change the
step quantity in the edit mode. The steps that are available in the dropdown list are dependent on the project type de nition.
Only those that are relevant for a step, step quantity and cost element are displayed here.

You can change the receiving options in the edit mode by changing the force element, plant and storage location.

Choose Add Quantity to Step to split the unrestricted stock quantity that is automatically assigned to the step quantity into
step portions.

Step Overview
This read-only facet contains the second-level objects with their start and end date.

The order is the same as the one you see in the Gantt chart.

Note that lower-level WBS elements in the relocation project are not shown here.

Related Information
Relocate Stock Materials

Relocation Support
Please nd information about the following apps below:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 166
 7/10/2024
Synchronize Authorized Materials with Relocation Steps (DFS_RELOC_AUTHZDSYNC)

Synchronize Stock Materials with Relocation Steps (DFS_RELOC_STOCKSYNC)

Create Purchase Requisitions in Relocation Projects (DFS_RELOC_PRGNRTN)

Create Purchase Requisition for Relocation in Storage Location (DFS_RELOC_SL_PRGNRTN)

Synchronize Authorized Materials with Relocation Steps

App ID: DFS_RELOC_AUTHZDSYNC

The foundation of the relocation plan for authorized materials are the assignments of a speci c usage type to a force element
structure.

You can use this application for the initial creation of a relocation plan and to determine whether assignments have been
changed. The initial creation is a prerequisite for the Relocate Authorized Materials app. After that, changes to the assignment
need to be regularly incorporated into the relocation plan. They are either re ected in the relocation plan FMPO status
assignment or are directly updated as is also the case for changes to the authorized quantity.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Create an initial relocation plan on the basis of authorized assignments to a force element structure

Identify changes to material assignments

Create an initial plan for a speci c force element

Update automatically changed material assignments to a speci c force element in the relocation plan

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Use

The initial plan retrieves those assignments that have failed for the overall project duration and validates whether they are also
valid for your selected default step. The overall project duration should be the same as the relocation period for the operation
and or exercise. Additional selection parameters, such as the defaulted step are also available to narrow down the relocation
plan for a speci c subset of assignments to a speci c step. The excluded selections of assignments are retrieved automatically
after opening the Relocate Authorized Materials app directly. They are now not assigned to the previous selected default step
but to the rst WBS element that is relevant to the step.

During the regular synchronization of the relocation plan, any assignments added are automatically assigned to the rst
relocation step of your projects. If the force element assignments are removed or have been deactivated, they are highlighted
in the relocation plan FMPO assignment status. Now it is up to the user to check whether purchase requisitions have already
been created.

In general, the adjusted authorized quantity is the same as the step quantity during either the initial and or the regular
incorporation of changes.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 167
 7/10/2024

Synchronize Stock Materials with Relocation Steps

App ID: DFS_RELOC_STOCKSYNC

You can use this application to create the initial relocation plan for those materials that are available in the storage location in
the MRP area of the selected force element structure and to update the materials that have been added to or removed from
that storage location. Initial creation is a prerequisite for the Relocate Stock Materials app. Once this has been done, changes
to the combination of the material and storage location need to be regularly incorporated into the relocation plan.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Create an initial relocation plan based on user-de ned selection criteria that can be viewed in the Relocate Stock
Materials app

Identify materials that are added or removed from the storage location.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Use

The initial creation can be performed for a speci c relocation project that is assigned to multiple force elements and structures.
If the relocation project contains parallel steps, the user can de ne the default step to which the stock quantity is automatically
assigned. The initial relocation plan is either created for a force element or its structure. Viewing the relocation plan in the
Relocate Stock Materials app automatically retrieves the deselected materials.

The regular updates only retrieve any materials that are added to the storage location or removed from it. The stock quantities
are always the actual quantities.

Create Purchase Requisitions in Relocation Projects

App ID: DFS_RELOC_PRGNRTN

You can use this application to create multiple purchase requisitions for relocation plans that are created in both the Relocate
Authorized Materials and Relocate Stock Materials apps.

You can also create these independently.

Key Features

You can use this transaction to do the following:

Create purchase requisitions for multiple relocation projects and force elements

Select criterias to specify the step and relocation app for which purchase requisitions should be created.

Execute the purchase requisition creation process for the Relocate Authorized Materials and Relocate Stock Materials
apps. It supports mass creation of purchase requisitions and can also be run in the background on a regular basis.

Supported Device Types

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 168
 7/10/2024
Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Prerequisite

In the Relocate Authorized Materials app, quantities and material document types need to be de ned at the level of the models
and accompanying parts. In the Relocate Stock Materials app, step quantities need to be assigned.

 Note
This functionality is also incorporated in the Gantt chart view for both the Relocate Authorized Materials and Relocate
Stock Materials apps.

Create Purchase Requisition for Relocation in Storage Location

App ID: DFS_RELOC_SL_PRGNRTN

You can use this application to create relocation purchase requisitions between any locations. This application is a mass upload
of materials from and to a desired location. This exible tool based on a CSV le supports the unplanned and fast movement of
materials that are required for operation. Purchase requisitions can be created at any time independently of the authorized
material planning and or stock material planning.

Key Features

You can use this transaction to do the following:

Create purchase requisitions that are required for a relocation on the y (deployment)

Create relocation purchase requisitions from anywhere to anywhere based on an excel upload procedure

Test and validate the correctness of the excel datasheet versus the master data set up in the system to ensure the
relocation purchase requisition is correct.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Purpose

This program executes a mass relocation purchase requisition upload from a CSV le.

Only relocation-relevant purchase requisitions can be uploaded, which means that they should have a relocation step/cost
element assignment as a minimum.

Validations that are performed during the test mode and execution are:

Duplication check; a check is performed on the excel records for duplicate rows.

Receiving and supplying force element check; The plant and storage location are validated on the basis of the force
element

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 169
 7/10/2024
Step and cost element check; do they belong to the same project and has the project pro le been released for
relocation.

Integration

The log is stored and can be viewed using the transaction SLG1, Object ʻDEFENSE’ subobject ʻRELOC_PR_GNRTN’.

Prerequisites

Download the CSV template for the corresponding release from note 3217591 .

The system validates the relocation-relevant project pro les. You de ne the relocation-relevant project pro les in Customizing
under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Relocation Planning De ne Relocation-Relevant Project Pro les .

Selection

Select: Choose the CSV template.

Output

A log le is displayed, which contains information, errors and success messages.

Execute Transfer Posting for Relocation Project Stock

App ID: DFS_RELOC_TRANS_POST

You can use this app to easily transfer posting of materials from unrestricted stock into project stock by identifying the relevant
outbound delivery. Later it is also possible to transfer materials back to freely available unrestricted stock. Relocation-related
stock transfer requisitions, orders, and deliveries can be created using the relocation apps. During the picking process of an
outbound delivery, the materials to be delivered must exist in the project stock. Otherwise, the picking of materials is not
possible.

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Select the direction of transfer posting, either from unrestricted stock to project stock or vice versa.

Search the outbound deliveries by WBS element, plant, storage location, or outbound delivery number. Or exclude
deliveries without enough stock from the hit list.

Search the project stock by WBS element, plant, or storage location.

Simulate or check the transfer posting before the actual posting with simulated error log.

Execute the transfer posting with success messages, information about created material documents and logs, either for
single or multiple items.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 170
 7/10/2024

Materials Allowance
This topic describes the materials allowance and how it is implemented in the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution.

De nition
The materials allowance is a preliminary planning process used to assign force elements and materials. This process takes place
before the actual planning starts.

Use
The materials allowance is a material quantity that is assigned to a force element. A material can be a exible material planning
object (FMPO) or a product. It can be provided on a periodical basis, such as for a calendar year, or can be provided for a speci c
service level, for example for an army, navy or air force.

The allowance process produces an assignment of a material to a force element, which is then displayed in the material facet in
the force element app. This type of assignment contains a link to the allowance plan from which it is created.

Allowance Process
The allowance process has three steps:

Request Material

Plan Material

Assign Material

In the rst step Request Material, the user can request a material quantity for a selected force element and any sub-levels that
it contains. The authorization restrictions mean that the user can only make requests for the force elements that they are
allowed to see. Quantities for these sub-level force elements are also summarized in the quantity for the higher level force
element. The allowance request can be used as a basis for an allowance plan. This step is performed in the Manage Allowance
Requests app.

The second step Plan Material involves creating an allowance plan for the organizational structure. The user plans how they
want to distribute the material to a force element during a speci c time period. This is also dependent on the authorization
restrictions for the user.

This enables the receiving force elements to determine in advance whether they can order sufficient material for each sub
structure to execute their tasks based on their capabilities. The allowance plan can only be used within the distributing force
element’s sub structure and not for other force elements beyond this sub structure.

Each level of the organizational structure can receive a materials allowance and is not obliged to distribute everything to lower
levels immediately. They can retain a reserve for future distribution, or for their own allocation.

The second step is performed in the Manage Allowance Plans app.

Once all quantities have been provided for the allowance plan, it is completed and you can set its status to complete. The
allowance plan requires the Approved status before the material can be assigned to the force element. This produces a
materials assignment in the force element apps (Manage Force Elements and Manage Force Elements - Material Planner). This
is the third step Assign Material in the allowance process.

SAP Fiori Apps

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 171
 7/10/2024
In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the materials allowance in the following two SAP Fiori apps:

Manage Allowance Requests

Manage Allowance Plans

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Manage Allowance Requests

App ID: F4661

You can use this app to request the generation of a force element structure for a speci c authorized planning object or material
for a de ned time period without in uencing the current force planning.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Name allowance requests without constraints

Flexibly maintain allowance request quantities based on the force element structure and its authorizations.

Use holistic time frames for the allowance request and the allowance plan.

De ne allowance quantities for exible material planning objects or products.

If required, convert allowance requests to allowance plans using a seamless integration.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
Allowance requests are displayed in a list when you open the app and choose Go. You can de ne a custom view and save this.

Note that the default view only displays allowance requests that have not yet been converted to an allowance plan.

Structure
An allowance request has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it, which show different
information about it. The structure of an allowance plan is de ned as follows:

General Information

Allowance Request Hierarchy

Comment

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 172
 7/10/2024
Administrative Information

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for an allowance request using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating an Allowance Request

Choose Create. The object page for the allowance request appears for editing.

Enter an ID for the allowance request. The allowance request ID can have a maximum of 30 characters and spaces.
Note that you must de ne this ID and this is not done by the system automatically.

Choose a usage type. You de ne usage types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Command and Support Relationships De ne Usage Types .

Enter the ID of the force element for which you want to request a material. You can use the value help to search for a
force element. If authorization restrictions apply, you can only search for force elements for which you have authorization.

 Note
When creating an allowance request, you cannot distribute a quantity for the selected material to a force element. You must
rst save the allowance request and then distribute the quantities.

Enter a due date up to which the allowance request can be updated. The due date for the allowance request must be earlier
than or the same day as the start date of the allowance plan. You enter the validity date of the allowance plan in the Plan Period
section if the user wants to create an allowance plan and plan the quantity for a speci c time period.

In the Base Type section, you de ne the material for which you want to request a quantity. You can choose a exible material
planning object (FMPO) or a product. You can only choose one variant for the FMPO.

To update an allowance request, open the object page in the edit mode. Note that you can update the allowance request until
the due date has been reached, or an allowance plan is created from an allowance request. Please be aware that several users
can work on the allowance plan in parallel. However, only one user can save their changes here.

Note that if you have the relevant authorizations, you can change and delete the allowance request after the due date.

Basic Information About an Allowance Request

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for an allowance request. You maintain this information in the header
and on the General Information, Allowance Request Hierarchy, Comment and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about an allowance request.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 173
 7/10/2024
You also see whether the allowance request has already been converted to an allowance plan. If No is displayed here, an
allowance plan has not been created from the allowance request and you can update the allowance request until the due date.
If Yes is displayed, the allowance request has been completed and an allowance plan based on the allowance request exists. You
now see details of the allowance plan in the Plan Information section of the General Information facet. The display changes
from No to Yes when you create a plan from a request.

 Note
The elds Request ID and Request Description are always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

General Information
In the Request Information section, you nd all general data for the allowance request. The force element for which you want to
request material is linked. If you click on the force element ID, you see which apps are available to you for processing the force
element.

In this section, you can also see the due date by which you must complete the allowance request. Once the due date has been
reached, you can no longer edit the allowance request. Note that if you have the relevant authorizations, you can edit and
delete an allowance request.

The Plan Information section is only displayed when an allowance plan is created from the allowance request. The allowance
plan is then linked.

Create Plan from Request

Click Create Plan from Request to create an allowance plan that is based on an allowance request. Please make sure that the
allowance request is completed before you create an allowance plan. You can no longer change the allowance request once an
allowance plan has been created on the basis of the allowance request.

 Note
The allowance plan created here is linked. If you click on the allowance plan ID, you see which apps are available to you for
processing the allowance plan.

If you create an allowance plan from an allowance request, the allowance plan does not contain any data. You must add or
change the Plan ID, Plan Description, Allowed Quantity and Level for Plan.

Allowance Request Hierarchy

The Allowance Request Hierarchy facet is only visible in the display and edit modes. It appears once an allowance request has
been created, meaning that a force element has been selected as a header element. This facet displays the selected force
element and all sub levels in a hierarchy in which you can de ne the requested quantity for each level. If an authorization
restriction applies, you can only request quantities for those force elements for which you have authorization.

A requested quantity is the quantity of the chosen material which you would like to have. However, there is no guarantee that
you will be allowed to use the requested quantity in the allowance process. The requested quantity incl. sub-levels represents
the quantity for the chosen material which the system automatically aggregates for the selected force element and its sub-
levels.

Comment
Any comments made are shown here. If you have created an allowance plan from the allowance request, the comments are not
transferred to the allowance plan.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 174
 7/10/2024

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Related Information
Manage Allowance Requests

Manage Allowance Plans

App ID: F4662

You can use this app to include the content of the allowance request in the allowance plan process. It is a preliminary planning
process for authorized materials or products, in which quantities are limited for force element structures for a de ned time
period. The result of the allowance plan can be viewed in the operational force planning process.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Name allowance plans without constraints

Allocate quantities on the basis of the force element structure and its authorizations

Reuse allowance request quantities for reference purposes if required

Plan exible and clear allowance plan time frames.

De ne allowance quantities for exible material planning objects or products

Display a transparent hierarchy of total allowance quantities compared with allocated quantities

Have a consistent status network between the allowance, assignment and exible material planning object

Integrate the allowance process in the force element structure assignments

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
Allowance plans are displayed in a list when you open the app. You can de ne a custom view and save this.

The list view can contain an allowance plan hierarchy. This hierarchy appears when you create follow-up allowance plans.

Note that the default view only displays allowance plans that have the Planned status.

Structure

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 175
 7/10/2024
An allowance plan has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it, which show different information
about it. The structure of an allowance plan is de ned as follows:

General Information

Allowance Plan Hierarchy

Comment

User Status

Administrative Information

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for an allowance plan using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating an Allowance Plan

When creating an allowance plan, you must rst decide whether you want to create a stand-alone allowance plan or one that is
based on an allowance request. You can only create an allowance plan based on an allowance request in the Manage Allowance
Requests app. For information about this type of creation, see Create Plan from Request.

You can also create an allowance plan that is based on another allowance plan. This is known as a follow-up allowance plan. This
requires speci c settings to be made, which are described here.

Choose Create for a stand-alone allowance plan. The object page for the allowance plan appears for editing.

Enter an ID for the allowance plan. The allowance plan ID can have a maximum of 30 characters and spaces. Note that
you must de ne this ID and this is not done by the system automatically.

Enter an allowed quantity. An allowed quantity is the quantity of the chosen material that you can distribute. When the
allowance plan is created from an allowance request, the system proposes the requested quantity as the allowed quantity. You
can change this if you are authorized to make such a change.

Choose a usage type. You de ne usage types in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Command and Support Relationships De ne Usage Types .

Enter the ID of the force element for which you want to plan a material. You can use the value help to search for a force
element. If authorization restrictions apply, you can only search for force element for which you have authorization.

 Note
When creating an allowance plan, you cannot distribute a quantity for the selected material to a force element. You must
rst save the allowance plan and then distribute the quantities.

Choose the level for the allowance plan for which you want to plan material. You have three options here:

Selected level – you can only assign a quantity for the selected force element.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 176
 7/10/2024
Selected level and one level below – you can only assign quantities for the selected force element and the force element
found one level below it in the hierarchy.

Selected level and all levels below – you can assign quantities for all force elements in the hierarchy below the chosen
force element.

 Note
Please be aware that you can only create a follow-up allowance plan if you have chosen Selected level and one level below.

In the Base Type section, you de ne the material for which you want to plan quantities. You can choose a exible material
planning object (FMPO) or a product. You can only choose one variant for the FMPO.

To update an allowance plan, open the object page in the edit mode. Once you have chosen Set to Complete, you can no longer
edit the allowance plan. Please be aware that several users can work on the allowance plan in parallel. However, only one user
can save their changes here.

Basic Information About an Allowance Plan

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for an allowance plan. You maintain this information in the header and
on the General Information, Allowance Plan Hierarchy, Comment, User Status and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about an allowance plan.

You also see the allowance plan status und the completion status.

The completion status is an indicator that displays whether the allowance plan can be updated (display No) or has been
completed (display Yes). An allowance plan has been completed once all of the quantities have been provided for the allowance
plan.

When you create an allowance plan, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. If you want to remove your created
allowance plan, you can use the Delete option. This option is only available for the system status Planned and the completion
status. The system status cannot be changed, until the completion status has been de ned. For more information about the
status, see Status Network for Allowance Plans. Until the system status Active is de ned, you can reset your allowance plan. All
quantities including follow-up allowance plans, that do not have the Active status, are deleted and you can start your allowance
plan again by assigning new content. For more information about which content to assign, see Creating an Allowance Plan. If you
set the status to Active, the system creates a materials assignment in the force element app.

Note that if you have additional follow-up allowance plans, you can only change the status once the allowance plan and its
follow-up allowance plans have been set to complete.

In the display mode, the allocation view shows you how much of the allowed quantity you have already assigned.

 Note
The elds Plan ID and Plan Description are always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

General Information
In the Plan Information section, you nd all general data for the allowance plan. An allowed quantity is the quantity of the
chosen material that you can distribute. The allowed quantity incl. sub-levels represents the quantity for the chosen material,

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 177
 7/10/2024
which the system automatically aggregates for the selected force element and its sub-levels.

The force element for which you want to request material is linked. If you click on the force element ID, you see which apps are
available to you for processing the force element.

The level for the allowance plan is displayed. Note that you can no longer change this once a stand-alone allowance plan has
been created or the allowance plan has been edited based on an allowance request. You can assign the allowed quantity to the
force element in the Allowance Plan Hierarchy facet according to the level you choose here.

If you have created the allowance plan from an allowance request, the allowance request ID is linked in the Plan Information
section. If you click on the allowance request ID, you see which apps are available to you for processing the allowance request.

In the Base Type section, you de ne the material for which you want to plan quantity. You can choose a exible material
planning object (FMPO) or a product. You can only choose one variant for the FMPO.

Allowance Plan Hierarchy

The Allowance Plan Hierarchy facet is only visible in the display and edit modes. It is displayed once the allowance plan has been
created, meaning that a force element has been selected as a header element. In this facet, you see the selected force element
and its sub levels in a hierarchy. In the edit mode for this hierarchy, you can distribute the allowed quantity for each level of the
force element de ned in the Level for Plan eld. If an authorization restriction applies, you can only distribute quantities for
those force elements for which you have authorization.

In the display mode, you can see the quantity that you have already distributed. Please be aware that the allocation can only be
viewed in the display mode. While you are distributing quantities, the system summarizes them in the background, and displays
a warning message if you try to save and the total quantities assigned exceed the allowed quantity.

Follow-Up Allowance Plan

In the edit mode, you can set the ag for a follow-up allowance plan. This ag is only displayed if you have chosen the level
Selected level and one level below when creating the allowance plan. When you set the allowance plan to completed, the
system creates a follow-up allowance plan automatically. The system enters the relevant information automatically based on
the previous allowance plan. The follow-up allowance plan is then linked, and you can start working with the new allowance plan.

The assigned quantity for the previous quantity is de ned as the allowed quantity for the follow-up allowance plan.

Comment
Any comments made are shown here.

User Status
A user status can be created as an addition to the existing system status.

Before you can change a user status in the Manage Allowance Plans app, you must rst make the corresponding settings for it
in Customizing. These are found under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Assignments Technical Settings
Maintain User Status Pro le for Assignment .

You can de ne and activate any number of user statuses.

 Note
You can only make changes to the user status using the Change User Status button at the top of the screen.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 178
 7/10/2024

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Related Information
Manage Allowance Plans

Set Allowance Plan to Complete

Once all of the quantities for the allowance plan have been provided, it is completed and you can set its status to complete. The
allowance plan must have the Approved status to enable the material to be assigned to the force element. This produces a
materials assignment in the force element apps (Manage Force Elements and Manage Force Elements - Material Planner). The
allowance plan is linked in the materials assignment.

If follow-up allowance plans exist, you must set them all to complete. Otherwise, you will not be able to change the allowance
plan status.

 Note
You can delete and reset an allowance plan. The deletion removes the complete allowance plan, the resetremoves the
content of the allowance plan.

When the system creates the materials assignment, it uses all of the information from the allowance plan, and provides a link in
the assignment to the allowance plan from which it is created. The assigned quantity is de ned as the quantity. If a follow-up
allowance plan exists for a force element, the assigned quantity for the follow-up allowance plan is de ned as the quantity in the
materials quantity. The system generates an assignment for each force element for which you you have an allowance quantity.

Once the assignments have been created, you should ensure that they are maintained by a user who has the relevant allowance
authorizations for the assignment.

Flexible Material Planning Objects

This topic describes the structure of a exible material planning object (FMPO) and how this has been implemented in the SAP
S/4HANA Defense & Security solution.

An FMPO is an enhanced material planning object that can be used more exibly.

The exible material planning object can describe the following:

Equipment (such as a medium size truck), without a speci c model (such as a truck of type X from manufacturer Y) or
speci c material (such as serial number 4711) that has been de ned.

A group of several FMPOs that typically have a common function.

The planning and the supply of individual and bulk consumable goods.

An FMPO always contains a minimum of one variant.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the FMPO in the following SAP Fiori apps:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 179
 7/10/2024
Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects

Manage Force Elements - Material Planner

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Integration
Material

You can navigate from a displayed material to the properties of the material master record.

You can display the FMPOs that are assigned to a material in the application Create/Change/Display Material (transactions
MM01, MM02, or MM03) in the material master (Basic Data 1 tab).

Variants
This topic explains the structure of a variant.

A exible material planning object (FMPO) can have several variants according to the user requirements. Variants of an FMPO
can contain multiple models, accompanying parts and so on. The FMPO ’10 ton cargo truck’ could for example have several
variants, such as ’10 ton cargo truck with GPS’ and ’10 ton cargo truck with winch and tool kit’. Both variants have the same
model (the 10 ton cargo truck), but have different accompanying parts (the rst has the GPS and the other the winch and tool
kit).

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 180
 7/10/2024

Variants can also re ect the lifecycle of the FMPO. Whilst it may initially only have one variant, each subsequent change to the
FMPO can be re ected in a new variant. You can however also edit and update an existing variant, rather than creating an
additional one.

An FMPO can have several variants, but must contain a minimum of one variant. You can set the Active status for multiple
variants at the same time.

All the variants of an FMPO use the same model. Variants must not contain different models.

Structure
A variant has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it that show different information about it.

The structure of a variant is de ned as follows:

General Information

Variant Description

Models

Accompanying Parts

Additional Information

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 181
 7/10/2024
Projects De nition

User Status

Attachments

Classi cation

Create a Variant
You can only create a variant when the FMPO is in the edit mode. You can then either create a new variant or copy an existing
one.

To update or to delete a variant, you need to open the FMPO to which the variant belongs in the edit mode. When updating a
variant, check that the elds marked with a red asterisk contain data.

If you only have one variant remaining, this cannot be deleted. In this situation, you must delete the FMPO instead.

Related Information
Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects

Flexible Material Planning Object with a Packing Instruction

De nition
A planning object used to supply a force element with non-consumable goods. This object de nes a combination of materials
that belong together at material number or serial number level.

Use
In contrast to exible material planning objects (FMPOs), FMPOs with packing instructions are not used to de ne authorized
materials, but rather combinations of speci c material numbers or serial numbers that force elements are to be equipped with
(for example, a particular type of vehicle combined with a particular type of equipment).

Structure
Technically, the FMPO with packing instruction is implemented as a regular FMPO for which a packing instruction is de ned.

Properties

The data for the FMPO with a packing instruction is created using the procedure for a regular FMPO.

Packing instruction

You can assign a packing instruction to an FMPO. The packing instruction is subsequently used to generate, manage, and
identify derived handling units (HUs).

A regular FMPO is identi ed as an FMPO with a packing instruction as soon as it is assigned with a packing instruction. A
packing instruction is created separately. For more information, please see the standard Handling Unit Management
transaction Packing Instruction (POP1 – 3).

Storage
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 182
 7/10/2024
The properties of FMPOs with a packing instruction are stored in the following tables:

Table Data

DFS_FMPO_HEAD Flexible Material Planning Object Header

DFS_FMPO_HEAD_T Text Table for Flexible Material Planning Object Header

DFS_FMPO_VARNT Flexible Material Planning Object Variant,

Including the Packing Instruction

DFS_FMPO_VARNT_T Text Table for Flexible Material Planning Object Variant

DFS_FMPO_MODEL Flexible Material Planning Object Model

DFS_FMPO_APOTH FMPO Accompanying Parts (Others - FMPO )

DFS_FMPO_APMAT Flexible Material Planning Object Accompanying Parts

If an FMPO with a packing instruction is assigned to an FMPO as an accompanying part, the packing instruction information is
also shown here in a separate column.

 Note
To display details of an FMPO with a packing instruction, use the Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects app.

Integration
FMPOs with a packing instruction can be assigned to force elements. In such cases, the packing instruction data is displayed in a
separate column. This type of FMPO is not taken into account during the authorized/actual comparison.

Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects

App ID: F4058

This app is used to maintain the exible material planning objects (FMPOs).

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Maintain FMPOs

Maintain variants for the FMPO along with details, such as models, accompanying parts-FMPOs, accompanying parts-
products, and so on.

Display FMPO assignments to force elements or reference force elements

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 183
 7/10/2024

View
FMPOs are displayed in a list when you open the app. You can de ne a custom view and save this. However, you can only access
this in the view in which you created it.

 Note
A power user can assign authorizations that control the actions that users can perform, such as creation and deletion.

Structure
An FMPO has a header section at the top of the screen and two facets below it which show different information about it. The
structure of an FMPO is de ned as follows:

General Information

Variant

FMPO Description

Search
You can search for an FMPO using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Creating an FMPO
Choose Create. The object page for the FMPO appears for editing. You must make entries in the elds marked with a red
asterisk. The system de nes the current date as a default Valid From date. The system automatically creates one variant. You
can create any number of variants here.

When you create an FMPO, the system sets the status to Planned automatically. You can change this status once you have
nished editing. For more information about the status, see Status Network for Flexible Material Planning Objects.

 Note
As soon as you start editing the FMPO, the system saves it as a draft. Once you have nished editing, you can save it actively.

To update an FMPO, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds marked with a red asterisk
contain data.

If you want to delete an FMPO, you must set the status of all the variants that are assigned to the FMPO to Deactivated. You
can only set the Deactivated status if no assignments are available.

Basic Information About a Flexible Material Planning Object

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a exible material planning object (FMPO). You maintain this
information in the header and on the General Information and Variants facets.

Header
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 184
 7/10/2024
The elds FMPO Description and FMPO ID are always visible, even if you scroll down the object page. The FMPO description is
shown in the logon language.

General Information
In the General Information facet, you nd information about the FMPO, the reportable item code and the interchangeability
code for ammunition.

You assign an interchangeability code for ammunition to the respective FMPO here. The FMPO description is shown in the logon
language.

Variants
The Variants facet shows all variants that are assigned to an FMPO.

FMPO Description
You can maintain the FMPO description to translate the description entry into any language. The table lists all the descriptions
in all the supported languages. However, the General Information facet and the header show the description in the logon
language.

Related Information
Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects

Basic Information About a Variant

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a variant of a exible material planning object (FMPO). You
maintain this information in the header and on the General Information, Additional Information, Projects De nition, User
Status, Attachments and Classi cation facets.

Header
The elds Variant Description and Variant ID are always visible, even if you scroll down the object page.

General Information
In the General Information facet, you nd information about the variant, material owner, responsible planner, and LogFAS /
ADAMS. The variant description is shown in the logon language.

In the Variant Information section, you nd the following information:

You can assign a product group and an external product group to an FMPO. The product group groups together several
products with the same attributes and assigns them to a particular product group or external product group.

You can also assign an external product group.

Since the FMPO has a non-physical nature and you require a physical material for a purchase requisition, you specify the
FMPO product here. If you have assigned an FMPO product to an FMPO, this product can be used for the purchase
requisition process. If you have not assigned an FMPO product, the default model is used for the purchase requisition.
The assignment of an FMPO product to an FMPO is optional. However, you need to create the FMPO product manually
because it is not created automatically when the FMPO is created.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 185
 7/10/2024
You can assign a packing instruction to an FMPO. The packing instruction is later used to generate, manage, and identify
derived handling units (HUs). You can assign an existing packing instruction. To display the assigned packing instruction,
click the link which is visible in the display mode for the variant. For more information about packing instructions, see
Packing Instruction.

In the Responsible Planner section, you de ne the responsible planner, who can be an organizational unit, a position or a person,
and maintains variants. If an FMPO contains multiple variants, these do not have to be maintained by the same responsible
planner.

In the Material Owner section, you specify who (organizational unit/force element, position, or person) is responsible for
processing the FMPO as the material owner. In doing so, you assign the respective authorizations required to process the
objects.

In the LogFAS / ADAMS section, you nd relocation-relevant information.

In the Level of Detail section, you set the At Serial No. Level indicator if you want to enable an FMPO to be planned in detail and
converted right up to serial number level. To use this indicator in operational logistics, you must enter a serial number pro le in
the material master data for all materials that have been assigned to the FMPO as models. The serial number pro le entered
for the material de nes the relevance of the serial number level for this object.

Variant Description
You can maintain the variant description to translate the description entry into any language. The table lists all descriptions in
all supported languages. However, the General Information facet displays the description in the logon language.

Additional Information
To prevent an FMPO from being overplanned for a given organizational area, you can de ne subscribing organizational areas
and the quantities planned for them.

Certain force elements are not allowed to plan using certain FMPOs because both have been phased out. The force element
should belong to an organizational area and a country/region, which is also maintained in the FMPO. Therefore, you cannot
create an FMPO assignment if the Lock Flag is maintained for this speci c organizational area and country/region key.

An FMPO can be assigned to the following objects:

Force element or reference force element: This assignment is shown in the section Force Elements but cannot be
changed here. You make the assignment in the Manage Force Elements app under Material Flexible Material
Planning Objects .

Position: This assignment is shown in the section Positions but cannot be changed here. You make the assignment in the
Manage Positions app under the facet Flexible Material Planning Objects.

Capability: This assignment is shown in the section Capabiltities but cannot be changed here. You make the assignment
in the Manage Capabilities app under Lines of Development FMPO .

All of the weights and measurements maintained in the product master records for the products used as models in the variant
and any product master generated for an FMPO variant are displayed in the Weights and Measurements section. These cannot
be changed in the FMPO.

Projects De nition
You can use the Projects De nition facet to monitor, analyze and control your FMPOs.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 186
 7/10/2024
A Work Breakdown Structure Element (WBS element) organizes various project tasks in a certain hierarchy. The WBS elements
that are assigned to the selected variant are displayed in a table. For more information about WBS elements, see WBS Element.

A network activity is used to represent a task within the network ow. It forms the basis for further logistics planning and
execution processes within a project. The network activities that are assigned to the selected variant are displayed in a table.

User Status
A user status can be created as an addition to the existing system status.

Before you can change a user status in the Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects app, you must rst make the
corresponding settings for it in Customizing. These are found under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility
Assignments Technical Settings Maintain User Status Pro le for Assignment .

You can de ne and activate any number of user statuses.

 Note
You can only make changes to the user status using the Change User Status button at the top of the screen.

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

Classi cation
An FMPO is classi ed using the classi cation system. Class type MP1 is de ned for the FMPO object type. The class selected
de nes the characteristic values that can then be assigned. You can edit these assignments of classes and the evaluation of
characteristics in the classi cation system. For more information about the classi cation system, see Classi cation (CA-CL).

The SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution provides a Sensitivity eld, which you can use to assign a speci c sensitivity
value to FMPOs. This can for example be used to de ne special force units. You can then use this eld to prevent certain users
accessing these units.

To categorize the sensitivity of a unit, you must rst assign the classi cation.

Check whether the eld for sensitivity is already visible on the Classi cation facet. If not, click on Click here to assign a class in
the edit mode to assign the new class type for sensitivity and select class type Sensitivity for Defense (SEN) on the dialog box.

The sensitivity eld has been integrated in the Classi cation facet for FMPOs. It has been enabled for multiple values, meaning
that a single object can have several different sensitivity values. A user only needs to be granted authorization to access the
object protected by the sensitivity for one of these values.

Related Information
Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects

Models
A model speci es a exible material planning object (FMPO) on the basis of a product master record.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 187
 7/10/2024
A model speci es a exible material planning object (FMPO) at product master record level (for example, a truck of type X from
manufacturer Y as the model for the FMPO medium-size truck). You use models to create links between FMPOs and speci c
materials.

A product or a product master record can be added as a model for a variant.

You can de ne whether a product can be assigned to exactly one FMPO (regardless of its object status) or whether it can be
assigned to several active FMPOs in Customizing under Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Flexible Material
Planning Objects Control Assignment of Material to Flexible Material Planning Objects .

It is possible to have only one product as a model in the different variants of the same FMPO. All variants of an FMPO can only
have the same model. The variant status is not relevant here because it is found within the same FMPO.

When you use a product as a model in one variant of an FMPO, it is automatically added as a model to all other existing variants
of the FMPO.

You can specify that product master records with certain material types cannot be assigned as models in Customizing under
Defense & Security Organizational Flexibility Flexible Material Planning Objects Exclude Material Types for Usage as
Models .

The Default Planning eld speci es which model the system is to use as the default value. Only one model can be de ned as a
default.

Use the lock ag to exclude individual models, or all models from further use in the system. The lock can be set for all models,
but cannot be used in combination with the default ag. If you want to lock all models, you must rst remove the default ag.

 Note
A power user can assign authorizations that control the actions that users can perform, such as creation and deletion.

Related Information
Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects

Accompanying Parts
An accompanying part is an item within a exible material planning object (FMPO) that can be another FMPO or a material
master. Accompanying parts describe the structure of variants and the FMPO.

The Accompanying Parts facet contains the Flexible Material Planning Objects and the Products sections.

You can use the accompanying part to describe at a basic business level, which type of FMPO or product (such as speci c
vehicles, machines, tools, or communication equipment) an organizational unit, represented here by a force element, requires
to perform its tasks.

 Note
A power user can assign authorizations that control the actions that users can perform, such as creation and deletion.

Flexible Material Planning Objects

The Flexible Material Planning Object section contains all FMPOs that are assigned to the variant.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 188
 7/10/2024
You can use the accompanying part FMPO to group several FMPOs, which enables you to assign them to force elements or
positions more quickly.

If a packing instruction is assigned to the accompanying part FMPO, you nd this information here. To display the details of the
assigned packing instructions, you need to open the variant of the accompanying part FMPO.

Products
The Products section contains all products that are assigned to the variant.

You can use products and their corresponding initial supply quantities and reorder points for planning purposes, and to supply
individual and bulk consumable goods.

Related Information
Manage Flexible Material Planning Objects

Generate Flexible Material Planning Objects

Please nd information about the following apps below:

Display Accompanying Parts Assigned to Force Elements (DFS_FE_FMPO_LIST)

Display FMPO Hierarchy for Accompanying Parts (DFS_ACP_FMPO_HIER)

Display Accompanying Parts Assigned to Force Elements

App ID: DFS_FE_FMPO_LIST

You can use this app to get an overview of where certain exible material planning objects (FMPOs) and products are used in
force element and position assignments.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Select accompanying parts FMPO and/or products

Display a list of force elements and positions assigned to those selected accompanying parts based on usage type and
status

Download the output to a local le

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Display FMPO Hierarchy for Accompanying Parts

App ID: DFS_ACP_FMPO_HIER

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 189
 7/10/2024
You can use this app to focus on the exible material planning object (FMPO) master data, it provides an overview of where
FMPOs and products in other FMPOs are used as accompanying parts. It displays the details of the parent FMPO including its
hierarchy to which the accompanying parts are assigned.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Choose accompanying parts FMPOs and/or products

Get details about the parent FMPO including its hierarchy to which the accompanying parts are assigned

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Reportable Item Code

De nition
The NATO categorization system for devices and personnel required for operations.

The reportable item code (RIC) is published by the NATO Consultation, Command and Control Agency (NC3A).

Use
You can use the reportable item code (RIC) to:

Categorize exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Describe jobs

Use interfaces for NATO data processing procedures

For more information, see Functions for the Reportable Item Codes.

Structure
The RIC consists of an alphanumerical code in a hierarchical structure, usually in the sequence two letters/two digits/two
letters (for example, AD32FG). The individual items (hierarchy levels) describe the following categories:

Main group

Main category

Functional category

Subcategory

Type

Subtype

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 190
 7/10/2024
The letter Z is used if an item cannot be speci ed in more detail.

Example
Example for the items (hierarchy levels):

Main group

The main group de nes the family for an item. This means that all codes with the main group C belong to the “artillery”
family and all codes with the main group E belong to the “ships” family, for example.

Main category

The main category de nes the general categories within the main group. For example, the main categories in the main
group “Armor” include “Tank”, “Armored ghting vehicle”, and “Armored support vehicle”.

Functional category

The functional category de nes the function of an item within each main category. For example, the functional categories
in the main category “Tank” include “Main battle tank” and “Light tank”.

Subcategory

The subcategory divides the items in each functional category. In the case of weapon systems, the criterion is the caliber
of the weapon or gun. For example, the functional category “Main battle tank” includes the subcategories “84mm”,
“90mm”, “105mm”, “120mm”, “125mm”, “140mm”, and “152mm”.

Type

This level lists all the item types in a particular subcategory. Only the basic types are listed, characteristics and variants
are not included. For example, the subcategory “Main battle tank 120mm” includes the types “Leopard-2”, “M1”, and
“Challenger”.

Subtype

Each distinguishing feature and each variant of a type is listed. For example, the type "Main battle tank 120mm M1"
includes the subtypes "A1" and "A2".

Integration
You can assign RICs to FMPOs and jobs.

 Note
You can assign RICs to a job using the transaction Maintain Job (PO03) and the infotype Speci c Job Characteristics.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 191
 7/10/2024

Functions for the Reportable Item Codes

Reportable item codes (RICs) are used to categorize and identify equipment. They are required for NATO reporting. An RIC acts
as an indicator of the operational capabilities of a particular piece of equipment.

The following display and editing options are available for the reportable item code (RIC).

Key Features
You can use this app to do the following:

Display details about the reportable item code

Display the RIC catalog and hierarchy

Apps for the Reportable Item Code

You can use the following apps:

Import RIC Catalog (/ISDFPS/IMPORT_RIC_CAT_XML)

Display Reportable Item Code (/ISDFPS/RIC2)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
Display

You can display RIC data that already exists in the system in a tree structure, or search for speci c data.

1. Access the Display Reportable Item Code app.

2. You can now:

a. Search for an entry using the RIC eld

b. Search for an entry from the structure in the RIC hierarchy

c. Select an entry in the RIC hierarchy and display this and all lower-level entries in the table next to the hierarchy
structure.

Import

You can import RIC data using standardized text les from the NATO Consultation, Command and Control Agency (NC3A).
Import les that have recently been released by NATO can be uploaded using the program Import RIC Catalog. The program
can be run in the test mode rst.

Note that national codes can no longer be included in the RIC structure.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 192
 7/10/2024

Assignments

You assign an RIC to a exible material planning object or a job on the relevant object tab.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Functions for the Reportable Item Code.

Purchasing Groups
A buyer or group of buyers responsible for certain purchasing activities. The purchasing group is:

Responsible internally for the procurement of a material or a class of materials; is the principal channel for a company’s
dealings with its vendors

Used for the assignment of purchasing documents and is therefore basically a selection criterion. A purchasing group
allows purchasing documents to be selected for each force element.

You can use the following apps:

Manage Purchasing Groups (/ISDFPS/V_024_U)

Display Purchasing Groups (/ISDFPS/V_024_V)

These apps are the same as the Customizing activity Materials Management Purchasing Create Purchasing Groups .

Create Purchasing Groups

Maintain the purchasing groups that are relevant for your company.

Use

In this step, you can create and change purchasing groups.

A purchasing group can be an individual or a group of individuals.

Activities

De ne your purchasing groups.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Storage Locations
Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage ILN for SSCC-Generation at Storage Location Level (/ISDFPS/T313Y_U)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 193
 7/10/2024
Display ILN for SSCC-Generation at Storage Location Level (/ISDFPS/T313Y_V)

Manage Picking Determination for Storage Locations (/ISDFPS/TVKOL_U)

Display Picking Determination for Storage Locations (/ISDFPS/TVKOL_V)

Manage Storage Locations (DFS_BERID_MCHG)

Delete Storage Location (/ISDFPS/LGORT_DELETE)

De ne Storage Location as Storage Location for Silo/Tank Management (DFS_SILO_MAINT)

Manage ILN for SSCC Generation at Storage Location Level

App ID: /ISDFPS/T313Y_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics - General Handling Unit Management External Identi cation
SSCC Generation Acc. to EAN128 Maintain SSCC Generation for Each Plant/Storage Location .

Maintain SSCC Generation for Each Plant / Storage Location

In this activity, you can set all parameters used to generate numbers of shipping units/serialized shipping container codes
(NSU/SSCCs), except for those at storage location level.

Example

Normally, your entire organization does not create more than 1,000 billion handling units each year. Therefore, you only need
one ILN from which you copy the 7-digit base number into an entry (by leaving all key elds blank: plant and storage location, for
example). You have previously created a number range object with a rolling 9-digit internal interval. You must now assign this
number range object.

If you also want to send smaller packages and manage them using NVE/SSCCs, you would need more than 1,000 billion
NSU/SSCCs each year. In this case, you should enter a different base number and a new number range object with an internal
interval. Assign these to the exact plant and storage location.

Requirements

You must have previously created a number range object and an internal interval. If you want to assign NSU/SSCCs externally
and you want the system to check if they are found during the valid range, you must also create an external interval.

Recommendation

If you do not want to generate speci c NSU/SSCCs for individual storage locations (and/or plants), leave the storage location
(and/or plant) blank, which saves you time and effort, since there is less information to maintain. You can add information to the
individual storage location/plant entries later on if necessary.

 Note
In this activity, you can also assign a SSCC number range interval to all plants/storage locations; meaning that the elds
plant and storage location are blank. Applications refer to these Customizing settings and determine the valid entry. A valid
entry could also be an entry with an initial plant and storage location.

The application always tries to use an entry with the same plant/storage location number. If such an entry is not available, the
application tries to use an entry with the same plant number. If no plant number is available, the application uses the number
range that is assigned to the blank entry.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 194
 7/10/2024
If the number range is not sufficient for one year (the expected time period in the standard system in which no NSU/SSCC is to
be repeated), you can maintain additional parameters in the same organizational unit. The number range object must not be a
rolling number range object in such a case. The system selects an entry in the eld Do not use?.

Further Notes

The system searches for NSU/SSCC generation parameters in the following key order:

1. Plant and storage location: Most detailed of the possible structures

2. Warehouse number: Maintain the parameters for this organizational unit in the next node

3. Plant: Same parameters for all storage locations for a plant. Leave the Storage location eld blank.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Display ILN for SSCC Generation at Storage Location Level

App ID: /ISDFPS/T313Y_V

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics - General Handling Unit Management External Identi cation
SSCC Generation Acc. to EAN128 Maintain SSCC Generation for Each Plant/Storage Location .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Manage Picking Determination for Storage Locations

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVKOL_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Picking Determine Picking Location
Assign Picking Locations .

Assign Picking Locations

Assign picking locations for each plant.

Use

You can assign picking locations to all combinations of shipping points and storage conditions for each plant.

Requirements

Before you can allocate picking locations, you must de ne the plants, shipping locations, and storage conditions.

Information is available in the following sections:

Plants are de ned as organizational units in Materials Management (module MM) in the step Create plant.

You de ne shipping points as organizational units in Sales & Distribution in the step Create shipping points.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 195
 7/10/2024
Action

1. Determine how the picking locations are to be allocated in your company.

2. Perform this allocation for all plants by allocating a picking location to each combination of the shipping point and
storage condition for each plant.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Display Picking Determination for Storage Locations

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVKOL_V

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Picking Determine Picking Location
Assign Picking Locations .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Manage Storage Locations

App ID: DFS_BERID_MCHG

You can use this app to de ne storage locations for the plant. For defense-speci c processes, use the app Material Requirement
Planning Areas.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Display storage locations for each plant

Assign a storage location to a plant

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Delete Storage Location

App ID: /ISDFPS/LGORT_DELETE

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 196
 7/10/2024
You can use the program Delete Storage Location to delete all database table entries for a storage location.

For this to be possible, the storage location to be deleted must not:

Keep stock records

Be referenced by any open MM document

Be the stock storage location for a force element

Be the infrastructure material storage location for a force element

Belong to an MRP area

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Delete all database table entries for a storage location

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Use

You can delete stock storage locations without stock that are permanently assigned to the force element in theManage Force
Elements application.

Alternatively you can use the app Delete Storage Location. The prerequisites for using this app are that the storage location to
be deleted:

Does not manage stock

Is not referenced by an open MM document

Is not the stock storage location for a force element

Is not the infrastructure material storage location for a force element

Does not belong to an MRP area

Procedure

From the Fiori launchpad, choose: Logistics Master Data Defense Storage Locations Delete Storage Location .

The BAdI: Adjust Deletion of Storage Locations (/ISDFPS/FDP_LGORT_DELETE) Business Add-In is available for this app. It
enables you to also delete those table entries that cannot be entered using the standard app. In Customizing, choose Defense
Forces and Public Security Materials Management Business Add-Ins BAdI: Adjust Deletion of Storage Locations .

 Note
If you are using this app in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Deleting Stock Storage Locations.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 197
 7/10/2024

De ne Storage Location as Storage Location for Silo/Tank Management

App ID: DFS_SILO_MAINT

You can use this app to create a bulk fuel management storage location in a productive environment.

This app is a Customizing activity in the SAP S/4HANA Oil & Gas industry that supports ʻpipeline product’-speci c materials
processes. This industry solution can be activated along with the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution. However, in the
SAP S/4HANA Oil & Gas industry solution, the storage locations are managed as Customizing activities whereas the SAP
S/4HANA Defense & Security solution handles storage locations as master data. This app enables an O&G Customizing
storage location to be handled as master data for a D&S storage location.

Key Features

You can use this app to do the following:

Activate silo management at storage location level in a productive environment without creating a transport request

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

De ne Storage Location as Storage Location for Silo/Tank Management

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Industry Solution Oil&Gas (Downstream) HPM (Hydrocarbon Product
Management) Silo/Tank Management Master Data De ne Storage Location as Storage Location for Silo/Tank
Management . Please be aware that you can only access the Customizing activity, when the SAP S/4HANA Oil & Gas industry
solution is activated.

De ne Storage Location as Storage Location for Silo/Tank Management

In this step, you activate silo management at storage location level.

Three options are available here:

Tank creation is not allowed at this storage location.

This is the default value. Tank creation is not allowed, and therefore no silo management functions are provided for this
storage location.

Tank creation is allowed, not all materials are held in tanks.

Silo management is active at this storage location.

Tank creation is allowed, all materials are held in tanks.

Silo management is active at this storage location, and material movements from or to this storage location are only
allowed for materials that are collectively assigned to any tank at this storage location.

Shipping Points
Please nd information about the following apps below:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 198
 7/10/2024
Manage Shipping Points (/ISDFPS/FDP_VSTEL)

Assignment of Shipping Point to Plant (/ISDFPS/OVXC)

Shipping Deadlines - Manage Loading Time (/ISDFPS/T630L_U)

Shipping Deadlines - Display Loading Time (/ISDFPS/T630L_V)

Shipping Deadlines - Manage Pick and Pack Time (/ISDFPS/T630R_U)

Shipping Deadlines - Display Pick and Pack Time (/ISDFPS/T630R_V)

Manage Work Area Loading Point per Shipping Point (/ISDFPS/TVLA_U)

Display Work Area Loading Point per Shipping Point (/ISDFPS/TVLA_V)

Assign Shipping Point (S_EMO_42000107)

Con rmation Control for Inbound Delivery (S_EMO_42000106)

Manage Shipping Points

App ID: /ISDFPS/FDP_VSTEL

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Enterprise Structure De nition Logistics Execution De ne Shipping
Point .

De ne Shipping Point

Use

To adapt the functional scope of a shipping point to the organization in your company, you should ensure that:

The shipping point is the top level in the organization for shipping.

A shipping point can be allocated to several plants.

A shipping point can be divided into several loading points.

A delivery is always initiated from exactly one shipping point, meaning all items in a delivery belong to a single shipping
point. Groups of deliveries also belong to exactly one shipping point.

The shipping point can be proposed automatically during order processing according to the plant, loading group, and
shipping condition.

A shipping point has an address.

The shipping point is used as a selection criterion for lists of deliveries and the delivery worklist.

The shipping point is used as a selection criterion for processing deliveries, like picking or the goods issue.

Activities

1. De ne a shipping point

To do so, enter a four-character alphanumeric key, a description, and the address.

2. Use the project IMG view to edit data that was changed automatically.

 Note

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 199
 7/10/2024
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Assignment of Shipping Point to Plant

App ID: /ISDFPS/OVXC

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Enterprise Structure Assignment Logistics Execution Assign Shipping
Point to Plant .

Assign Shipping Point to Plant

In this step, you can allocate your required number of shipping points to the plants. Any single shipping point can belong to
several plants.

Actions

Assign the shipping points to the plants.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Shipping Deadlines - Manage Loading Time

App ID: /ISDFPS/T630L_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Scheduling
Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling Maintain Duration . You need to check the section Loading Time.

Maintain Duration

De ne the planned duration for loading and picking/packing activities.

Use

You can de ne the planned duration for loading and picking/packing activities for each shipping point or route. These times are
used during sales order and delivery scheduling and help determine the planned goods issue date and other expected dates.
De ning how much time is expected to be required for each activity also allows you to compare the planned duration with the
actual duration. You can use this information to adjust your planning and to improve your processes.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Shipping Deadlines - Manage Pick and Pack Time

App ID: /ISDFPS/T630R_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Scheduling
Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling Maintain Duration . You need to check the section Pick/Pack Time.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 200
 7/10/2024

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Manage Work Area Loading Point per Shipping Point

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVLA_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Enterprise Structure De nition Logistics Execution Maintain Loading
Point .

Maintain Loading Point

In this step, you de ne the loading points for your company. The de nition of loading points is optional, you can still use the SD
system without de ning loading points. A loading point has the following characteristics:

A loading point is a subdivision of a shipping point.

The loading point can be entered manually in the delivery header.

Actions

First enter the shipping points for which you want to de ne loading points.

To de ne the loading points for this shipping point, enter a two- character, alphanumeric key and a description. You can also
enter a short text for each loading point to indicate the area of responsibility.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Assign Shipping Point

App ID: S_EMO_42000107

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Defense & Security Materials Management Maintain Shipping Point as
Goods Receiving Point .

Maintain Shipping Point as Goods Receiving Point

Assign and goods receiving points to the plant/storage location and prioritze them.

Use

You can assign one or more goods receiving points to the plant/storage location combination. If you assign several, you can
specify a priority.

Requirements

Before you can assign the goods receiving point, you must de ne the plant and storage location. You can nd information in the
structure maintenance for the enterprise structure, where plant and storage locations in the general logistics and materials
management areas are de ned.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 201
 7/10/2024
Activities

Check how the goods receiving points are to be assigned and then assign them. The goods receiving point is represented by the
shipping point data element.

Con rmation Control for Inbound Delivery

App ID: S_EMO_42000107

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Deliveries De ne Order Con rmations for
Inbound Deliveries .

De ne Order Con rmations for Inbound Deliveries

If Warehouse Management is decentralized, inbound deliveries are generated in the SAP S/4HANA system and are then
distributed to the Warehouse Management System (WMS) where they are used as a basis for transferring orders during
picking.

Up to now, inbound deliveries were either created automatically when shipping noti cations were received in the system using
IDocs or manually if con rmation control in Purchasing has been de ned accordingly.

If your company does not use shipping noti cations or only uses them in rare cases, you can generate inbound deliveries
automatically from purchase orders.

In particular, this procedure is necessary for decentralized warehouses, since all inbound deliveries for which a WM transfer
order is to be created, are distributed to the WMS.

You can set up your system so that inbound deliveries are only created automatically for plant/storage location combinations
for which decentralized processing is activated for the warehouse number assigned.

(See also: Set Up Con rmation Control)

You can initiate the creation of inbound deliveries by choosing Logistics Execution Inbound delivery Inbound delivery
Worklist for purchase orders (VL34) .

Activities

1. Check the warehouse number for which decentralized Warehouse Management has been activated.

2. Check which order types inbound deliveries are created automatically.

3. Assign a con rmation that ensures that inbound deliveries are created automatically to each combination of order type
and plant/storage location.

Plant Shipping Point Determination

Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage Shipping Point Determination for Plants (/ISDFPS/TVSTZ_U)

Display Shipping Point Determination for Plants (/ISDFPS/TVSTZ_V)

Manage Shipping Point Determination for Plants

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 202
 7/10/2024
App ID: /ISDFPS/TVSTZ_U

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping
Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Assign Shipping Points .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Assign Shipping Points

Short Text

Assign shipping points to each plant.

Use

For each plant, you can allocate shipping points to all combinations of shipping conditions and loading groups.

Requirements

Before you can allocate the shipping points, you must de ne plants, shipping points, shipping conditions, and loading groups.

For more information about this subject, see the following menu options:

Plants are de ned as organizational units in Materials Management (module MM) in the menu option "Create plant".

You de ne shipping points as organizational units in Sales & Distribution in the menu option "Create shipping points".

Actions

1. Check how the shipping points within a plant should be allocated to the shipping conditions and loading groups.

2. Make the allocation for the individual plants.

3. Maintain the shipping point that is to appear as the default value in sales document items in the column Proposed
Shipping Point. Enter additional shipping points in the subsequent columns (Manual Shipping Point) that are allowed as
alternative values in sales document items.

Display Shipping Point Determination for Plants

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVSTZ_V

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping
Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Assign Shipping Points .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Storage Location Shipping Point Determination

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 203
 7/10/2024
Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage Shipping Point Determination for Storage Locations (/ISDFPS/TVSTZ_LGORTU)

Display Shipping Point Determination for Storage Locations (/ISDFPS/TVSTZ_LGORTV)

Manage Shipping Point Determination for Storage Locations

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVSTZ_LGORTU

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping
Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Set Up Storage-Location-Dependent Shipping Point Determination Assign
Shipping Points According to Storage Location .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Assign Shipping Points According to Storage Location

Short Text

Assign shipping points to plants, storage locations, shipping conditions and loading groups that you have de ned.

Use

You can assign shipping points to your required combination of plant, storage location, shipping condition, and loading group.

Prerequisites

Before you can assign the shipping points, you must de ne plants, storage locations, shipping points, shipping conditions, and
loading groups.

Information about this is available under the following menu options:

You de ne plants as organizational units in Logistics under the menu option Create Plant.

You can create storage locations during maintenance of organizational units in Materials Management.

You de ne shipping points as organizational units in the Logistics Execution component under the menu option Create
Shipping Point.

Note also that you must assign the shipping points to at least one plant. You can make this setting under the menu option
Assign Shipping Points.

Storage-location-dependent shipping point determination is only carried out if the corresponding determination rule has been
de ned for the delivery type. You can make this setting under the menu option De ne Rule for Determination of Shipping Point.

Standard settings

If you do not wish to use the storage-location-dependent shipping point determination facility, you do not need to make any
entries here.

Activities

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 204
 7/10/2024
1. Check how the shipping points are to be assigned to the shipping conditions and loading groups within a plant and for a
certain storage location.

2. Assign the individual plants and storage locations.

Display Shipping Point Determination for Storage Locations

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVSTZ_LGORTV

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping
Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Set Up Storage-Location-Dependent Shipping Point Determination Assign
Shipping Points According to Storage Location .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Material Requirement Planning Areas

Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage MRP Areas and their Storage Locations (DFS_BERID_MANAGE)

Manage Total Planning (/ISDFPS/PUWNR_U)

Display Total Planning (/ISDFPS/PUWNR_V)

Manage MRP Areas and their Storage Locations

App ID: DFS_BERID_MANAGE

You can use this app to de ne stock MRP areas, with the relevant storage locations for the plant assigned to a force element.
For defense-speci c processes, use the suffixes _s (for supply) and _p (for provisions) when naming the force element structure
in the MRP area de nition.

Key Features

You can use this app to:

Display the storage location for each stock MRP area, which can consist of one or more storage locations.

Assign storage locations to a single MRP area.

De ne at least one storage location as a receiving storage location, which should belong to the MRP area.

Display a corresponding MRP area segment, which should be created in the product master for each MRP area.

Create and assign a WM warehouse to a single MRP area.

Create and assign a handling unit to a single MRP area.

Create and assign a customer.

Create and assign an EWM warehouse to a single MRP area.

Assign storage locations to an external material group.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 205
 7/10/2024

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Create and Assign Storage Locations

A storage location is the place where stock is physically kept within a plant. Storage locations are always created for a plant and
assigned to the stock MRP area here. A plant and MRP area can contain more than one storage location. If you create a storage
location for a supplying MRP area, the rst digit can be a letter and numerical. If you create a storage location for a provision
MRP area, this must be numerical. This naming convention is speci c to D&S and it controls processes. You can also enter a
storage location ID manually, providing you observe the naming convention.

A storage location can be assigned to a warehouse number. You can assign more than one storage location to the same
warehouse number within a plant.

Create and Assign a WM Warehouse to a Single MRP area

A warehouse complex is represented in Warehouse Management by a warehouse number. The cursor needs to be positioned on
the correct column. You can assign the warehouse number a description to make it easier to identify. The warehouse creation
process is the same as that described in the Customizing activity Enterprise Structure De nition Logistic Execution
Copy, Delete and Check Warehouse Number . It is assigned to the storage location once it has been created.

Create and Assign a Handling Unit to a Single MRP Area

The partner storage location created for a handling unit indicates the storage location that is used for stock transfers from or
to a storage location that has handling unit requirements. Following creation, the handling unit requirement indicator is set
automatically. If this indicator is set, the system does not create a material document when it makes a posting, and creates a
delivery in shipping instead.

Create and Assign a Customer

A customer is created as a business partner, such as a person, organization, or group.

Create and Assign an EWM Warehouse to a Single MRP Area

In Extended Warehouse Management, a warehouse complex is mapped as a warehouse number, which you can use to identify
the warehouse complex. An essential factor for de ning a warehouse number is the physical location. A warehouse number
summarizes storage types and storage bins that are organized and managed collectively.

You must de ne a comprehensive default extended warehouse that can be used for copying before creating an extended
warehouse. The creation process uses a copy functionality that is found in the Customizing entry SCM Extended Warehouse
Management Extended Warehouse Management Copy Warehouse Number Customizing . It also creates an entry in the
Customizing table Assign Warehouse Numbers from Logistical Execution (in the Customizing activity SCM Extended
Warehouse Management Extended Warehouse Management Interfaces ERP Integration General Settings Assign
Warehouse Numbers from Logistics Execution ) to map WM and EWM. Finally, it sets this warehouse number to EWM, this
ensures that the system manages the warehouse stock using SAP EWM (Customizing activity Logistics Execution Extended
Warehouse Management Integration Basic Setup for Integration with other Components Con gure SAP EWM-Speci c
Parameters ).

You must manage your data transfer to EWM separately. This is not part of the creation process.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 206
 7/10/2024
A Customizing request is required to save the new entries created related to the new extended warehouse. Some exceptions
apply to locking the entries in the Customizing entries, such as

If the system is a productive system.

If the client role is not ʻCustomizing’ and the client editing settings allow the changes to be made without a transport
request.

Assign Storage Location to an External Material Group

This functionality is available for MRP areas that are relevant for provision. It involves the same external material group as the
one found in the supply relationships and in the material master record basic data. The MRP run BAdI (MD_EXT_SUP) for supply
relationships then uses this information to determine the source SLOC_P (storage location provision) for the requested
material according to its MMR data – “Source SLOC”.

If this mapping was not performed, the MRP requests this from the “Default” storage location.

Manage Total Planning

App ID: /ISDFPS/PUWNR_U

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Planning
De ne Scope of Planning for Total Planning .

De ne Scope of Planning for Total Planning

 Note
This Customizing activity is only relevant if you plan some of your materials using classic MRP. If you plan all of your materials
using MRP Live, this activity is not relevant.

In this Customizing activity, you de ne the scope of planning and the sequence of the organizational units to be planned. These
are either plants or, if you have converted MRP to MRP at MRP area level, the MRP areas that you plan together in a total
planning run.

You enter the key for the planning run on the initial screen for the total planning run. The total planning run then performs MRP
for the plants or MRP areas de ned in the scope of planning.

You can enter any number of plants or MRP areas in the scope of planning. However, you can only enter one MRP area. MRP is
then only performed for this MRP area.

If you have activated MRP for MRP areas, when you enter a plant, this includes all MRP areas for this plant.

Activities

1. Choose New Entries.

2. Enter a key and a description for the scope of planning that you would like to de ne. Save your entries.

3. Select the scope of planning and choose Sequence of Plants/MRP Areas.

4. Choose new entries and enter the plants or MRP areas in the sequence in which they are to be planned. The counter
determines the sequence.

5. Save your entries.

Further notes
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 207
 7/10/2024
You can perform the total planning run for the scope of planning online or in the background mode. However, the
planning run, must always be started using parallel processing.

Planning le entries created using the stock transfer are automatically observed during the planning run. This ensures
that a material is also correctly planned in all plants affected, even in the case of stock transfer processing.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Display Total Planning

App ID: /ISDFPS/PUWNR_V

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Planning
De ne Scope of Planning for Total Planning .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Material Requirement Planning Controllers

Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage MRP Controller (/ISDFPS/T024D_U)

Display MRP Controller (/ISDFPS/T024D_V)

Manage MRP Controller

App ID: /ISDFPS/T024D_U

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Master
Data De ne MRP Controllers .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

De ne MRP Controllers

Short Text

De ne a number that is assigned to the MRP controller.

Use

The MRP controller is a person or a group of persons responsible for monitoring material availability. You can use the number
entered here, for example, to select the planning results for each MRP controller.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 208
 7/10/2024
Every material that is relevant to the planning run must be assigned an MRP controller number in the material master record.

You can also determine a speci c person for backorder processing who receives a mail if a goods receipt was posted for a
missing part. You must enter the email name of this person in the eld entitled, recipient name.

You can also de ne a person or a group of persons, who are to informed if you send a mail from the MRP list or
stock/requirements list to the MRP controller for the material displayed.

Actions

Enter the MRP controller and maintain the mail recipient if necessary.

Display MRP Controllers

App ID: /ISDFPS/T024D_V

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Master
Data De ne MRP Controllers .

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Routes
Please nd information about the following apps below:

Manage Declaration Planning Scope Routes (/ISDFPS/TVRO_U)

Display Declaration Planning Scope Routes (/ISDFPS/TVRO_V)

Manage Loading Points per Shipping Point (/ISDFPS/TROAL_U)

Display Loading Points per Shipping Point (/ISDFPS/TROAL_V)

Manage Declaration Planning Scopes (/ISDFPS/TROLZ_U)

Display Declaration Planning Scopes (/ISDFPS/TROLZ_V)

Manage Department Country/Region and Zone per Shipping Point (/ISDFPS/TVTRF_U)

Display Department Country/Region and Zone per Shipping Point (/ISDFPS/TVTRF_V)

Manage Transport Zones (/ISDFPS/TZONE_U)

Display Transport Zones (/ISDFPS/TZONE_V)

Manage Declaration Planning Scope Routes

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVRO_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes De ne
Routes De ne Routes and Stages .

De ne Routes and Stages

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 209
 7/10/2024
In this workstep, you de ne routes and route stages. You also have the option of maintaining the transportation connection
point from here.

De nition of routes

Activities

To de ne the routes, proceed as follows:

1. Check which routes are relevant for you.

2. De ne the routes. Enter an alphanumeric key with a maximum of 6 digits. Also enter a text description for each route.

3. If necessary, enter further data for your route. This data includes:

Shipping type

You can assign a shipping type to the route, to the preliminary leg, and to the subsequent leg.

Transportation service agent

Transit time

Transit planning lead time

Factory calendar, work time

 Note
Note: You must have already de ned the factory calendar before you can work with it (see section De ne
calendar).

Driving time (transit time minus breaks, distance)

You can assign a mode of transport to the routes for processing export activities. For information about this, see
the section De ne customs offices and modes of transport.

Further notes

Two additional functions are available on the route screen:

Check and compare the route values for the transit time, driving time, and distance with the total for the respective
values in the route stages.

Here the system checks whether the value total for the transit time in the stages is greater than or the same as the
value in the route. In the case of the driving time and the distance, the system checks whether the values total in the
stages is exactly the same as the value in the route for the transit time.

Copying the values total in the route stages into the value in the route

To initiate the check, select all the routes that you want to check and then select "Check." After the check, only those
routes remain selected where the system has found inconsistencies between the values in the route and the values in
the stages. You now have the option of copying the totaled values from the route stages by leaving the routes with
inconsistencies as they are and by selecting "Copy values." The values of the route are overwritten by the values from
the stages.

De nition of route stages

On the screen for the de nition of the route stages, you have two display options. Double-column display shows the starting
point and the destination point of the stage. You select this display if type 2 (load transfer point) or type 3 (border crossing

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 210
 7/10/2024
point) stages exist. Single-column display is advisable if the route only contains type 1 (transportation) stages and no
inconsistencies occur. In single-column display, only the starting point is displayed, since the starting point of the next stage is
the destination point of the previous stage. The destination point does not therefore have to be displayed and there is more
room for detailed information, such as the shipping type, transportation service agent, total duration, and so on.

Activities

To de ne the route stages, proceed as follows:

1. Check which stages are relevant for you.

2. De ne the stages.

Enter the starting point and, if required, the destination point. To enter a point between the other points, position the
cursor on the point in front of which you wish to insert a new one and select Insert. To create a new point, select Create

3. Maintain the detailed information about the stage. For example, you can specify the transportation service agent, the
distance, the shipping type, or the driving time.

Further notes

For maintenance of detailed information, you can have values proposed, such as the total duration, distance, etc. from other
routes. The system checks all stages in other routes that have the same starting and destination points, and perhaps also have
the same shipping type, transportation service agent, leg indicator, and stage type, if the respective entries were made. You can
display default values for all values of all stages, or only for special stages or for certain parameters, such as distance and unit.
It is possible to select lines as well as columns. If you select both individual stages as well as individual parameters and default
values, values are only proposed for the intersection selection values. If, for example, you select stage 3 and the columns for
distance and unit, and then choose the value default, the system proposes only the distance (with unit) for stage 3, if the value
was already maintained in another route.

Note about automatic shipment

Select the entries you want shipped and then choose Table view -> Shipment. You can still check the contents of these entries
and then either transfer them into the transfer order you created or delete them.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Manage Loading Points per Shipping Point

App ID: /ISDFPS/TROAL_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes Route
Determination De ne Allowed Actual Route By Proposed Route .

De ne Allowed Actual Route By Proposed Route

Manually de ne an alternative route to the proposed route determined by the system.

Use

You can de ne alternative actual routes for each proposed route.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 211
 7/10/2024
The proposed route is the route determined by the system. The actual routes are the allowed alternative routes which you can
enter manually in the sales document instead of the proposed route. When route determination is repeated in the delivery, the
actual route can be used instead of the proposed route.

You can check the actual routes to establish whether they are allowed (see Specify route determination for each delivery type).

Prerequisites

You have de ned the routes.

Activities

1. Check which proposed routes can be replaced by actual routes, if necessary.

2. Enter the allowed actual routes for each proposed route.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Manage Declaration Planning Scopes

App ID: /ISDFPS/TROLZ_U

This app is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes Route
Determination Maintain Route Determination .

Maintain Route Determination

Set route determination for a sales order or a delivery.

Use

You can set route determination for each departure country/region / zone and each destination country/region / receiving
zone in the sales order delivery.

In the sales order, the route determination is dependent upon the following factors:

Departure country/region / zone

Destination country/region / receiving zone

Shipping conditions

Transportation group

In a delivery, route determination is dependent on the above list and one additional factor, the weight group.

To maintain new combinations of departure countries/regions / zones and destination countries/regions / zones, you can:

Enter countries and zones in the table manually by choosing New Entries.

Select all possible combinations for a shipping point and destination country, for example, by choosing New Entries and
then Enter Further Combinations. Simply enter the desired shipping point and destination country on the dialog box and
choose All Combinations. The departure zone and all destination zones de ned for the shipping point and destination
country/region you speci ed then appear automatically. If you only specify the shipping point, all destination zones
appear for all countries/regions in the table.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 212
 7/10/2024
On the screen displaying departure countries/zones assigned to destination countries/zones, you can position the cursor on a
shipping point, departure country, departure zone, customer, destination country or destination zone. The system then goes to
the line corresponding to the cursor position (shipping point 001, for example). If the desired entry does not exist, the system
goes to the next table entry and displays a message to this effect.

To set the route determination in the order, choose Route Determination Without Weight Group (Order) for each combination of
departure country/region / zone and destination country/region / zone. For delivery route determination, choose Route
Determination with Weight Group (Delivery). Then, enter a route for a combination of in uencing factors (for example, shipping
conditions, transport group and weight group).

There are various ways to enter routes:

Choose New Entries to manually enter combinations of in uencing factors with the desired route.

Choose New Entries and then Enter Further Combinations to display all in uencing factors that do not yet have a
corresponding route maintained for them. You can then enter the routes that you would like to add and choose Delete
Init. Routes. This action only transfers maintained entries into the table. In other words, entries for which no route is
maintained (those whose route eld is blank), are not transferred.

You can only maintain generic entries during route determination in a delivery. This means you can enter a route for a line that
does not contain a shipping condition or a transportation group or in which you have only one shipping condition and no
transportation group.

Enter a proposed route for determination in the order and an actual route for determination in the delivery.

You can control which routes given in the delivery (actual routes) may overwrite the routes given in the order (proposed routes)
in the activity De ne allowed actual route by proposed route.

The entries are displayed in such a way that a line only contains an entry when that entry differs from the previous one,
resulting in a clear, easily comprehensible arrangement of information. For example, you can easily identify all the entries for
shipping condition 01 (As Soon As Possible) because all the lines under that entry are blank until you come to the next shipping
condition, 02 (Standard).

Further notes

The customer exit 0VRF001 is also provided to assist you in developing an individual route determination or modifying the
existing route determination.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Manage Department Country/Region and Zone per Shipping Point

App ID: /ISDFPS/TVTRF_U

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes
Route Determination Maintain Country and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point .

Maintain Country and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point

Assign countries/regions and transportation zones to previously de ned shipping points.

Use

You can assign countries/regions and transportation zones that you previously de ned for each shipping point.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 213
 7/10/2024
Activities

Enter a country/region key and transportation zone for each shipping point.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Manage Transport Zones

App ID: /ISDFPS/TZONE_U

This application is the same as the Customizing activity Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes
Route Determination De ne Transportation Zones .

De ne Transportation Zones

De ne transportation zones according to country/region.

Use

You can de ne transportation zones according to country/region and depending on your company's needs.

Transportation zones represent delivery recipient (ship-to party) regions or delivery shipper (supplier) regions.

After considering the ship-to party's transportation zone and other factors such as:

Country/region of origin and destination

Shipping conditions

Transportation groups

the system automatically suggests a suitable route during sales order and outbound delivery processing.

Example

You can de ne transportation zones according to the zip code system of a country or region.

Activities

De ne the transportation zones you need for each country or region and enter the corresponding description.

 Note
If you are using these apps in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation Additional Functions.

Copy Material Master Data

App ID: /ISDFPS/MATMAS_COPY

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 214
 7/10/2024
If you create a new force element or change the material equipment for a force element, you have to create relevant material
master data so that the system can support the logistics processes (procurement, inventory management, material
requirements planning, and so on) for this force element.

Prerequisites
You have to make settings in the material master in the following views:

General basic material data

Material views for the plant and storage location for the MRP stock and provisions areas

Material views required to plan provisions MRP areas

Material views for the distribution chains and sales organizations assigned to the storage locations

Material views for the warehouse number and storage types if you are using SAP Warehouse Management

Material valuation view for the plant

Key Features
Creation of Force Elements

You can create new material master data based on a template force element. This follow-up action is triggered when the status
of a force element changes to Active.

For more information, see Checks and Follow-Up Actions for Status Change.

Adaption of Force Elements

Force elements can change during routine operations. This can be for the following reasons:

New exible material planning objects (FMPOs) are assigned, meaning that authorized materials are adjusted.

If you assign new FMPOs to a force element in the Manage Force Elements app, the system updates the change entry in
the background.

These change entries are processed at regular intervals using the report /ISDFPS/FDP_CHANGES_EXECUTE, and the
material master data is created for the materials for the new FMPOs assigned. See also Report: Implement
Organizational Changes.

Supply relationships change where stock is held by the supplier.

To simplify the creation of these material master views, you can use the app Copy Material Master Data
(/ISDFPS/MATMAS_COPY), which you can call up for background processing.

You can use the BAdI /ISDFPS/MATMASSRCDET to specify the source for copying material master data. For more information,
see Customizing, under Defense Forces & Public Security Materials Management Business Add Ins BAdI: De ne
Templates for Creating Material Master Data .

If you also enter the storage location in the template, the system copies all of the warehouse number data to the new force
element as default values for the same storage location.

NATO Stock Numbers

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 215
 7/10/2024

Use
The NATO stock number (NSN) is part of the NATO Codi cation System (NCS) and is used as an alternative material number
for standardized and NATO-wide grouping and classi cation of materials. All NATO stock numbers have the same structure and
length. For every material managed in the NATO states, a unique NATO stock number exists, which forms the basis for an
effective supply chain and interoperability.

Every NATO stock number (NSN) is represented by a 13-digit code, which includes the 4-digit NATO Supply Classi cation (NSC)
code and the 9-digit national item identi cation number (NIIN). The NSN is constructed as follows:

XXXX XXXXXXXXX (for example, 5905 123264478)

NATO Stock Number

The rst four digits of the NSN represent the NATO Supply Classi cation (NSC) code. The rst two digits of the NSC code
stand for the material group, which groups materials with identical physical or functional properties. The third and fourth digits
of the NSC code indicate the material class, which further distinguishes materials within a material group.

The last nine digits of the NSN represent the National Item Identi er Number (NIIN). The rst two digits of the NIIN represent
the country/region ID number. The last seven digits form the material sequence number, which itself has no signi cance, but
together with the country/region ID number, uniquely identi es a material.

Integration
In the system, information about the NATO stock number is displayed in the Basic Data 1 view of the material master record in
the NATO Stock Number area. You can display the rst four digits for the material group and material class in the Group/Class
eld. You can enter, change, and display the nine digits for the country ID and material sequence number in the NIIN eld.

Prerequisites
In Customizing for Defense & Security, you have performed the following activities under Materials Management NATO
Stock Number/Manufacturer Part Number :

General Settings for NATO Stock Number (view /ISDFPS/CNSN)

De ne whether you want to create NATO stock numbers as master data. To do so, select the Use NSN Master Data
indicator.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 216
 7/10/2024
De ne Groups/Classes for NATO Stock Number (view /ISDFPS/CNSN_GC)

De ne the groups/classes and the corresponding language-dependent descriptions. You can only create groups and
classes with xed assignments. By choosing Goto Translation , you can create descriptions in additional languages.

Features
You can use these apps to create, change and display a NATO stock number to support your unique material item of supply
process. It can be used throughout the entire lifecycle of items of supply, from procurement through to disposal and by all levels
in your organizational structure.

Key Features

You can use these apps this app to:

Manage a NATO stock number with all the relevant details, such as descriptions and status.

Verify to which materials this NATO stock number is assigned in the material master record.

Display the change history of the NATO stock number. If you have changed a NATO stock number, the system documents
this change in change documents. You can display all change documents here with the corresponding detailed
information.

Creating a NATO Stock Number

To create a NATO stock number, enter a unique 9-digit number.

Enter data on the Basic Data and Descriptions facets.

In the Attributes section of the Basic Data facet, enter a descriptive text and a group/class assignment. These two entries are
used for information purposes only and have no other function.

You can also maintain the following data:

Item Name Code to describe the NATO stock number

NSN Is Active indicator to specify that this NATO stock number is used

NIIN Status Code to denote the current status of a NIIN

Demilitarization Code to identify each item requiring demilitarization and the type of demilitarization

Replacement Number Category Code to designate the relationship of the replacement number to the item of supply

Replacement Variation Code to indicate whether the cited replacement number identi es an item or is for information
purposes only

Replacement NSN to be determined using a cancellation process.

For the description entered on the Basic Data facet, you can create the corresponding versions for other languages on the
Descriptions facet.

Use NATO Stock Number as Master Data

If you have speci ed in Customizing that you want to use NATO stock numbers as master data (the Use NSN Master Data
indicator is selected), the following functions are available:

In the material master record for a material (transaction MM02), you can only enter an NSN if you have already created
the corresponding master data for this NSN.

In the material master record, the system displays both the NIIN and the group/class that you have assigned to the NSN.
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 217
 7/10/2024
You can use the search help to nd materials for a group/class.

Deleting a NATO Stock Number

When you access a NATO stock number in the change mode, you can also delete the number if it is not assigned to a material
master record. This information is displayed on the Materials tab page.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
Three apps are provided for creating, changing, and displaying NATO stock numbers:

Create NATO Stock Number(/ISDFPS/NSN1)

Change NATO Stock Number(/ISDFPS/NSN2)

Display NATO Stock Number(/ISDFPS/NSN3)

 Note
If you are using this app in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the corresponding
documentation NATO Stock Number.

Manufacturer Part Number

De nition
The manufacturer part number (MPN) is a code or number used by a manufacturer or vendor to identify a material or part.

For more information about the manufacturer part number, see Manufacturer Part Number (MPN).

The long manufacturer part number (long MPN) is a function that extends the length of the standard MPN eld. This function
can be activated separately, and it disables the direct use of the regular MPN eld. The long MPN data can be maintained in the
Product Master app.

Use
The long MPN, which is shown in the basic view of the Product Master app, can contain up to 60 characters. Please note that
the 40-character MPN eld is still used in all processes in all standard SAP applications.

When the 60-character MPN eld value is saved, a subset of the data is also copied into the regular 40-character MPN eld. To
ensure uniqueness, customers need to de ne a rule, which speci es how the 40-character eld is lled from the 60-character
eld. The settings are dependent on the material type.

 Note

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 218
 7/10/2024
If you have only activated the business function S/4HANA Defense MPN NSN (IS_S4DFS_MPN), you nd the Customizing
activities listed above under Material Management NATO Stock Number/Manufacturer Part Number .

If you have also activated the business function S/4HANA Defense & Security (IS_S4DFS_1), you nd the Customizing
activities listed above under Defense & Security Materials Management NATO Stock Number/Manufacturer Part
Number .

To enable the MPN, you need to make the following Customizing settings:

You set the indicator to use the long MPN in Customizing under Defense & Security Materials Management NATO
Stock Number/Manufacturer Part Number General Settings for Long Manufacturer Part Number .

You de ne formatting rules for the material display types in Customizing under Defense & Security Materials
Management NATO Stock Number/Manufacturer Part Number Format Rules for Material Number Output .

You assign a material display type to a material type in Customizing under Defense & Security Materials
Management NATO Stock Number/Manufacturer Part Number Assign Material Display Type to Material Type .

Personal and Functional Equipment

In addition to the material equipment functions for a person, the portal applications for personal and functional equipment
provide you with enhanced functions based on the authorized materials.

As an alternative to the individual material assignment report, you can use the following applications according to the use case
involved:

Reports:

Display Personal and Functional Equipment Status

Monitor Personal and Functional Equipment

Compare Authorized with Actual Materials for Person

Personal Equipment:

Issue Personal Equipment

Mass Issue Personal Equipment

Return Personal Equipment

Mass Return Personal Equipment

Manage Return Date for Personal Equipment

Transfer Personal Equipment

Functional Equipment:

Issue Functional Equipment

Mass Issue Functional Equipment

Return Functional Equipment

Mass Return Functional Equipment

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 219
 7/10/2024
Manage Return Date for Functional Equipment

Transfer Functional Equipment

A function that helps you resolve posting issues is available in both dialog mode or as a scheduled job. You can use a Defense
Forces and Public Security (DFPS) structures workbench to see the status of personal equipment and functional equipment at
personnel number, position, force element, or force element structure level.

Integration
These applications are included in the Business Package for Defense & Security as worksets.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be met:

SAP Enterprise Portal 7.0x with a connection to the S/4HANA system that has already been installed or a NW Business
Client with a corresponding PFCG role that contains the new applications and is assigned to the users.

In the portal, the Defense applications are assigned to the work center pool role and are found under the Defense &
Security node. To be able to start these applications, the work center pool role must be assigned to the user, or the
worksets found in this role must be assigned to one of the user's existing roles.

You have made the general Customizing settings in the S/4HANA system.

You have made the general Customizing settings for the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution.

You have made the Customizing settings for equipping persons, by choosing Defense & Security Materials
Management Equipment of Persons .

Features
You can use the applications for issuing personal and functional equipment to issue personal and functional equipment for a
required period in three steps. You can create the list of materials to be issued either manually or based on a person's
authorized material equipment. The system supports serial numbers, handling units, and batches. The mass issuing application
supports the issue of materials to multiple persons in a single process.

You can use the applications for returning personal and functional equipment to return personal and functional equipment in
three steps. The mass return application supports the return of material that was issued to multiple persons in a single process.

In the rst step (Identi cation) for each application, you select the personnel for whom equipment is to be issued or returned.
In the second step (Material Selection), you select the materials for each person, and in the third step (Con rmation), you post
your selection.

The system can create an issuing or return document as a PDF le for each selected person for issued and returned materials.
You can print the PDF document in the background. An application can be used to reprint issue or return documents for multiple
persons, or to print currently issued materials to selected persons.

Planned Return Date

You can use applications for changing the planned return date that is de ned for each item during issue. The original planned
return date and change history is available for each item.

Posting Issued Materials as Consumed

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 220
 7/10/2024
You can select issued materials and then post the listed materials as consumed. This posting updates infotype PA0800 as
required for returning personal or functional equipment. You can use this function in dialog mode, or you can schedule it as a job
that runs in the background.

Personal and Functional Equipment in the Authorized/Actual Comparison

The authorized/actual comparison observes the assignments of exible material planning objects (FMPOs) to functional
equipment. However, the authorized/actual comparison does not observe the assignments to personal equipment.

Personal Equipment Status and Functional Equipment Status

As mentioned above, the authorized/actual comparison does not observe assignments to personal equipment. However, the
personal equipment status and functional equipment status provide an overview of all FMPOs assigned as personal equipment
or functional equipment to a position. This overview shows the assigned quantity and issued quantities at FMPO level if a person
is assigned to the selected position. You can view by position, personnel number, force element, or force element structure level.

Issue Personal and Functional Equipment

App ID: /ISDFPS/WD_GAF_PE_ISSUE

You can use this app to issue personal and functional equipment for a required period in three steps. You can create the list of
materials to be issued either manually or based on a person's authorized material equipment. The system supports serial
numbers, handling units, and batches.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Issue equipment to a single person

Issue based on authorized equipment

Issue based on manual selection of material equipment

Select material equipment using exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
Step One: Identi cation

In the rst step, you specify the persons to whom you want to issue equipment. You can specify individual persons. You must also
enter both the usage type and the start and end date for the position.

You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. You can use the value help or F4 to search for speci c entries.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 221
 7/10/2024
If you frequently make the same entries when you issue equipment, you can use the User-De ned Values to save the entries as
user settings so that the application starts with these as default entries.

Once you have made entries in all mandatory elds, choose Enter. The Persons list displays the selected persons.

If a person is unable to collect their equipment, you can use the Delivery indicator to create an outbound delivery instead of
issuing the material. In this case, you do not post the material issue to this application. The system generates the related goods
movements once the goods issue has been posted to the delivery.

 Note
The delivery process only works if the delivery type is maintained in Customizing under Defense & Security Materials
Management Equipment of Persons De ne Project Stock .

If you set the Auth. Equipment indicator in the second step based on the previously de ned authorized materials for the
selected person, the system generates a material issue list for you to review and adjust as required. If you do not select the
indicator, you can enter the material for each item. You can also select the material based on various stock lists.

Once you have entered all required data and selected a person, you can choose Next to access the material selection.

Step Two: Material Selection

In the second step, the system shows the list of materials to be issued to the selected person. If you have set the Auth.
Equipment indicator in the rst step, the system displays the related authorized materials. Otherwise, you can choose Auth.
Equipment to select materials from the authorized materials.

If you want to select the materials to be issued from stock lists, choose Material Selection. A dialog box opens in which you can
choose the material corresponding to FMPOs and variants. If this material is serialized, the serial number must be speci ed for
each quantity of material on the serial number tab. Use the Transfer button to transfer the selected materials (with or without
serial numbers) to the list of materials to be issued.

In the material list, in the Issue column, you can set the appropriate indicator for those rows for which an issue is to be posted.
You can use the buttons ID: Set Issue or ID: Delete Issue to set or remove the indicator for all selected rows collectively.

Choose Copy to copy selected rows and add them to the list. Choose Delete to remove selected rows from the list.

If you choose Check List, the system checks all rows in the material list, regardless of whether the Issue indicator is set. Before
posting, you can use Check Posting to check whether there are any errors that would prevent posting. The system only checks
the items for which the Issue indicator is set.

You can choose Document Preview to generate a PDF document as a preview of the issue document, based on the data
entered for the materials to be issued.

Once you have entered all required data, choose Issue Material to post the material issue.

Step Three: Con rmation

In this step, the system displays the numbers of the material documents used for posting. You can create and print an issue
document with all relevant data as a PDF for the materials issued to a person.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Issue of Personal Equipment and Issue of Functional Equipment.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 222
 7/10/2024

Mass Issue of Personal and Functional Equipment

App ID: /ISDFPS/WD_GAF_PE_ISSUE_M

You can use this app to issue personal and functional equipment to multiple persons for a required period in three steps. You
can create the list of materials to be issued either manually or based on a person's authorized material equipment. The system
supports serial numbers, handling units, and batches.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Issue equipment to multiple persons

Issue based on authorized equipment

Issue based on manual selection of material equipment

Select material equipment by exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities

Step One: Identi cation

In the rst step, you specify the persons to whom you want to issue equipment. You can specify individual persons or select
multiple persons collectively. You must also enter the usage type as well as the start date and end date of the position.

You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. You can use the value help or F4 to search for speci c entries.

If you frequently make the same entries when you issue equipment, you can use the User-De ned Values to save these entries
as user settings, so that the application starts with these as default entries.

Once you have made entries in all mandatory elds, choose Enter. The Persons list displays the selected persons.

If a person is unable to collect their equipment, you can use the Delivery indicator to create an outbound delivery instead of
issuing the material. In this case, you do not post the material issue to this application, the system generates the related goods
movements once the goods issue has been posted to the delivery.

If you set the Auth. Equipment indicator, in the second step, based on the previously de ned authorized materials for the
selected person, the system generates a material issue list for you to review and adjust as required. If you do not select the
indicator, you can enter the material for each item. You can also select the material based on various stock lists.

Once you have entered all required data and selected a person, choose Next to access the material selection.

Step Two: Material Selection

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 223
 7/10/2024
In the second step, the system shows the list of materials to be issued for all selected persons. If you selected the Auth.
Equipment indicator in the rst step, the system displays the related authorized materials for all selected persons and their
personnel number is displayed in the list. This is the personalized view. Otherwise, you can manually enter the material numbers
and quantities in the material selection list. In this case, all entered materials are issued to the selected personnel numbers, but
the personnel number is not available in the material selection list. You are working in the anonymous view of the material
selection list.

If you are working in the anonymous view and want to select materials from stock lists, choose Material Selection. A dialog box
opens in which you can choose the material corresponding to FMPOs and variants. If this material is serialized, the serial
number must be speci ed for each quantity of material on the serial number tab. Use the Transfer button to transfer the
selected materials (with or without serial numbers) to the list of materials to be issued.

In the material list of the anonymous view, in the Issue column, you can select the appropriate indicator for those rows for which
an issue is to be posted. You can choose ID: Set Issue or ID: Delete Issue to select or clear the indicator for all selected rows.

In the anonymous view, you can choose Copy to copy selected rows and add them to the list. You can choose Delete Selected
Material to remove selected rows from the list. Once you have entered all required data in the anonymous view, choose
Personalization View to switch to the personalized view. You can post the material issue in this view only. You can enter serial
numbers and batch numbers in the material list or in a dialog for each person if you previously chose Ser.No./Batch.

If you choose Check List, the system checks all rows in the material list, regardless of whether the Issue indicator is set. Before
posting, you can use Check Posting to check whether there are any errors that would prevent posting. The system only checks
the items for which the Issue indicator is set.

You can choose Document Preview to generate a PDF document as a preview of the issue document, based on the data
entered for the materials to be issued. This preview document displays the personnel number for the selected item. If multiple
lines for multiple personnel numbers are selected, the preview document displays items for the person you selected rst.

Once you have entered all required data, choose Issue Materials to post the material issue for all selected persons.

Step Three: Con rmation

In this step, the system displays the selected personnel numbers in a list. A reference number is created for each personnel
number for the background posting job. The system displays a message about the start of the background posting job. You can
choose Refresh to update the posting status for each personnel number in the list.

If the posting is successful, the error indicator is green and the material posting document numbers are entered. If background
printing is not activated, the printout of the issue documents for all selected persons can now be started.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Mass Issue of Personal or Functional Equipment.

Return Personal and Functional Equipment

App ID: /ISDFPS/WD_GAF_PE_RETURN

You can use this app to return personal and functional equipment in three steps.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 224
 7/10/2024
Return equipment from a single person

Return equipment based on equipment that already been issued

Filter issued material equipment by exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
Step One: Identi cation

In the rst step, you specify the persons for whom you want to return equipment. You can specify individual persons. You must
also enter the usage type and the start and end date for the position.

You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. You can use the value help or F4 to search for speci c entries.

If you frequently make the same entries when you return equipment, you can use the User Values button to save these entries
as user settings, so that you always start the application with these default entries.

Once you have made entries in all mandatory elds, choose Enter. The Persons list displays the selected persons.

If you select the Automatically Create Material List indicator, the system generates an issued material list for the selected
person in step two, containing the materials issued to this person . You only need to check this list, and adjust it as required. If
you do not set the indicator, in step two, you can manually enter the material for each item or select from the list of materials
issued to this person.

If you select an FMPO in the Further Settings section, the issued material list is ltered by the selected FMPO. Check this list,
and adjust it as required. If you do not de ne an FMPO, in step two, you can manually enter the material for each item or select
from the list of materials issued to this person.

Once you have entered all of the required data and selected a person, choose Next to access to the material selection.

Step Two: Material Selection

In the second step, the system displays the list of materials to be returned for the selected person. If you have set the
Automatically Create Material List indicator in the rst step, the system displays the related issued materials. Otherwise, you
can enter the materials manually, or use Choose Materials in the Material Selection dialog box to select the materials to be
returned from the list of materials issued to this person. Use the Transfer button to transfer the selected materials to the list of
materials to be returned.

In the material list, in the OK column, you can set the appropriate indicator for those rows for which you want to post a return.
You can use the buttons Set OK or Delete OK to set or remove the indicator for all selected rows collectively.

Choose Delete Selected Rows to remove selected rows from the list.

Make entries in the mandatory elds Return Plant, Return SLoc, Return Date, and the Material Assignment Status for each
item individually or in the user pro le for all items. If required, you can add a comment for the return. Enter a conditon code if
this is required by the material.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 225
 7/10/2024
If you choose Check List, the system checks all rows in the material list, regardless of whether the OK indicator is set. Before
posting the return, you can use Check Posting to check whether there are any errors that would prevent posting. The system
only checks the items for which the OK indicator is set. If the system reports that the posting test run was not successful, you
can use the Log button to display the error messages issued.

You can choose Document Preview to generate a PDF document as a preview of the return document, based on the data
entered for the materials to be returned.

Once you have entered and checked all required data, choose Return Material to post the material return.

Step Three: Con rmation

In this step, the system displays the numbers of the material documents used for posting. You can create and print a return
document with all relevant data as a PDF for the materials returned by a person.

You can continue to return material for other persons, or exit the application.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Return of Personal Equipment and Return of Functional Equipment.

Mass Return of Personal and Functional Equipment

App ID: /ISDFPS/WD_GAF_PE_RETURN_M

You can use these applications to return personal or functional equipment to multiple persons.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Return equipment from multiple persons

Return equipment based on already issued equipment

Filter issued material equipment by exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities

Step One: Identi cation

In the rst step, you select the persons for whom you want to return equipment. You can select individual or multiple persons.
You must enter the usage type and start date and end date of the position. You must make entries in the elds marked with a
red asterisk. You can use the value help or F4 to search for speci c entries.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 226
 7/10/2024
If you frequently make the same entries when you return equipment, you can use the User Values button to save these entries
as user settings, so that you always start the application with these default entries.

Once you have made entries in all mandatory elds, chooose Enter. The Persons list displays the selected persons.

If you select the Automatically Create Material List indicator, the system generates an issued material list for the selected
person in step two, containing the materials issued to this person. Checkthis list, and adjust it as required. You can use the lter
options to restrict the materials entered in the material return list. If you do not select the indicator, in step two, you can
manually enter the material issued to all selected persons.

If you select an FMPO in the Further Settings section, the issued material list is ltered by the selected FMPO. Check this list,
and adjust it as required. If you have not selected an FMPO, in step two, you can manually enter the material for each item or
select from the list of materials issued to this person.

Once you have entered all required data and selected the persons, choose Next to access to the material selection.

Step Two: Material Selection

In the second step, the system displays the list of materials to be returned for all selected persons. If you have selected the
Automatically Create Material List indicator in the rst step, the system displays the related issued materials. You are working
in the personalized view where personnel numbers are displayed in the list. If you did not select the Automatically Create
Material List indicator, you are working in the anonymous view. In this view, you can manually enter the materials to be returned
from the list of materials issued for all selected persons. Personnel numbers are not included in the list.

Once you have entered the required data in the anonymous view, choose Personalization View to switch to the personalized
view. You can post the material return in the personalized view only. In both views of the material list, you can select the OK
column for the rows in which you want to post a return. You can use the buttons Set OK or Delete OK to set or remove the
indicator for all selected rows collectively.

In the anonymous view, you can enter materials by using Choose Materials in the Material Selection dialog box to select
materials to be returned from the list of materials issued to all selected persons. Use the Transfer button to transfer the
selected materials to the list of materials to be returned.

You can use Delete Selected Rows to remove selected rows from the list in the anonymous view.

Enter data in the Return Plant, Return SLoc, Return Date, and Material Assignment Status elds for each item in the
anonymous view or in the user pro le for all items. If required, you can add a comment for the return. You can enter a condition
code for the material if required.

If you choose Check List, the system checks all rows in the material list for which the OK indicator is selected.

In the anonymous view, you can choose Document Preview to generate a PDF document as a preview of the return document
based on the data entered for the materials to be returned. The system uses the rst personnel number you selected in the list
for the preview of the return document. If multiple lines for multiple personnel numbers are selected, the preview document
displays items for the person you selected rst.

Once you have entered and checked all required data in the anonymous view, choose Personalization View to create the
material list with personnel numbers and switch to the personalization view. In the personalized view, you can choose Delete
Selected Material to remove material items for the selected persons and Delete Selected Person to remove material items for
the persons with selected items in the list.

Before posting the mass return, you can choose Check Posting to check for errors that would prevent posting. The system only
checks items for which the OK indicator is selected. If the system reports errors, the error indicators are red in the
corresponding lines.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 227
 7/10/2024
In the personalization view, you can also choose Document Preview to create a preview of the return document for the rst
person you selected. Once you have entered and checked the required data in the anonymous view, choose Return Material to
post the material return.

Step Three: Con rmation

In this step, the system displays the selected personnel numbers in a list. Reference numbers are created for each personnel
number to control the background posting job. The system displays a message at the start of the background posting job. You
can choose Refresh to update the posting information for each personnel number in the list.

If the posting is successful, the error indicator is green and the material posting document numbers are entered. If background
printing is not activated, you can start the printout of the return documents for all selected persons.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Mass Return of Personal or Functional Equipment.

Manage the Personal and Functional Equipment Return Date

App ID: /ISDFPS/WD_GAF_ADP_END_DT

You can use this app to change the return date for issued items of personal and functional equipment.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Change the return date of an equipment issue

Change the return date to a prede ned date

Change the return date based on a daily/monthly/annual calculation

Filter issued material equipment by exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
Step One: Identi cation

In the rst step, you specify the persons to whom the items are issued and the planned return date that should be used. You can
select individual or multiple persons. You must enter the usage type and start date and end date of the position. You must make
entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. You can use the value help or F4 to search for speci c entries.

Once you have made entries in all mandatory elds, choose Enter. The Persons list displays the selected persons.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 228
 7/10/2024
If you select the Serial Number Usage indicator, only serialized issued materials are selected. To lter the issued items in the list
in step two by end date, batch expiration date, material, FMPO, material group, and external material group, you must select
data in the Further Settings section for those elds.

Once you have entered the required data, selected persons, and entered your lter settings, you can choose Next to change the
date.

Step Two: Change Date

In the second step, the system shows the ltered list of issued materials for the selected persons. You can enter the new
planned return date in the New End Date eld for each line item, or you can enter a new planned return date in the Date eld.
Choose Update to copy the new planned return date to the selected line items.

You can also enter the number of days, months, and years for adding these values to the current planned return dates for the
selected line items. Choose Add Date to complete the addition and transfer the result to the New End Date eld for the
selected line items.

Choose Delete Date to restore the current planned return date to the new end date. You can choose Display History to display
previous changes to the planned return date for the selected line items.

Choose Change End Date to change the planned return date for the line items for which you have entered a new end date.

Once you have changed all required data, choose Change End Date to save the changed end dates.

Step Three: Con rmation

In this step, the system displays the items with a new planned return date.

If background printing is not activated, you can print the change document by choosing Print Materials for All Persons. You can
continue to change the planned return date of issued material items for other persons or exit the application.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Planned Return Date.

Transfer Personal and Functional Equipment

App ID: /ISDFPS/WD_TRANSFER_PERNR

You can use this app to change the personnel number for items of personal and functional equipment that have been issued.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Transfer equipment between persons

Filter issued material equipment by exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 229
 7/10/2024
Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
Step One: Identi cation

In the rst step, you specify the persons to whom the items are issued. You can select individual or multiple persons. You must
enter the usage type and start date and end date of the position. You must make entries in the elds marked with a red
asterisk. You can use the value help or F4 to search for speci c entries.

Once you have made entries in all mandatory elds, choose Enter. The Persons list displays the selected persons. If you select
the Serial Number Usage indicator, only serialized issued materials are selected. To lter the issued items in the list in step two
by end date, batch expiration date, material, FMPO, material group, and external material group, you must select data in the
Further Settings section for those elds.

Once you have entered the required data and selected persons, you can choose Next to change the date.

Step Two: Change Person

In the second step, the system shows the ltered list of issued materials for the selected persons. You can enter the new
personnel number in the Current Person eld for each line item. Otherwise, you can enter a new personnel number in the
Person Number eld, select line items for which you want to change the personnel number and choose Change Person Number
to copy the new personnel number to the selected line items.

If you have selected several line items and you want to deselect those, choose Cancel Person Number.

You can choose Export to export the complete list or selected line items.

You can choose Display History to display previous changes to the personnel number for the selected line items.

Once you have changed all required data, choose Change Person to save the changed personnel numbers.

Step Three: Con rmation

In this step, the system displays the items with a new personnel number.

If background printing is not activated, you can print the change document by choosing Print Materials for All Persons. You can
continue to change the persons for issued material items or exit the application.

Display Personal and Functional Equipment Status

App ID: U0009

You can use this app to display the status of personal and functional equipment. The report shows the equipment issued to a
person or an organizational unit, along with the corresponding authorized equipment information.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Display actual equipment issue records

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 230
 7/10/2024
Display authorized equipment information

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
If active queries are available, you can choose the query for which you want to display the status.

In Personalization, you can manage your queries.

Step One: Select Object Type

In the rst step, you select an object type. You can choose between Equipment Status of Person or Equipment Status of Person
(Force Element).

Step Two: Maintain Criteria

In the second step, you specify the search criteria for the object type you have selected in the previous step. Select the key
date, the organizational units and the usage type for the object type Equipment Status of Person (Force Element). Select the
personnel number for the object type Equipment Status of Person.

Click Preview to view the equipment entries based on the selection.

Once you have entered all required data and the preview is correct, choose Next.

Step Three: Finish

In this step, you enter a query description and set the indicator to de ne whether the query is active.

Click Finish to save the query and run the report. A new window opens displaying a report for the equipment details. This report
mainly contains the authorized and the actual information.

Actual information is information entered on the selection screen about the equipment that is issued to the personnel number
or the force element (linked by position and personnel).

Authorized information is information entered on the selection screen about the authorized equipment (personal and functional
assignments of exible material planning objects (FMPOs) to force elements and positions, which is relevant to the personnel
number or force element.

 Note
If you are using these transactions in the context of SAP S/4HANA Defense Forces & Public Security, please see the
corresponding documentation Personal and Functional Equipment Status.

Monitor Personal and Functional Equipment

App ID: U0010

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 231
 7/10/2024
You can use this app to monitor the personal and functional equipment. The report shows the issue and return information for
the equipment along with material, person and stock information.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Display the list of equipment along with issue and return information

Display additional information for the material, person, stock and so on.

Filter the report output data by exible material planning objects (FMPOs)

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Activities
If active queries are available, you can choose the query for which you want to monitor the personal and functional equipment.

In Personalization, you can manage your queries.

Step One: Select Object Type

In the rst step, you select the object type Personal and Functional Equipment.

Step Two: Maintain Criteria

In the second step, you specify the search criteria. Select an issue date. Change the return date if required. The default return
date is 31.12.9999. Choose a usage type and an FMPO with a variant.

Click Preview to view the equipment entries based on the selection.

Once you have entered all required data and the preview is correct, choose Next.

Step Three: Finish

In this step, you enter a query description and set the indicator to indicate whether the query is active.

Click Finish to save the query. The query is executed, and a list of equipment records determined by the selection criteria is
displayed similar to the preview. The records show the FMPO ID and description of the equipment along with other information.

Interchangeability Code for Ammunition

De nition
Alphanumeric code to represent ammunition groups (different material or product numbers)

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 232
 7/10/2024

Use
The type of ammunition to be planned or consumed is often linked to multiple materials or product numbers when planning
ammunition requirements or documenting weapon systems that use ammunition.

Therefore, the different military organizations use different codes to aggregate an ammunition group (different material or
product numbers). This means that all types of ammunition (represented by their material or product number in SAP), that are
linked to that alphanumeric code, can be used for the respective weapon orweapon system. These codes are called
interchangeability codes for ammunition.

The interchangeability code for ammunition has eight alphanumeric digits.

Integration
You can create an interchangeability code for ammunition and then assign it to a product or a exible material planning object
(FMPO).

Loans of Non-Consumable Goods

Purpose
A loan is a temporary transfer of material between two organizational units.

In a loan transaction, the possessor of the material changes, but not the owner. The end of the loan period is the same as the
anticipated return date.

Prerequisites
Usually, a standard requisition would be submitted to the central Logistics department to try and cover the requirement using
conventional forms of procurement. Only if this procedure fails is a loan transaction triggered for the required non-consumable
goods (NCGs).

Process
Processing continues in the Materials Management component:

1. The stock transport requisition is released during a de ned approval procedure. This ultimately involves deciding who is
to issue the material (stock storage location).

2. The MRP controller converts the stock transport requisition to a stock transport order.

3. A delivery is created and picked for the stock transport order. If necessary, transportation is triggered.

4. The goods issue is posted and additional information is saved for the issuing force element:

Receiving force element

Material number/serial number, if available

Quantity

End of the loan period

5. Goods receipt posting

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 233
 7/10/2024
The goods receipt is posted to the Loan WBS element. The same information as for the goods issue is saved for the
receiving force element.

6. You can transfer the material by means of stock transfer (optional).

To ensure that the loan transaction does not affect the authorized/actual comparison, the return delivery is planned at the
same time as the material is loaned.

When a loan requisition is converted to an order, a return delivery requisition is created automatically. The return delivery
requisition (RD Loan) generates an expected receipt for the issuing force element and an expected issue for the receiving force
element.

Return Delivery

At the end of the loan period (when the return date is reached), the material is returned:

1. The return delivery is converted to a stock transport order.

2. A delivery is created for the stock transport order.

3. The delivery is picked.

4. Transportation is created (optional).

5. A goods issue is posted for the delivery.

6. A goods receipt is posted for the delivery for the receiving force element.

7. The material is transferred by means of stock transfer (optional).

Exceptions

In exceptional cases, loan requisitions can be created directly.

Report for Loans

You can use the structure evaluations application to display the following for a force element:

Which material from stock was issued in the form of a loan to which units

Which material was borrowed by others and placed in stock

The report provides comprehensive information about the loan transaction. From the overview screen, you can navigate directly
to the documents available for the loan transaction.

Result
The loan transaction does not give the issuer the option of requesting new NCGs. The receiver, on the other hand, can
still request the loaned NCG.

When a material is borrowed, real stock postings are made – a stock issue is posted on the issuing side and a stock
receipt on the receiving side. The actual stock is changed on both the receiving and the issuing side.

The stock postings enable the delivery and transportation processes from the standard SAP functions to be used.

For the loan transaction, the authorized/actual comparison must return the same result in the loan period as before the
loan.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 234
 7/10/2024

Maintenance

Purpose
The Maintenance area of the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution supports armed forces, police, and aid agencies in
both performing maintenance tasks in the domestic base, and with operations and exercises.

Implementation Considerations
You are familiar with the Maintenance Management component and have made the necessary settings in Customizing.

Integration
The Maintenance functions are integrated with the functions in the Plant Maintenance (PM) component.

Features
The following functions are available in the Maintenance area:

Forwarding Documents

Assignment of Technical Objects

Initial Datafeed for Master Equipment

Retirement of Master Equipment

Maintenance Book

Processing of Maintenance Orders

Mass Creation of Maintenance Noti cations

Mass Changes for Equipment

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can display the maintenance data and execute speci c features in the
following four SAP Fiori apps:

Find Technical Objects

Find Maintenance Noti cations

Find Maintenance Orders

Find Maintenance Orders and Operations

 Note
Use the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security Maintenance apps for defense-related tasks. If you do not use these apps, you
cannot use their features.

Related Information
Maintenance Management
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 235
 7/10/2024

Platforms

Use
Platforms identify a group of similar objects that describe certain business capabilities. They can be used to support
maintenance and logistics processes or for reporting purposes.

A platform code is the unique identi er of a platform that enables cross-domain reporting and analysis of information relating
to equipment that belongs to that platform and associated items (such as materials, projects, budgets).

A platform group is a data object used to represent platform codes and other platform groups in a hierarchical structure.

Platform Hierarchy
In the context of platforms, you use platform codes and platform groups as data objects in the system. Whilst platform codes
are used to identify platforms, platform groups are used to represent platform codes and other platform groups in a hierarchal
structure. The following gure shows a simple example of such a platform hierarchy.

The platform code is the leaf of the hierarchy. Platform groups are used as nodes and the root node of the hierarchy. Please
note that each hierarchy can only contain one platform group as a root node. You can create multiple platform hierarchies in the
system, as long as they have different platform groups and platform codes.

 Note
If both the platform code and platform group object types are used, the following rules apply:

It is possible to de ne several levels of platform groups within a hierarchy by assigning a platform group to a parent
platform group.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 236
 7/10/2024
A platform code can be de ned either without reference to any platform group, or can be assigned to a parent
platform group, thereby representing the leaf of a platform hierarchy.

It is not possible to de ne hierarchies of platform codes.

It is not possible to de ne a platform group as a child for a platform code.

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the platform data in the following SAP Fiori apps:

Manage Platform Codes

Assign Platform Codes

Manage Platform Codes

App ID: F4734

You can use this app in your role as a maintenance technician or in other related roles to de ne a hierarchy of platform groups
and platform codes.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Search for platform groups and codes.

Display platform groups and codes in list or hierarchy view.

Create a hierarchy of platform groups and codes.

Assign owner information to platform groups and codes.

Attach documents to platform groups and codes.

Activate or deactivate platform groups and codes.

Delete platform groups and codes.

Implement and execute customer-speci c checks when saving, such as checks for eld dependencies or mandatory
elds.

Display business objects assigned to a speci c platform code.

Display material for which a speci c platform code is de ned as the leading platform.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 237
 7/10/2024
Both the platform code and platform group object types are used in the Manage Platform Codes app. Therefore, the following
rules apply:

It is possible to de ne several levels of platform groups within a hierarchy by assigning a platform group to a parent
platform group.

A platform code can be de ned either without reference to any platform group, or can be assigned to a parent platform
group, thereby representing the leaf of a platform hierarchy.

It is not possible to de ne hierarchies of platform codes.

It is not possible to de ne a platform group as a child for a platform code.

Each object type has its own structure in the Manage Platform Codes app.

The structure of a platform code has a header section at the top of the screen and is de ned as follows:

General Information

Assignments

Administrative Information

Attachments

The structure for a platform group has a header section at the top of the screen and is de ned as follows:

General Information

Structure Information

Administrative Information

Attachments

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a platform code or platform group using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

Platform codes and platform groups can be viewed as a list or or a hierarchy view by choosing Go. The list view is displayed as a
default when you open the app.

 Note
The Platform Type eld indicates whether you have selected a platform code or a platform group.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

Create a Platform Code

When creating a platform code, choose Create Platform Code and make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 238
 7/10/2024
Note that you must de ne the platform ID and this is not done by the system automatically.

Create a Platform Group

You can create a platform group using the procedure described above for the platform code by choosing Create Platform
Group.

Note that you must de ne the platform ID and this is not done by the system automatically.

Basic Information About a Platform Code

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a platform code. You maintain this information in the header and
on the General Information, Assignments, Administrative Information and Attachment facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a platform code and provides you with the necessary context.

You can change the status of a platform code in the header. A platform code can be either Active or Inactive.

General Information
This facet shows the general data for the platform code. This facet contains three sections that display information about the
platform and the owner.

In the Owner Information section, you maintain information about the platform owner. First you choose the Platform Owner
Type followed by the Platform Owner ID, which you choose according to the platform owner type you selected.

By choosing AB (Department resp.), you select the responsible force element from your organizational structure as the
platform owner ID.

By choosing ST (Position resp.), you select the responsible position as the platform owner ID.

By choosing VU (User responsible), you select the responsible user as the platform owner ID.

By choosing VW (Person respons.), you select the responsible person as the platform owner ID.

Assignments
The Assignments facet displays the information related to the Business Objects Assignments and Assigned as Leading Platform
sections that are created using the Assign Platform Codes app. This is a read-only facet.

The Business Objects Assignments section displays the material, WBS element and cost center assignments created for the
platform code using the Assign Platform Codes app.

The Assigned as Leading Platform section displays materials that are potentially assigned to multiple platform codes and for
which the platform code that is currently being processed in the app is the leading one. Both the assignment of materials to
platform codes, and the de nition of the leading platform for materials with multiple platform code assignments is made using
the Assign Platform Codes app.

Administrative Information

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 239
 7/10/2024
The administrative information is shown here.

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

Related Information
Manage Platform Codes

Basic Information About a Platform Group

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a platform group. You maintain this information in the header and
on the General Information, Structure Information, Administrative Information and Attachment facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about a platform group and provides you with the necessary context.

You can change the status of a platform group in the header. A platform group can be either Active or Inactive.

General Information
This facet shows the general data for the platform group. This facet contains three sections, which display the platform
information, owner information and additional information elds.

In the Owner Information section, you maintain information about the platform owner. First you choose the Platform Owner
Type followed by the Platform Owner ID, which you choose according to the platform owner type you selected.

By choosing AB (Department resp.), you select the responsible force element from your organizational structure as the
platform owner ID.

By choosing ST (Position resp.), you select the responsible position as the platform owner ID.

By choosing VU (User responsible), you select the responsible user as the platform owner ID.

By choosing VW (Person respons.), you select the responsible person as the platform owner ID.

Structure Information
From the Structure Information facet, you can view the information about the lower-level platform codes or platform groups
assigned. You can de ne the Parent Platform Group on the General Information facet for the platform group.

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Attachments
You can attach les on the Attachments facet. For more information about attachments, see Attachment Service.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 240
 7/10/2024

Related Information
Manage Platform Codes

Assign Platform Codes

App ID: F4790

You can use this app to assign relevant business objects to the platform codes that have been de ned.

These assignments are then used at platform code level as the basis for customer-speci c reports and aggregations of various
data, for example in the areas of cost accounting, material consumption and procurement or maintenance activities.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Search for assignments of platform codes to business objects.

Display a list of assignments of platform codes to business objects with the material, WBS element and cost center
types.

Display a list of platform codes that are assigned as a leading platform for a speci c material.

Create assignments of business objects (with the material, WBS element or cost center types) to platform codes,
including the following data:

Con gurable customer-speci c eld values that support customer business processes and reporting.

Assignment start or end dates.

Text providing a detailed description of the assignment.

Create assignments of a leading platform for a speci c material.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Structure
The Assign Platform Codes app contains four different assignment types:

Material

WBS Element

Cost Center

Leading Platform for Material

All four assignment types have the same structure. There is a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets
below it that show different information about it. The structure of a platform code assignment is de ned as follows:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 241
 7/10/2024
General Information

Administrative Information

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for the platform code assignments using the elds at the top of the initial screen.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

You can assign a platform code to either a material, WBS element or a cost center.

The list page provides various list views for displaying different platform code assignments.

Creating an Assignment
Choose the list view for the object type for which you want to create a new assignment. Choose Create Assignment to create an
assignment. You must make entries in the elds marked with a red asterisk. The system de nes the current date as a default
Assignment - Start Date. You can change this if necessary.

To update an assignment, you need to open the object page in the edit mode. Check here that the elds marked with a red
asterisk contain data.

To delete a platform code assignment, you must select the respective entry and choose Delete.

Basic Information About a Platform Code Assignment

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a platform code assignment. You maintain this information in the
header and on the General Information and Administrative Information facets.

Header
The header shows the key information about the platform code assignment. You can delete the assignment by choosing Delete
at the top of the screen.

General Information
The General Information facet shows all general data for the platform code assignments.

You must rst make the required Customizing settings for the Assignment Detail 1 and Assignment Detail 2 elds as described
below:

You de ne the Assignment Detail 1 eld in Customizing under Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations
Platform Code De ne Text Values for the Assignment of Business Objects to Platform Codes .

• You de ne the Assignment Detail 2 in Customizing under Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations
Platform Code De ne Codes with Text for Assignment of Business Objects to Platform Codes .

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 242
 7/10/2024

 Note
The Business Object Type eld is read-only.

If a material is assigned to multiple platform codes, you may want to specify one of them as the leading platform (such as for
logistical or reporting purposes). This de nition is indicated by the Is Leading Platform eld. Please note that in the case of the
assignment type Leading Platform for Material, the Is Leading Platform eld is used instead of the Assignment Detail 1 and
Assignment Detail 2 elds.

Administrative Information
The administrative information is shown here.

Related Information
Assign Platform Codes

Find Technical Objects

App ID: F4635

The Find Technical Objects app is an SAP Fiori app variant, which adds the following Defense & Security-speci c data and
actions to the corresponding core maintenance app Find Technical Object.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Display speci c master, critical and site equipment data on the Operational Equipment facet.

Display the technical status information in the header area of the application.

Access related applications observing any Defense & Security speci c restrictions.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Related Information
Find Technical Object
Maintenance Management

Find Maintenance Noti cations

App ID: F4633

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 243
 7/10/2024
The Find Maintenance Noti cations app is an SAP Fiori app variant, which adds the following Defense & Security speci c data
and actions to the corresponding core maintenance app Find Maintenance Noti cation.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Display the technical status in the header area and on the technical status facet of the noti cation.

Change the technical status of the noti cation.

Forward the noti cation to another work center by using the maintenance relationships de ned between force elements.

Access related applications observing any Defense & Security speci c restrictions

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Related Information
Find Maintenance Noti cation
Maintenance Management

Find Maintenance Orders

App ID: F4634

The Find Maintenance Orders app is an SAP Fiori app variant, which adds the following Defense & Security-speci c data and
actions to the corresponding core maintenance app Find Maintenance Orders.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Display the technical status in the header area and on the operations and technical status facets for the order.

Change the technical status of the order operation.

Forward the order to another work center by using the maintenance relationships de ned between force elements.

Access related applications observing any Defense & Security speci c restrictions.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 244
 7/10/2024

Related Information
Find Maintenance Orders
Maintenance Management

Find Maintenance Orders and Operations

App ID: F4632

The Find Maintenance Orders and Operations app is an SAP Fiori app variant, which adds the following Defense & Security-
speci c data and actions to the corresponding core maintenance app Find Maintenance Orders and Operations.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Display the technical status in the header area and on the technical status facet of the order operation.

Change the technical status of the order operation.

Supported Device Types

Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

Related Information
Find Maintenance Orders and Operations
Maintenance Management

Support for Flight Operations

Introduction
This documentation only describes the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security features regarding support for ight operations. In
some areas, only minor changes have been made, and these features (delta) are described here. In these cases, please also see
the existing documentation. Some new features are also available, which are only described here because they are applicable to
the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution.

Purpose
This product feature is a collection of enhancements in the area of Support for Flight Operations, improving usability for the
maintenance technician or other related roles, and extending the usage of the functionality to users beyond ight-related
functions, for example for land and sea-based operations.

With regard to the new features described, they also apply to any other type of order (such as travel orders, tasking orders and
so on for trucks or ships), depending on the terminology con gured.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 245
 7/10/2024
In the interests of usability, we are using the ight terminology throughout the documentation for this product feature.

Features
Adjust ight-speci c terminology:

Con gure the terminology for speci c customers for menu paths, screen titles, screen elds, button texts, so that the
usage of "Support for Flight Operations" functionality in the system can also be used in non ight-related areas of
Defense & Security organizations (such as trucks, ships, and so on.)

Con gure the terminology for the following two areas:

Flight Order

Flight Plan

De ne terms generically or for speci c order types in the area "Flight Order"

Copy ight order (create ight order with reference):

De ne user-speci c default values in the settings menu, which are used when the ight order is created.

Optionally, enter a reference ight order on the initial creation screen if you want to copy an existing ight order.

During creation of a ight order with reference, decide which data sections of the reference order you would like to copy
to the new ight order.

Implementation Considerations
You have familiarized yourself with the Plant Maintenance (PM) component and the Aerospace & Defense (A&D) industry
solution and have con gured the necessary settings in Customizing.

 Note
Note that the following functions in Support for Flight Operations are available when the business function SAP S/4HANA
Defense & Security (IS_S4DFS_1) is activated.

Integration
The functions for the Support for Flight Operations area are integrated with:

The Plant Maintenance (PM) component

The Aerospace & Defense (A&D) industry solution

SAP Fiori Apps

In the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution, you can maintain the ight operations in the SAP Fiori app Display Status
Board.

Adjust Flight-Speci c Terminology

Con gure the terminology for speci c customers for menu paths, screen titles, screen elds, button texts, so that the
usage of "Support for Flight Operations" functionality in the system can also be used in non ight-related areas of

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 246
 7/10/2024
Defense & Security organizations (such as trucks, ships, and so on.)

Con gure the terminology for the following two areas:

Flight Order

Flight Plan

De ne terms generically or for speci c order types in the area "Flight Order"

Master Equipment

Introduction
This section only describes the features of the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution for master equipment. For
information about this, see the existing master equipment documentation.

Features
Since the technical status aggregation has changed, this affects the master equipment. For more information, see Technical
Status and Operational Status.

Customizing Settings for Master Equipment

You make the Customizing settings for the master equipment by choosing:

Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations Master Equipment Assign Status Pro le to Equipment
Category

Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations Master Equipment De ne Model Identi cation Code (MIC) for
Master Equipment

Critical Equipment

Introduction
This section only describes the features of the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution for critical equipment, which is a new
SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security object. However it is based on site equipment. For information about this, see the existing
site equipment documentation.

Use
A critical/site equipment (CSEQ) is an equipment that represents either a site equipment, a critical equipment or a
combination of both.

A critical equipment is therefore an enhanced equipment that de nes an equipment as critical without having to provide this
equipment with all master equipment properties. The critical equipment is based on the site equipment and is used to
represent major important systems or components, such as ship engines, and displays their operational and technical status.

Features

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 247
 7/10/2024
De ne an equipment as a critical equipment by adding technical status functionality (technical status pro le) to it.

Choose the option to stop the technical status aggregation at the critical equipment, which means that the technical
status is not aggregated up to the superior critical equipment or the master equipment.

Install one or more critical equipments, for example to represent components in the overall technical object in a
technical object structure. Only one master equipment, which represents the overall technical object, can be part of the
structure.

De ne hierarchies of critical equipment within a technical object structure.

Create maintenance noti cations or orders, and set the technical status for the critical equipment or its subordinate
pieces of equipment.

Display the technical status for the critical equipment or its subordinate pieces of equipment as an aggregation of all
maintenance noti cations or orders.

Display critical equipment information in the following:

Equipment master data (WebGUI and selected SAP Fiori apps)

Overview Technical Status for Master/Critical Equipment (WebGUI app)

Status Board (SAP Fiori app)

Customizing Settings for Critical Equipment

You make the Customizing settings for the critical equipment by choosing:

Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations Critical/ Site Equipment Assign Status Pro le and Control
TStat Aggregation for Equipment Category

Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations Critical/ Site Equipment De ne Model Identi cation Code
(MIC) for Critical/Site Equipment

Integration
The functions for critical/site equipment are integrated in the applications for creating and changing equipment (transaction
codes IE01 and IE02 ), the staff assignment board , and the Display Status Board app.

Technical Status and Operational Status

Introduction
This section only describes the features of the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution for the aggregated technical status,
which is a SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security object. For more information, see the existing technical status documentation. No
changes have been made to the operational status in SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution. For more information see the
existing operational status documentation.

Prerequisites
You have made the following settings in Customizing:

Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations Master Equipment Assign Status Pro le and Control TStat
Aggregation for Equipment Category

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 248
 7/10/2024
Defense & Security Support for Flight Operations Critical/Site Equipment Assign Status Pro le and Control TStat
Aggregation for Equipment Category

Master data and transaction data has been created in the system.

Technical Status

Use
The dynamic technical status valuates the current, technical status of a master or critical equipment. It is linked to various
restriction levels and can be displayed using symbols.

The status is de ned as a result of a maintenance task. In cases where various defects or operations that affect ight
operations cause various technical statuses to be set, the technical object is assigned the overall technical status that has the
highest restriction.

Unlike the logic in SAP Business Suite, where the aggregated technical status for a master equipment is stored in the database
of the master equipment and is re-calculated and updated whenever a technical status change occurs in a relevant
maintenance noti cation or order, the logic was changed with this product feature.

In the new solution, the technical status for the master or critical equipment is no longer aggregated when the technical status
change is made for maintenance noti cations or orders, but is aggregated whenever the technical status is displayed on the
screen, for example in the master data or status board application.

The advantage of the new logic is that only those maintenance noti cations or orders with a technical status,which refer to
technical objects that are still part of the technical object structure, are included in the aggregation. In the SAP Business Suite,
it could be the case that the technical status of maintenance noti cations or orders would in uence the aggregation of the
technical status for the master equipment, even though the reference object for the noti cation or order had in the meantime
been dismantled from the technical object structure, and replaced by a different equipment, therefore meaning it was no longer
actually relevant to the aggregation.

Some new features are available. Otherwise technical status features are identical to those described in the existing
documentation.

Features
Dynamic aggregated status.

Stop aggregated status at critical equipment level, for more information see the section Critical Equipment.

Integration
You can set the technical status in:

Maintenance noti cations

Maintenance orders

Flights

You can display it in the:

Master equipment

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 249
 7/10/2024
Critical equipment

Display status board

Flight

Flight plan

Overview of technical statuses

Overview of Technical Statuses

Introduction
This section only describes the features of SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution regarding Overview of technical Status
(transaction /ISDFPS/ LMTST1), which has minor enhancements. See also the former overview of technical status
documentation.

Features
Display of Critical equipment, aggregated technical status and stop technical status (if applicable)

Status Board

Use
The Status Board application (app /ISDFPS/LMSTB1 ) has been replaced with the SAP Fiori app Display Status Board. For more
information about the app, see Display Status Board.

The Status Board application provides an overview of the current technical situation that affects operations for the selected
technical objects. The master equipment, critical equipment, equipment, and functional locations are displayed with their
dependent objects.

The following data can be displayed:

Attributes of the technical object (such as operational status, location, con guration, identi er)

Current noti cations and orders/ ights

Pending measures from maintenance planning

Current measurement documents (such as remaining ying hours)

Integration
The status board is a summary of information from the following standard objects:

Technical object

Noti cation

Order

Flight

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 250
 7/10/2024
Measurement document

Measuring point

Maintenance plan

Revision

Related Information
Display Status Board

Display Status Board

App ID: F4733

You can use this app to enable various roles in a Defense & Security organization (commander, technical officer, maintenance
technician, and so on) to display the status of one or more technical objects, from a high-level status overview for a complete
eet to the detailed analysis of outstanding maintenance activities for a speci c object.

Key Features
You can use this app to:

Filter for technical objects, such as functional locations, master/critical/site or standard equipment, using various
attributes.

Display different lists of technical objects according to speci ed lter criteria in a grid format.

Display important data for each record in the list display, such as the tail number, model ID, operational status, technical
status, site, utilizer force element, number of open maintenance noti cations or work orders, remarks, operational
status pro le, user status pro le, user status, characteristic unit, planned date, measuring point, remaining days,
measurement reading, remaining counter value, and planned counter value.

Display object-speci c attributes.

Display a list of open maintenance noti cations.

Display a list of open maintenance orders.

Display a list of open ight orders.

Display a list of critical equipment that is part of the technical object structure, including its technical and operational
status.

Display a list of related maintenance plans.

Display a list of measurement documents / counter readings.

Display a list of revisions assigned to the technical object.

Con gure each of the lists above (columns, sort, lter, grouping).

● Select one or more master equipment and navigate to the Start Controlled Usage Rate application to view the usage
rates for this equipment.

Supported Device Types

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 251
 7/10/2024
Desktop

Tablet

Smartphone

View
Technical objects are displayed in a list when you open the app. You can de ne a custom view and save this.

There are ve list reports displaying the status for one or more technical objects. These technical objects can be one of the
following:

Master equipment

Critical equipment

Site equipment

Equipment

Functional location

 Note
The Site Equipment facet can be enabled or disabled from customizing based on the customer’s requirements to view site
equipments or no.

The Update Equipment button is available for master equipment and critical equipment, which you can use to change certain
eld values. Be aware that authorization restrictions may exist. If errors occur during the equipment update, the cause of the
errors needs to be resolved rst.

If updates are available for a technical object or its dependent objects, such as noti cations or orders, an alert in the form of a
light bulb is shown in the list report, which is found at record and tab level. You can then navigate to the master
equipment/functional location and nd the changes. To deactivate the alert, you can simply click on it. If you want to deactivate
all alerts displayed collectively, you can do so by clicking on Con rm All Alerts. This option is available in the list page and on the
object page.

 Note
The system observes all objects and elds for alerts as a default. You can also specify the objects (which are from the
transactions IE02, IW22 and IW32) in the table DFS_STB_ALERT for which you want an alert to be shown in the FIORI app if
these objects are updated.

Structure
The Display Status Board app has a header section at the top of the screen and a series of facets below it that show different
information about it. The structure of a status board is de ned as follows:

General Information

Noti cation

Workorder

Flight Order

Critical Equipment
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 252
 7/10/2024
Maintenance Plan

Measurement Document

Revision

 Note
For more information about the SAP Fiori launchpad and how to work with objects, see SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Search
You can search for a technical object using the elds at the top of the initial screen. A technical object can either be a master
equipment, a critical equipment, an equipment or a functional location.

You can also use the function Adapt Filters to select different criteria. You can use the value help or F4 to de ne speci c search
conditions.

 Note
You can now use the force element structure search, which allows you to select or deselect an entire sub-tree.

You can also select one of the individual technical object facets shown here to see information about speci c objects in a
technical object.

Basic Information About the Status Board

This topic explains the basic information that is recorded for a status board.

Header
The header shows the key information about a status board and provides you with the necessary context.

General Information
This section shows the general data for the selected technical object. This facet contains the operational data, location and
status sections according to the object type involved, but these elds are read-only.

For more information about the different elds, please see the documentation for the respective object type.

Noti cation
Noti cations are created during corrective or breakdown maintenance in the system.

You can see all noti cations that are assigned to the technical object on this facet. If you have chosen Downward in the selection
lter Explosion, you can see the noti cations that are assigned to the technical object and all objects in the structure below the
technical object. If you have chosen Upward and Downward for the master equipment in the selection lter Explosion, you can
see the noti cations that are assigned to the complete structure of the technical object.

If a noti cation has been updated , you nd an alert in the form of a light bulb here. To con rm the alert, you can simply click on
it.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 253
 7/10/2024

Work Order
You can see all work orders that are assigned to the technical object on this facet. If you have chosen Downward in the selection
lter Explosion, you can see the work orders that are assigned to the technical object and all objects in the structure below the
technical object. If you have chosen Upward and Downward for the master equipment in the selection lter Explosion, you can
see the work orders that are assigned to the complete structure of the technical object.

If a work order has been updated, you nd an alert in the form of a light bulb here. To con rm the alert, you can simply click on it.

Flight Order
The ight order is represented using a special type of maintenance order that also contains an aircraft's ight-speci c data. The
ight order can be used to plan, execute, and complete actual ights.

You can see all ight orders that are assigned to the technical object on this facet.

If a ight order has been updated, you nd an alert in the form of a light bulb here. To con rm the alert, you can simply click on it.

Critical Equipment
The critical equipment term represents the important system or master equipment components, such as the engine of a ship.

You can view the critical equipment that has been assigned or created for the equipment on this facet. This is a read-only facet.

If you have chosen Downward in the selection lter Explosion, you can see the critical equipment that is assigned to the
technical object and all objects in the structure below the technical object. If you have chosen Upward and Downward for the
master equipment in the selection lter Explosion, you can see the critical equipment that is assigned to the complete structure
of the technical object.

Maintenance Plan
This contains a description of the maintenance and inspection tasks to be performed for maintenance objects. The maintenance
plan describes the date and scope of the task.

You can see all maintenance plans that are assigned to the technical object on this facet. If you have chosen Downward in the
selection lter Explosion, you can see the maintenance plans that are assigned to the technical object and all objects in the
structure below the technical object. If you have chosen Upward and Downward for the master equipment in the selection lter
Explosion, you can see the maintenance plans that are assigned to the complete structure of the technical object.

Measurement Document
The data transferred to the system after a measurement has been taken at a measuring point or a counter is recorded in a
measurement document. This transfer can be performed automatically or manually.

You can see all measurement documents that are assigned to the technical object on this facet. If you have chosen Downward in
the selection lter Explosion, you can see the measure documents that are assigned to the technical object and all objects in
the structure below the technical object. If you have chosen Upward and Downward for the master equipment in the selection
lter Explosion, you can see the measurement documents that are assigned to the complete structure of the technical object.

Revision
You can use revisions to combine larger service or maintenance tasks under a single number. These service or maintenance
tasks are generally planned on a long term basis.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 254
 7/10/2024
You can see all revisions that are assigned to the technical object on this facet. If you have chosen Downward in the selection
lter Explosion, you can see the revisions that are assigned to the technical object and all objects in the structure below the
technical object. If you have chosen Upward and Downward for the master equipment in the selection lter Explosion, you can
see the revisions that are assigned to the complete structure of the technical object.

Related Information
Display Status Board

Controlled Usage Rate

Use
Since maintenance resources, such as work stations, machines, or personnel, are limited, it is necessary to distribute periodic
maintenance tasks evenly throughout the year for all aircraft within a maintenance cycle. The use of aircraft must be monitored
to avoid too many maintenance tasks being due at the same time. This operation is known as the controlled usage rate.

In the Controlled Usage Rate application (transaction /ISDFPS/LMCUS1), you can display maintenance-relevant data in a table
or graphical overview, and navigate to the detail views.

You can navigate to the Controlled Usage Rate application from the Display Status Board application after selecting one or
more equipments, or you can access the application directly from the transaction.

Key Features
Data Selection

You select the data in the Select Technical Objects application. On the selection screen, you can use the properties from the
equipment or master equipment, maintenance plan, and revision as selection criteria. You can also set lters for characteristics
and characteristics lists.

In the Selection Pro le eld, you specify the selection pro le to be used. You de ne the selection pro les in Customizing, in the
Controlled Usage Rate section of the Customizing activity Con gure Selection Pro les (transaction /ISDFPS/CLMCUS).

You can use variants to de ne the data selection for the Controlled Usage Rate application. To do so, choose Goto Variants
. For more information, see the documentation for the Select Technical Objects program.

Overview table

The selected data is displayed in table form in an ALV grid, or as a diagram if you choose Graphic View. You can choose Change
Layout to change the display of the table and graphic to meet your requirements.

Data from the following areas can be displayed:

Technical objects with measuring points

Maintenance plans

Measurement documents

Revisions

In addition, information from the eld catalog is available that you can show or hide by changing the layout, for example:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 255
 7/10/2024
Sort Field

Customer-speci c eld

Remaining Days

Days until the next maintenance of the aircraft

Remaining Counter Value

Value indicating how long the aircraft can still be used until the next maintenance date.

Optimum Curve/Trend Curve

Ideal usage rate

Value <…>

Numerical value of property in question.

Text <…>

Labeling of the individual bars in the graphical representation.

Navigation

You can branch to various other applications from the Controlled Usage Rate application. The following pushbuttons are
available for navigation:

Technical Object

Takes you to the Display Equipment application

Maintenance Plan

Takes you to the Display Maintenance Plan application

Revision

Takes you to the Display Revision application

Measuring Point

Takes you to the Display Measuring Point application

Measurement Document

Takes you to the Display Measurement Document application

Application Log

Takes you to the Display Logs application

Customer-Speci c Adjustments with Business Add-Ins

Two Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are available for your speci c enhancements to the controlled usage rate.

You can use the BAdI Controlled Usage Rate: Extend ALV to Include Customer Fields (/ISDFPS/LM_CUS_ALV_BADI) to
extend the output list and the eld catalog to include customer-speci c elds.

You can use the BAdI Controlled Usage Rate: Extend GUI Status (/ISDFPS/LM_CUS_MENU_BADI) to extend the menu
to include customer-speci c commands.

In Customizing, choose Defense Forces & Public Security Support for Flight Operations Business Add-Ins .
This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 256
 7/10/2024

Activities
An aircraft is ready for a ight. The actual counter reading is stored in the measurement document. The measurement
document is assigned to the highest-level functional location (in the master equipment).

1. You select the aircraft in the Controlled Usage Rate application.

2. The aircraft is deployed.

3. The system determines the remaining ying hours.

4. The remaining ight time is calculated by subtracting the current value on the ight hours counter from the planned
ying hours allowed until the next periodic inspection.

If there are enough remaining ying hours for a ight, the aircraft is ready for the next ight.

If there are not enough remaining ying hours for a ight, the aircraft is scheduled for inspection.

5. Maintenance is carried out for the aircraft, if necessary.

The aircraft is ready for the next ight.

Usage Rate

Use
The ying hours of an aircraft are determined in a measurement reading for each ight. This value must then be transferred to
the system. It is entered as a measurement reading for the relevant measuring point in the master equipment. After a de ned
period, an inspection is performed at the dock. The regular actions based on the current value of the ight hours counter are
generated automatically by the maintenance plan scheduling function. An ascending ight hours counter is recorded for each
aircraft.

If an aircraft is not used with the maximum efficiency, it may reach the maximum ying hours long before the inspection date, or
be inspected even though it has remaining ying hours.

You can use the Mass Change Usage Rate application to change the usage rate for multiple aircraft at the same time.

Integration
The usage rate is used in the Controlled Usage Rate application.

Prerequisites
The following master data and transaction data exists in the system:

Technical objects

Measuring points

Measurement documents

Key Features

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 257
 7/10/2024
An extended form of the usage rate from the master equipment is used to control usage. The following values are important
here:

Actual usage rate

The actual usage rate speci es how many ying hours were own in a month.

Target usage rate

The target usage rate speci es the planned ying hours for an aircraft for a particular period of time.

You enter the target usage rate in the Quantitative Usage Rate list in the master equipment.

Ideal usage rate

The ideal usage rate speci es the ideal number of hours an aircraft should y in one month to ensure that it enters the next
inspection without any remaining ying hours.

Remaining ying hours

The remaining ying hours are the ying hours that are still available up to the inspection.

The remaining ying hours are calculated on the basis of the ight hours counter reading and the planned counter reading of
the last inspection that was carried out (initial counter reading).

The following example explains how the remaining ying hours are calculated.

Aircraft Current ying hours Last planned counter Remaining ying hours Calculation
reading

Aircraft 1 489 289 200 289 + 400 - 489

Aircraft 2 505 205 100 205 + 400 - 505

Aircraft 3 690 340 50 340 + 400 - 690

Aircraft 4 467 92 25 92 + 400 - 467

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 258
 7/10/2024

Remaining flying hours for planned usage

Mass Change Usage Rate

Use
You can use the Mass Change Usage Rate portal application to change the usage rate for multiple aircraft at once.

 Note
Note that it can take longer to make the change if you have selected more than 100 objects.

Integration
This application is integrated into the Business Package for Defense Forces & Public Security as a workset.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be ful lled:

SAP Enterprise Portal 7.0x with connection to the already installed S/4HANA system or NW Business Client with a
corresponding PFCG role that contains the new applications and was assigned to the users.

In the portal, the Defense applications have been assigned to the work center pool role and are under the Defense &
Public Security node. To be able to start these applications, the work center pool role must be assigned to the user, or
the worksets contained in this role must be assigned to one of the user’s existing roles.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 259
 7/10/2024

Key Features
The mass changes to usage rates is performed in three steps:

1. First you select the usage rates you want to change.

2. Then you perform the mass change for the selected usage rates.

3. Finally, you can check the changed usage rates.

Flight

De nition
A special type of maintenance order that also contains an aircraft’s ight-speci c data. The ight supports the planning,
execution, and completion of actual ights.

Use
A ight maps the logistical properties (dates, crew, and so on) and requirements (authorized con guration, and so on) of a real,
planned ight. Flights are used to manage actual ights and the business operations directly related to them. The units
technically responsible can use a comparison of the authorized and actual con guration in the ight to create the required
authorized con guration.

Users who create and edit ights can be members of an operational control team. The technical group is responsible for
detailed planning. Con rmation of the operations can be executed by the technical group.

You can also create training data for a ight training program. The following apps are available from the Fiori launchpad:

Con rm Training for Flight (/ISDFPS/PMTR1)

Approve Training for Flight (/ISDFPS/PMTR2)

Con rm and Approve Training for Flight (/ISDFPS/PMTR3)

Structure
When opening the Create Flight (/ISDFPS/LMFL01) app, you must rst make entries in the following elds:

Order Type

Key that identi es how a ight is used.

You de ne the order types in Customizing under Defense Forces & Public Security Support for Flight Operations
Flight Determine Maintenance Order Types for Flights .

Planning Plant

Key that uniquely identi es the planning plant.

Main WorkCtr

Key that uniquely identi es the main work center.

You can de ne default values for the elds under Edit Settings Flight .

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 260
 7/10/2024
You can also use the Reference eld to copy a ight.

The following elds and buttons are available for the Create Flight app (/ISDFPS/LMFL01).

Buttons

Operation List

Display individual operations for the ight (for example, setup operation).

Order Header Data

Display the ight header data.

Change Equipment

Takes you to change mode for the master equipment.

Display Equipment

Takes you to display mode for the master equipment.

Controlled Usage Rate

Takes you to the Controlled Usage Rate app.

Set to Techn. Complete

This button for technical completion of a ight is available in the app Change Flight (/ISDFPS/LMFL02) only.

Fields

Flight

Key that uniquely identi es a ight within a client. The ight number corresponds to the number of the maintenance
order, which can also be used to differentiate between ights.

Description

Short description of the ight.

You can enter longer texts using the Long Text function.

Force Element

Number of the force element assigned to a ight.

Order Type

Key that identi es how a ight is used.

You de ne the order types in Customizing, by choosing Defense Forces & Public Security Support for Flight
Operations Flight Determine Maintenance Order Types for Flights .

Maintenance Planning Plant

Key that uniquely identi es the maintenance planning plant.

Responsible Work Center

Key that uniquely identi es the work center responsible for this technical object.

You can use the Forward button to forward the order to a different responsible work center.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 261
 7/10/2024
Plant

Plant to which the responsible work center is assigned.

You make the Customizing settings by choosing Defense Forces and Public Security Support for Flight Operations
Flight Determine Status Pro le and Control Key .

Mission

Mission to which the ight is assigned.

Note the following dependent factors with regard to relationships with the force element:

If the mission entered is indirectly linked to the force element entered (Force Element eld), the force element
entry remains unchanged.

If the mission entered is indirectly linked to another force element, the force element entry in the Force Element
eld is overwritten with the new force element.

External ID

Flight identi cation number that is assigned outside of the SAP system.

Flight Data Screen Area

System Status

A status that was set internally as part of general status management. It informs the user that a certain business
operation was executed for an object.

Flight Status

User status, for example, setup, inspection, and so on.

Model ID

Model or weapon system with short description.

Auth. Con gn

The authorized con guration code de nes the con guration required for this ight.

Operational Role

An explanatory text for the con guration code. If you change the authorized con guration code, the name of the
assigned operational role also changes.

You can create, change, or display the operational role by choosing the apps Update Operational Role
(/ISDFPS/LMER01) or Display Operational Role (/ISDFPS/LMER02).

ACTL Con gn

The actual con guration is de ned as the con guration code in the master equipment. It describes the aircraft’s current
con guration. This data is displayed in the ight.

Deviation

Information about a deviation from the planned ight.

Deviation Reason

Information about the reason for a deviation from the planned ight.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 262
 7/10/2024
You can enter information about deviations and the reasons for these deviations during the ight if necessary and use it
to evaluate ight deviations in SAP Business Warehouse. It is not possible to only make entries in one of the two elds.
You can also display all of this information in the ight plan. In the ight display, the elds for which no entries have been
made are hidden. You can de ne deviations and deviation reasons in Customizing under Support for Flight Operations
Flight .

Date/Target Screen Area

Tkff Date/Time

Takeoff date and time in the UTC time zone.

Latest Takeoff

Takeoff time that ensures that the planned undertaking is possible.

 Example
An aircraft is to be refueled in the air at 11 am. For this to be possible, the aircraft must take off no later than 7 am.
This time is entered in the Latest Takeoff eld.

Land. Date/Time

Landing date and time in the UTC time zone.

Planned Flight Time

The planned time for arriving at the target and associated time unit.

Landing Site

Location that speci es a possible landing place for an aircraft.

Target

The target of the aircraft.

Runway

Location of the aircraft when ready for takeoff.

Call Sign

Name of the aircraft.

Edit Flight Legs

If a ight consists of multiple ight legs, you can use the Edit Flight Legs button to call the Legs for Flight dialog box on
which you can create and edit the required data. If ight legs have already been entered, a plus icon appears on the
button. If ight legs have not yet been entered, the systems displays a minus icon on the button. The entered ight legs
are also displayed in the Flight Plan application.

Reference Object Screen Area

Equipment

Assigned aircraft.

Tail No./ID

A customer-speci c key for identifying an individual piece of operational equipment (tail number).

Site

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 263
 7/10/2024
The location of the aircraft on the ground.

Technical Sts

The status of the aircraft from a technical point of view.

Crypto Sts

An encryption code.

Operational Status

A status (for example, OK, not OK, suitable for ight, suitable for operation) from the point of view of the operational
control team.

Check button

Starts the automatic availability check in the ight.

Delete Reference Object button

Deletes the data in the elds in the Reference Object screen area.

Settings

You can de ne default values for selected ight elds.

When you enter a new ight, the system proposes the values de ned under Edit Settings .

Integration
You can use the app Change Flight (/ISDFPS/LMFL02) to change ights and the app Display Flight
(/ISDFPS/LMFL03) to display ights.

Note that you can no longer use the DFPS transactions to display ights that have already been archived. You can only
display them using the transaction for displaying maintenance orders (app IW33).

Flights are displayed in the status board and the ight plan.

The master equipment is used as the reference object for the ight.

In the Controlled Usage Rate app, you can access maintenance-relevant data for the ight and the master equipment. It
is possible to go from the ight to the Controlled Usage Rate app.

Opening and Editing a Flight

Purpose
The ight supports the complete planning, processing, and settlement of maintenance tasks in the area of ight operations.

It provides all the departments involved with up-to-date information and thus makes aircraft maintenance more transparent.
You can use this information to make fact-based decisions regarding cost controlling or changes to maintenance strategies.

Process Flow
The execution of unplanned maintenance tasks using the ight comprises the following steps:

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 264
 7/10/2024
1. You open a ight and plan the work that needs to be done.

Note that when you create a ight for the ight operation, the default values are not automatically copied from the
control key. If you use task lists, such as maintenance task lists, the ight is an operation that is found after the setup
and before the shutdown in the sequence of operations. The other operations are only scheduled after the ight dates
have been manually copied. You manually copy the ight dates in the detail view for the operation dates, using the Copy
Flight Time button. This button is visible if the combination of plant and order type is assigned to the corresponding
control key in Customizing. In Customizing, choose Defense Forces and Public Security Support for Flight Operations
Flight Determine Status Pro le and Control Key .

Specify Default Values If you frequently have to enter the same recurring data for ights that are to be created, you can
enter this data as default values. This applies to the weapon system ID for example. You can enter a default value for the
weapon system ID for the user parameter /ISDFPS/MODID and in the ight settings ( Edit Settings Flight ). The
default values in the ight settings override the information in the user parameters. Default values that you have
deleted can be retained in the buffer after deletion so that they are displayed again when you restart the transaction,
even though they have been deleted. The correct up-to-date default values are only visible after you have entered new
values or have logged onto the system again.

2. You enter the ight-speci c data in the elds. This includes, for example:

Operation/exercise (link to project structure)

Authorized con guration

Flight status

3. You release the ight.

4. You perform the planned activities.

5. In the con rmation, technical information such as ndings, cause, downtimes, and activities, as well as the con guration
are con rmed. The con guration is automatically forwarded to the master equipment as the actual con guration.

6. You close the ight. The system stores the relevant data.

The maintenance department and the way operations are organized determine which employees or which areas perform these
steps.

In the aviation area, ight planning can be performed by the operational control team. Flights can be con rmed by the technical
department.

Copy Flight Order (Create Flight Order with Reference)

De ne user-speci c default values in the settings menu ( Edit Settings Flight ), which are used when the ight
order is created.

Optionally, enter a reference ight order on the initial creation screen if you want to copy an existing ight order.

During creation of a ight order with reference, decide which data sections of the reference order you would like to copy
to the new ight order.

Noti cation with Technical Status

Use
Maintenance requests are entered and de ned with noti cations that can be subdivided into different noti cation types.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 265
 7/10/2024
The technical status is set when the ight operation is organized. The technical status can be used in the noti cation.

Integration
The noti cation and technical status are displayed in the status board.

The technical status can be entered in the ight.

Prerequisites
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Defense Forces and Public Security Support for Flight
Operations Technical Status Activation by Noti cation Type .

Key Features
You can use the Create Noti cation (IW21) and Change Noti cation (IW22) apps when working with noti cations.

When you create a noti cation, you must specify master equipment as a reference object.

The following functions are available for noti cations:

You can specify the technical status in a noti cation to monitor the ight operation.

The system checks all entries for the technical status in the noti cations and orders/ ights. The status with the highest
restriction is transferred to the master equipment.

Mission

Use
A mission is subordinate to one or more force elements. Subtasks are mapped in missions. A ight can be assigned to a
particular mission.

Several ights can be grouped together in one mission, and several missions can be assigned to a force element. The following
graphic illustrates the structural relationship between ights, missions, and force elements.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 266
 7/10/2024

Activities
A mission is linked with a force element as follows:

1. Call the app Change Mission (/ISDFPS/LMFLM1).

2. Select the required force element.

3. Choose Create Mission.

A dialog box appears.

4. Enter a description for the new mission.

5. Save your entry.

The new mission de ned is available in the corresponding eld in the ight.

Con guration in the Flight

Use
The con guration is displayed and de ned in a ight as information for ight operations. A distinction is made between the
actual con guration and the authorized con guration.

Operations for the ight can be de ned to implement the authorized con guration in the aircraft.

You can use the ight to branch from the status board to the con guration.

Integration
The actual con guration is copied from the master equipment to the ight.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 267
 7/10/2024

Prerequisites
You have made the con guration settings in Customizing by choosing Defense Forces & Public Security Support for
Flight Operations Con guration Code Assign Con guration Code Class to Model Identi cation Code .

The necessary master data has been stored in the classi cation system.

The con guration is represented in the system as a con guration code. The con guration code is mapped in the system
as a characteristic value assignment. The functions of the S/4HANA standard system Classi cation System,
Characteristic, and Characteristic Value Assignment component are used. For more information, please see the
documentation for the Classi cation (CA-CL).

Activities
You edit ights using the Change Flight (/ISDFPS/LMFL02) app.

Make Con guration Settings

1. In the Auth. Con gn eld, enter the authorized con guration. Alternatively, you can choose Edit Authorized Con gn to go
to the classi cation functions and assign a characteristic to the authorized con guration code.

The system enters the entry from the reference object (master equipment) in the ACTL Con gn eld.

2. Choose Goto Operation List .

The Operation Overview screen appears. In the Operation Short Text eld, you can enter a description of the
con guration.

3. You can display existing task lists and include one in the ight under Extras Task List Selection Display Task Lists .

Con rm the Con guration

Once the authorized con guration has been implemented in the aircraft by the technical department, proceed as follows:

1. Call the Create PM Order Con rmation (IW41) app.

Enter the con rmation or order number and choose Enter.

2. On the Actual Data screen, choose Con gCd (con guration code) and enter the current con guration using the
classi cation with characteristics.

Once you have saved your data, the actual con guration is changed in the master equipment. This change is automatically
copied from the master equipment to the Actual Con guration eld in the ight.

Status Management for the Flight

Use
The individual process steps of the ight operation are monitored using various statuses, which can be con gured in
Customizing for noti cation and order types.

You can display the various current statuses for one or more aircraft in the system at any time.

The status can also be used to control user authorizations.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 268
 7/10/2024

 Example
Only authorized persons can reset the technical status. Authorizations are assigned in status management on the basis of
user roles.

Integration
The technical status is transferred to the master equipment. The operational status can be entered in the master equipment.

Prerequisites
You have made the following settings in Customizing:

Under Defense Forces and Public Security Support for Flight Operations Technical Status Activation by Order
Type

Under Defense Forces and Public Security Support for Flight Operations Basic Settings De ne User Status

Master and transaction data has been created.

Key Features
Measures relating to ight operations are executed in the system using ights. Different types of statuses are available for
controlling ights:

System status

The system status row shows which system statuses are currently set for the order/ ight being processed. The system
statuses are set internally by the system and determine whether certain business operations are permitted.

The system status Complete Technically cannot be set until all technical status entries have been reset.

Flight status

The ight status is con gured using the user status function. It provides information about whether an aircraft is being
inspected or set up, for example.

The ight status can only be set in the ight. No relationships or dependencies exist with other statuses and objects
related to ight operations.

Technical status

The technical status is set in the order or ight. It is used to monitor aircraft from a technical safety perspective.

In Customizing, you use the user status functions to de ne the technical statuses that are available.

Unlike the ight status, this status is linked to other ight operations objects, and in uences the operational status.

Operational status

The operational status is a controlling element from operational control. It can be linked to a master equipment. The
operational status is only displayed in the order/ ight.

In Customizing, you use the user status functions to de ne the operational statuses that are available.

You can branch from the ight in some cases to display and change the various statuses or enter a new status.

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 269
 7/10/2024

Disconnected Operations

Use
Armed forces, police organizations, and aid organizations must respond to the challenge of operating in communication-
challenged environments, where connectivity to their SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution is not always guaranteed due
to the following reasons:

The type of connectivity often varies according to the location or situation involved.

Data transmission costs may be too high for limited budgets.

Data transmission is degraded or not permitted for safety or operational reasons.

Transmission protocols restrict how data can be transmitted and stored.

Backend systems are not available (planned or unplanned).

These factors mean that armed forces, police organizations, and aid organizations need to use additional IT systems to provide
the required business continuity.

Architecture
Disconnected operations in the SAP S/4HANA Defense & Security solution enable customers to have one central system and
one or more remote servers.

Central System

The central system is an SAP S/4HANA system and covers the broad range of processes that are relevant to the armed forces,
police organizations, and aid organizations.

Remote Server

The remote server is an SAP S/4HANA system at a remote site and works offline in communication-challenged environments
and synchronizes to the central system when communication is possible to enable business processes across the landscape.

The remote server is used at permanent and partially permanent sites. It uses the same software as the SAP S/4HANA
installation in the central system. The remote server differs to the central system, in that it has a subset of features and data. It
communicates with the central system on an intermittent basis.

Prerequisites
Customers must also:

Activate the DFS_DISCONNECTED_STRATEGIC BC set

Establish RFC connections between the central system and the remote servers

Maintain the system landscape

Con gure number ranges

Delete HR-related data if the remote server was built using a client copy

Enable change protection

Lock SAPGUI transactions to prevent users from creating master data in the remote system

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 270
 7/10/2024
Implement appropriate roles and authorizations to prevent users from creating master data using Fiori applications

Activate recording of local Customizing changes

Set up FMDERIVE for FM derivation

Data Management in Defense & Security

In this section, you can nd the functions available for managing your data.

Related Information
Data Management in SAP S/4HANA

This is custom documentation. For more information, please visit the SAP Help Portal 271